Manual Petrel

(1)
¿
I L
o (tr
nE=
.= .N .9 H
ts
V,rH
=
o CN
CN F
o- o
¡rF-U L¡
trLl,!e
-,
¡r ñt E-
g¡,
-
-
oÜ ? tlr
t-
C' rrCJ g) l¡¡ FL I g¡,
r
c) v, F --
I
(t, rts o I
ln
ar
- ==r L
H F(tr
lr
r
(¡)o)=
-¡rI (l) I
rrr
-
I-
o-cn(tr o- o- C§
g?
t
About this Manual
l+
C\ CD CT) cr) II'' L.l) LO Lr) (O r'- CO O)O-C!<- lJ)Lr)co(o(o F- O)OC) C\ c\

F-r- (\I C\ C\ C\ C\] c..l c.l c\ c'.1 c? c? c.)
:
-C\C\C!c\
!::::
: :: :G)
o
:o) :O
:C
.O
:: 0)
-o
o
ii
:
:L L
@A .ts
(g i@ C
.Ec :0) i-
:
(E
O ;.
:cc
: ñ1
:=
.C
:P
CE
(¡)
v) a iP :(O :
:o .O q
O
C!
o-
(E
-=
Oñ
a
o)
:C
,C
:s
:C)
:O
E
.a :
c) (o
E .PC 0) E
O i
(E
o 9=
c/) a) c)
:C) :C
:0)
:C) C;
c)
: E
(tr LO
(o
q
o)
@
(§
-o -óz U) i: _.c
o-¡
:
: O-) E
.C
-o
(§
0)
=
:
(o
o_
-o
G)
o- C (E CE^ E E :Ctr f, C Z.
= OJ 0)
:P O
J .O E c) O
0) O
(-) o) O- a :C =
(§
:=
:A- Ctr
o (o
CE
o) I
o @
o)
.L
m
CO
C
ac-) o) -o o) -ó
o) .=
(./) iq
iq o Yi c» o)
'¡= O
CU
o
.N
C
C
.F o_
-
CO
= O 0) C cn -o _o) 0) (5(§ O -.c

O .F c§ C = 0) o) C§.
o) .= t! a_
(1 v) +OJ .-
a Z- .C +G) ;r 0)
láa-
U)
o-)
(tr
E (§
o) : o
o)
(tr
F-o)
C o
6)
a
OJ O C-/)
o)
'-lOI
(§
o_
>-l
,Y<
@
C
o)
o)
o) -(J
"O
o) E O E CJ
(¡)-9r .O o O
c)
o
x o) C
O
-)
0 o O
o- o) I =o) u)1 :q
:-
o)
o)l
o)
E o .@
I
o)
(tr (§
>. (§ o
C§
C§
I
O
Z
C (E
co)
'q
-.o
O
=O= LUo q) (J
@
o) - 4. o)
_a r=
I r
(./)
c0)
:= E .c o->
sO cn o o) OJ o E o a_
E'r: .OE o-o
I
0) o_ o) a o-)
(-) O r-Ci a _t .S¿ -o= = .s2l
.O
.c
'->.
o) E E
(o =.A r¿
cf) (§ C§
@ 0) a
C
(§ o I
o)
-o) O
O
o) ., o) O O c! E q) c/)
o
I
E E
CJ; C§
c -.c o o O
= (o o)
CU
E
.C O OO >-Y
.a o) C -@
O -(] .2 C' ,a
0) o C 0) LLi C)
9
OYJ C o (t) C o) -.c 0) O (./)
OE= -
OJ O
O- O -o C.)
E @L o_ LO_ c-D o_ c/) :) o- C-) a o_ (§ U) c/) (-/)
O .2 CO -t d) C§
0)
C§ 6 @
(I)< C) O t-- o ;-- L
J =
(./)
o
0)
J J
0) q)
J a
,!:
st
(tr
m
o
F
um[fLttf1r.,tlJtuult,uü.u. lLllu ll
t
l
Seismically AlignedSegments..... ............122 r
I
Composite lines........."... .................. .......122

Procedure
- Building Composite lntersections
a 2D Base Map Window
from
.. .. . ....122
I¡
Procedure Building Composite lntersections from
-
an lnterpretation Window ........................125 I
Jumper Composite Section .. . ....121
Procedure Creating a Jumper Composite Section....127
Lesson 4
- Seismic Data Visualization and Manipulation
-
-
Windows Ti1ing............. ......130
-
Windows to Visual Groups Linking
Procedure
..........131
i
- Linking Windows to Visual Gr0ups..........132
Windows to Coordinate Groups Linking...."..... . ...133
I
Procedure Linking Windows to Coordinate Groups..134

- tI
Synchron ized Camera Position for 3D Wind0ws............ 1 34
Procedure Synchronizing a Camera Position for 3D
-
Windows...... ...13b -
Seismic Ghost Curve. ...136
¡
Procedure
- Creating a Seismic Ghost Curve
lntersection Style Settings
..............131
.................. ....138 ¡
Settings Dialog Box for 3D Seismic Data in a 3D
-
Window ..140
SEG-Y Settings.............."... ....."................143 I
I
Survey Manager .................143
Procedure Using the Survey Manager to Sort and
-
Manage Seismic Data ........"..... ................14b
t
I
Procedure
Survey
- Searching for Seismic Data in .................141
Manager
the
a
Data Selection in the Survey Manager ..........................i47 ¡
Procedure Realizing Selected Seismic Data in
the Survey
-Manager ..148 ü
ts
Seismic Data Visualization using the Survey Manager.l48
Procedure Moving Seismic Data into F01ders...........148
Procedure
- Changing the Template for Multiple t¡
-
Entries in the Survey Manager....... ..149
Color Manipulation............ ................ ......149 ú
Procedure
- Creating a New Color Template ..............150 !
lmport and Export of Color Templates.......... . .............151
Procedure
- .......... Palettes
0 pacity Ta b ...
Editing Color ..."....j52
.......... 1 b6
L
I. Table of Contents
Petrel Geophys cs
L
Lesson 5 Visualization Tools .'.......'.157
Volume
- Benderrng..... ......157
Procedure-UsingVolume Rendering..... .............158
Volume Wall Optrons ...'.... .160
Procedure Displaying Volume Wa11s.........................'l 61
Light Tool
- ......162
Applrcations of the lightT001............... 164
........."...' ...... ......"165 o
Procedure
- Using the Light Tool
Light Tool Examples ..... ......'166
o
C
lmmersion M0de........"... .....161

=
Procedure Starting the lmmersion M0de........ 168
@'
-
lmmersion Mode Available Tools .............169 0)
Visualrzing Seismic Data . ...... .... 170 =

C
Exercrses
-
Manrpulating Colors rom the
f Seismic lnterpretation
o_
Toolbar ..........170
Manipulating Seismic Llnes ln an lnterpretation
Window ..... .111
Exploring the Settings of the Interpretati0n Window .. 173
Modifying the Seismrc Data Display (Wrggle Drsplay) ..174
Setting a Display Scale for the lnterpretatlon Window 175
Manipulating Seismic Lines in 2D and 3D Windows.....'176
Displaying Base Maps and Annotatlons in 3D
Windows....... 178
Displaying Base Maps and Annotations in 2D

Windows...... .............179
Creating Random lntersections ....... ....'179
CompositeLines............. . - ...182
Creating Composite Lines in 3D Windows. ....... ........183
Creating Composite Lines ln an lnterpretation
wrndow " 184
Creating a Jump Tie Section ...........'.186
Displaying Multiple Selsmic Vlews on the Same
Screen ...........186
Linking lnterpretatton or 3D Wlndows to Coordinate
- 0ptional
Groups ...........188
Using a Seismlc Ghost Curve .......".....190
Modifying the Seismrc Data Display. ..."191
Using the Survey Manager....".. ..............19?

Editing and Creating Color Palettes .194
lmportingandExportingColorPalettes ..................196
Table of Contents.9
Petrel Geophysics
Rendering a Seismic V01ume......... ...........191
Displaying Volume Wa11s............ ..............200
Summary...... .......201
Module3-Fault1nterpretation......................................'.203
Learning objectives ..................203
- Fault lnterpretation in Petrel

'l .....204
Lesson
lnterpretation Manager 205
Procedure 0pening the lnterpretation Manager 206
-
Fault lnterpretation in Petre1............ ........201
L
Manual Fault Picking ..........201
Procedure Picking Faults Manually .""......208
Procedure
- Editing a Fault Segment....... ..................210 a
Procedure
- Moving a Fault Segment....... ...................212
-
Move Faults Laterally 0ption .......... .........214
Procedure Moving Faults Laterally .................. .........21 4 L
Procedure
- Displaylng and Annotati ng 1ts............ 6
Fau 2 1
L
-
Clean Faults ....................218
- Cleaning Faults.....".....
Procedure .......218 L
E
Fault Autotracking .............. .. ................219
Procedure Tracking Faults .."........ ........221
- I!
Procedure
- Digitizing a Fault on a Surface.................223
Restrict Mode ........... .........2?5
Procedure Bestricting lnterpretation Displays in a
- I
3D Window.. .......................225 !
- lnterpreting Faults
Exercises ...................226
Manually lnterpreting Fau|ts............ ........226 II
Editing and Manipulating Faults using the Function
Toolbar ..........227
T
Editing and Manlpulating Faults using the I
lnterpretation Window 228
Cutting a Fault Segment....... .. .............228
Joining Two Points .............229
Using the lnterpretation Manager for Handling Faults..229
Faults
Displaying and Annotating ............230
0uestions.....
Beview ................231
Summary...... .......231
L
10 . Table of Contents Petre Geophvsics

L
I
I
Module Horizon lnterpretation ...................................233

4
Learning
-0bjectives.... ... ......233
Lesson 1 Horizon lnterpretation in Petrel ......................234
-
Function Bar lcons for Horizon lnterpretation ... .........29s
Horizon lnterpretation Techniques ....236
Horizon Interpretation Workflow...... ........231
Procedure
Lesson 2
- Creating or lnserting a New Horizon
Autotracking .............. ...
. .....238
. .243
-
Guided Autotracking .-..243
Procedure Performing ided Autotracking .............Z43
-
Seeded 2D Autotracking...... .. ...
Gu
... . . .245
Procedure Performing Seeded 2D Autotracking.......Z45
-
Seeded 3D Autotracking .. ......... .....246
Procedure Performing Seeded 3D Autotracking.......246
-
Autotracking Tabs and Settings ...............248
Constraints Tab................ .........................261
Paintbrush Autotracking in 3D Windows .."....................26S
Procedure Performing Paintbrush Autotracking in
a 3D
-
Window ........."............265
Procedure Performing Box and Polygon Paintbrush
-
Autotracking .......................261
Lesson 3 Horizon Editing and Manipu1ati0n...................269
-
Seismic Horizon Display Styles .......... ....269
Procedure Displaying and Annotating a Horizon
-
in an lnterpretation Wind0w...."............. ....209 .
Procedure Displaying and Annotating a Horizon in
a 3D
-
Window ......................211
Procedure Displaying a Neighboring lnterpretation .272
-
lnterpretation Editin9........... ... ... .. .213
Parent-Child Editing.......... . .. .. 274
Procedure
- Editing Parent and Child Points...in..an . Zl5
lnterpretation
lnspector Tool ...."......... . .276
Procedure Using the lnspector T001.............. .. .Z7B
-
Horizon Flattening in 2D............. . 280
Procedure Flattening 3D Vol umes.. ...........................28j
-
Flattened 0bjects."....... .......284
lnterpretation Ouality Fi|ter............. ... ....286
Procedure
- Using the lnterpretation 0uality.................281
Horizon 0perations. Bulk Shift
Filter.....286
Petre Geophysics Tal¡le of Contents. ll

-
Procedure
- Bulk Shifting a Horizon ......281
Horizon Operations:Smoothing.... ....290
Procedure Smoothi ng a Horizon.. ". "........................... 290
Lesson 4
-Horizon lnterpretation Surface Converslon
-
and Surface Attributes Generation ................292
Make Surfaces Process ......292
Procedure Generating a Surface... ......292
Procedure
- ng a H0ri20n...... ..........................294
Procedure
- Smoothi
Creatrng an Attribute Map Based on
-
Surface 0perations.... .........296
Surface Attributes ..............297
:
Procedure
Exercises
- Generating Surface Attri butes.....................299
lnterpreting Horizons
............291
-
Using a Simple Horizon lnterpretation Workflow ....299
SettingupHorizonTrackingParameters .................302
Editing Horizon lnterpretations Manually and
Automatically ..............."....".305
Horizon 0perations: Bulk Shifting a Horizon
Interpretatron ................307
Horizon 0perations: Smoothing a Horizon
lnterpretation ................308
Displaying and Annotating Horizons: IVodifying the
Seismic Horizon Display .....309
Flattening a Horizon and Generating Flattened 3D
Volumes ........313 ü
Generating Flattened 3D Volumes.. ..........314 L=
Creatrng 2D Grd Surfaces wrth the Make/Edit

Surface Process ..................3'15 t-
E
Smoothing Surfaces ...........318
Creating Attribute Maps........".".. ..............320
Generating Surface Attrrbutes .................320 {E
Review 0uestions..... ................322
Summary...... .......322
¡.
E.
Module 5 Seismic Restoration 2D.................................323
-
Learning 0bjectives ..................323
Lesson 1 Seismic Restoration for 2D H0ri20ns.....".......".324
f
-
Restoration Model ....... .. .........................325
Procedure
- Bestoring a Seismic Secti0n....................326 I¡
:
Vrew the Restored Seismic ........ 3?9
12 . Tall e of Contents Petrel GeophVsics
a
¡
Interpretation Ouarity check in the Bestored
section."..330
0C the lnterpretation in Restored Secti0n..............
."....330
Bestoration Attributes ........332
Bestoration Model Settings...... . .. .........................337
Exercise
- Section
Restoring a Seismic .....33g
0uestions......
Review
...............340
Summary.... .......340
Module 6Depth Conversion.

-0bjectives....
Learning
....................341
..............341
Lesson 1 Basic Velocity Modeling
-
Domain Conversion Workflow......
............342
............342
Velocity Modeling Examples ....................344
lnput Data Ouality Control ........................345
procedure
- Creating a Crossplot of Well
Model Well Data Method
TDB Data...345
.. ... ... ....... .....348
Velocity lntervals ................3S0
Procedure Defining Velocity Intervals.. ..."................ 350
-
Velocity Modeling Using Well Data ................. ... ......... 353
Procedure Using Well Data to Create a Velocity
-
M0de1........... .............."........353
Correction and 0utput from Velocity Modeling .............354
Procedure Creating 0utput to Ouality Check the
-
M0de1...........
Velocity
......"..3S5
Well TDR Estimation parameters .............3b6
Procedure-EstimatingWellTDR.."... .................357
Velocity Modeling with Uncertalnty. .. .
....".......... ...358
Procedure lnserting a Standard Deviation Surface ..358
-
Procedure Using Uncertainty t0 Create a Velocity
-
IV0de1........... .......................359
Lesson 2 Domain Conversion.... ................362
-
Procedure
- Performing a Domain Conversion by
Active Velocity Model..... . .................362
General Depth C0nversi0n............... .........364
Procedure Performing a Domain Conversion of
-
Several 0bjects Simultaneously.....
.................364
Seismic Data Domain Conversion ............366
Procedure Performing a Domain Conversion on
Seismic Data
-
Depth Conversion for 3D Grids....... ..........368
Petrel Geophyslcs
Tab e of Contents . 13
L-
L
r.-
lnterpretation 0uality Check in the Restored Section....330
0C the lnterpretation in Restored Secti0n................ ....330
f Attribuies
I. Bestoration ... ....332
Bestoration N/odel Settin9s................... ...............337
r_- - Bestoring a Seismic Section

Exercise .....339
f
r.-
0uestions.....
Review
Summary......
........... ....340
.......340
f
r,_-
Module
Learning
Lesson 1
-
6Depth Gonversion.
-Objectives
Basic Velocity lVlodeling
....................341
Domain Conversion Workflow...... ............342

................341
............342
Velocity IVodeling Examples ............... ....344

lnput Data Ouality Control ................... ....345
Procedure
- Creatrng a Crossplot of Well
lVlodel Well Data Method
TDR Data...345
................... ....348
Velocity lntervals ...............350
Procedure Defining Velocity lntervals .............".".. ....350
-
Velocity Modeling Using Well Data................"......... ....353
Procedure
- . Using Well Data to Create a ......"..."....
M0de1.........
Velocity
....353
Correction and 0utput from Velocity Modeling ........ ....354
Procedure
- Creating 0utput to Oualrty Check the........"355
M0de1...........
Velocrty
Well TDH Estimation Parameters ...."..".."..356
Procedure-EstimatingWellTDR... ................357
Velocrty Modeling wlth Uncertainty ..............358
Procedure lnserting a Standard Deviation Surface ..358
Procedure
- Using Uncertainty to Create a Velocity
- 359
3bt
Procedure Performing a Domain Conversron by
- M0de1........
Active Velocity .......................362
General Depth C0nversi0n............... ........364
-
Severa I 0bjects
S imu |tane0us|y................................ .... 364
Seismic Data Domain Converslon ...........366

Procedure Performing a Domarn Conversion on
-
Seismic Data.........
Depth Converslon for 3D Grids....... ..........368
Pet e Geoph\,s cs Table of Confefts. l3
-* --Jl-
Procedure Performing a Depth Conversion on a
3D Grid- 368
Exercises 1 Velocity Modeling .................37i
-
Ouality Checking Time-Depth Relationships for Wells..371
DefiningVelocityModellntervals...."."........................376 _
Creating an Uncorrected Velocity Model using Well
Da1a............. .......................317
Creating a Corrected Velocity Model Using Well Data..37g
Creating a Velocity Model With Uncerta inty .................382
Exercises 2 Performing a Domain C0nversi0n................384
-
Depth Converting a 3D Grid............... .......384
General Depth C0nversi0n............... .........384
Using the Domain Convert by Active Velocity Model
Command..... .......................385
L,
Using the General Depth Conversion Pr0cess................387
0bject....
Converting More than One ........387
0uestions.....
Heview ................388
I
L.
Summary...... ......"388
Appendix A L.
- Shortcut Keys for Seismic
!nterpretation....,,............. ...,...,...389
L-'
Appendix B Surface Attributes L-

a
................393
-
I
¡.-
C
¡,
fT.
t.
L
F
E
b-
14 . Table of Contents Petrel Geophysics

a.
L.
1-
-j
r. .l
About this Manual
1*
r---¡
L lntroduction
The purpose of this course,is
L
I ] to introduce you to petrer Geophysics
functionality and the workflows.
Vr, *if iñrfro,.ougi, different
functionalities in petrel and
learn f,o*,,?nrLntly use these for
interpreting 2Dl3D seismic data.
L
I. rr,r pr*rrtritoors and argorithms
be used to calculate size/areaof your'leads can
uni prorpur,s which, in
turn, can be used for reserves
estimation.
L
I
You will be provided with a ready-to-use petrer
2013 project containing
2Dl3D seismic and well data.
l-
a, The exercises provide hands on training
functionalities through dedicated " "
that enabres you to exprore the
u*urr]rár.'
L
I.
Prerequisites
To successfully complete this course,
L
I¡ you must have:
oEnglish proficiency
. basic Windows and practical
computing skills
o
L
familiarity wirh geophysical fundamentáts
---
r
o Petrel Fundamentalscourse 0r
simitaiexperience with
Petrel.
[earning 0bjectives
u<
L 15 3"y,lq*l.r],:.
::Íy:i:f 19 r se
ll]:r,ra1e
of this course is to introduce you
n,;;l;¿il;
is m ic i ntu,p,.üti o
to the petret
ffi: rques,
L
and visualization toois
u
After completing this training, you
will know about:
L
___-,..i, eH ,ruvv
.I
n9w prproject with (_:0rrecl
uJtrr,r..vvrrr correct prolectton
projecti
-,¿ ::,1,n, !p
basic seismic data loading techniquls '
and unit system
r various dispray and visuarrzation
techniques incruding mis-ties
L
Já analysis
. domain conversion
Petrel Geophysrci
l-r
About this lvlanual . lE
L
L-
fault and horizon interpretation techniques including structural
framework and 2D restoratlon
calculatrng reserves on leads/prospects and preparrng maps t*
L
for presentations.
ü
What You Will Need
ln this course, you will need the following hardware and applicatrons to
!
t-
perform the workflows:
_r
ü
0perating System Windows 7 64-bit, SP1
0uad-core processor (best with a fast clock

L-
speed and hlqh cache) l-
Ouality of the viewing experience increases

C
¡*
with size and number of monitors
NVIDIA 0uadro K2000 or NVIDIA Ouadro t-_
1'
K2000M
Primary Storage Fast rotati0nal speed HDD (10K, 15K) or SSD

L
r-
Secondary storage 0 pti ona I
l*
0perating System Windows 7 SPl 64-bit Enterprise or Ultimate I_
ed rtrons
Dual quad-core or six-core processor (best {¡-

wrth a fast clock speed and hrgh cache)
f¡-
Two monitors, minimum vrewing size of 24
inches (32 inches preferred)
G raph rcs NVIDIA 0uadro K5000 \

Primary Storage Fast rotatronal speed HDD (1 0K, 1 5K) or 300
GB SSD r-
-
--
16. About this l\,4anual Petrel Geophysics
a-
lL
rr
L.
é
L..J
What to Expect
ln each m0dule within this training material, y0u will encounter the
L--¿ following:
L-
L-J
o
o
0verview of the module
Prerequisites to the module (if necessary)
o
L-
L,-¿
o
.
Learning objectives
A workflow component
Less0ns that explain ab0ut a subject or an activity in the
L-
f--l
o
workflow
Procedures that show the sequence 0f steps needed t0
perform a task
L:
rt_
. Exercises that allowy0u to practice a task by using the steps
f-rl in the procedure with a data set
o Scenario-basedexercises
o Summary of the module
f..-ra You will also encounter notes, tips, and best practices.
l--{
t_
f--l
L-
L4
L-
E
L
é
L.
L-{
L-
=1
Petrel Geophysics About this l\,4anual . 17
t
lcons
Throughout this manual, you will find icons in the margin representing
various kinds of information. These icons serve as at-a-glance
reminders of the meaning of their associated text. The following icons
are used.
i-'; -):''
: _.'-. I
Tips Notes Best Practices

This icon points you to a tip This icon ¡nd¡eates that the This icon indicates the besl
that will make your work following information is way to perform a given
easier. partjcularly impodant. task when different options
Lessons
Warnings
This icon indicates when
Questions
This icon ¡dentif¡es the
This icon identifies a
a
L_
lesson, which covers a
you need to proceed with questions at lhe end of
paft¡cular topic.
extreme caut¡on. each lesson.
irrtt'f
t-
L
Procedures Exercise Review Questions

This icon ident¡fies the This icon indicates that it's This icon identifies the
L-
L.
steps required to perform a yourturn to practice the review questions at the
given task. procedure. end ofeach module.
l.-
¡-
r-
Prerequisites Learning Objectives What you will need
This rcon identifies any
prerequ¡sites that are
This icon identifies any
learning objective set out
This ¡con identifies any
applications, hardware,
L-
required for the course, or for the course, or for the datasets, or other material
for ¡ndividual modules. current module. requ¡red for the course.
r_
Petrel Geophysics
lr-
L= More Petrel Training Courses
L
provides many courses for Petrel and

Schlumberger SIS Petrel Training
l--l- you how multiple types of training
its functionalities. The chart shows
can ne combined and for what level
they are built
For more information, vistt our web stte:

http://www nexttraining net'
ca
O
ñl
a
(l)
(n
o
(J
(7,
'=
'6
l-
6 tr
o-
(l)
tr
About this [,{anual ' l9
Petrel Geoph\/sics
Gourse Content and Agenda
/
ffim%t*il
=lil==
mm'*''''lñ-
wl @@ffi
Wffi/ ffiffi
/ I*,m: ::y:':ll.
uncriona ities
f in petrel.:ul:ri:
I
visuarization and interpretation
lr,ri ., Vr,,,üirn,*r,i,iriXlri,rrfi
ic dara, visua I iz, r?,r:_o
se ism ,,rr r,
ip, lu,¡rl L ¡rr,r,
ume renderin g,
vo
conventionar horizon, and T?, I
faurt intrrpruturion. in aod¡tion, L

about voiume extraction, you wi, iearn
attribute ,up rnJr'rn. generation,
generation, and depth surface
conversion.
l-
The course is intended
for seismic ¡nterpreters
who have some
experience petrel.
using
¡"
Day 1
. Set up a New project

. Mis-tie Anaiysis I
. Data Visualization
E
. Display Toois for ZD and3D

. Seismiclntersections
Seismic Data
E
-
Day 2
o Fault lnterpretation
a Horizon lnterpretation (to }.-
be continued)
Day 3
a
a
Horizon lnterpretation
Seismic Bestoration 2D
F.
a Velocity Modeling
a Domain Conversion ¡
20. About this IViñJ
Petrel Geophysics
¡1-
<é H
- Data Sets
1. The first data set ls located in the Gulf of Mexico and contains
salt induced tectonlc and stratigraphic traps towards the salt.
The data conslsts of seismic data, well data, checkshots, a
= velocity cube and stacking velocities. This data set wlll be
used for most of the exercises.
= 2. The second data set contains a high srnuosity channel systems
developed in drarnage areas dominated by low gradient
- slopes.
The data consists of seismic data, well data and checkshots.
-
t-
L__
L-
t---
L-l---
I.*
a--
l_
a-<
l_ Gloudspin Data Set
L
_" The training data set for this c0urse c0mes from the Cloudsptn field in
Gulf of Mexico. The producing reservoir ls bounded to the west by a salt
dome and rts local structure is characterized by smallto large scale
L-i
west-east growth faults.
The seismic data set used ln the trainrng comprises of eight 2D lines.
C Along wrth seismic, data are available from 28 wells, 20 of whlch are
deviated. Wireline log data are widely varied with different log sets and
f
most boreholes include trme and depth markers for the picked horizons.
------"¡l
f
E
Petrel Geoph\/S cs Ahort thls [.lanua .21
Help Center
ln one place, the Help Center contatns all documentation associated
with Petrel and your installed Dcean plug-ins.
The Help Center contains the latest Petrel documentation artifacts, as

well as documentation from the two previous Petrel versions. ln
addition, you have access to the Support portal, the NExT training
portal, and the Ocean Store.
22 . About th s lvlanual
Pefe Geophysics
L
=
n
l--
The Help center arso features a universar
I.-
l--
through all installed documentation
search, capabre of searching
t_
r-_-
t_
l-- 3l9l:q weil Tops to rhe wetr Tops
l"_
r--
l_
r-_- ]]..:!.: ]:
'jl 1., :r: :]:]|'
-:
I-
1
L --d
L I--
r--..:
L
L
I--
L
I---,
L
L-.¿
L
-l_-
L
I-J
Petrel Geophysics
Abolrt this lVanual .23
Summary
ln this introductlon, we:
-
o defrned the learning objectives
. described the structure of the manual
. outlined the tools you wrll need for thrs traintng
. discussed course conventions that you will encounter withln
this matelal
. listed some terminology used ln this manual.
Module 1-
Proiect Setup
and Data Preparation
ln this module, you wrll learn howt0 set up a new project in Petreland
prepare data for seismrc interpretation. This module includes
drscussions 0n new projects, the projection and unit systems, seismlc
datum, data optimrzation, and analysis of mis{ies.
Learning 0bjectives
After completing this module, you will know how to:
. set up a project
. access and use the projection and unit systems
. use seismic datum handling
. load basic seismic data
. load check-shot data
. optimize seismrc data for enhanced performance
. analyze mis-tres.
Petre Geophvs cs Project Setup and Data Preparati0f .25

If
Lesson 1
- Proiect Set Up and System Settings
This lesson discusses how
settings such as the
t0 create a pro¡ect' spec\fy
coordinate
pro¡ecr sYslem
reference system and unit

.
system' and
#5
load data into the Proiect'
5
' '-i- -
Procedure-settingUpaNewProiectinPetrel
By default' a new prolect
Opun Petrel'
opens'
2. Save this proiect t0 your desired locatton'

system'
3. Specify the proiect and proiect either bv loadins it or ustns
unit
T
-l
F-
;, á;;; i.rt data into the
other options, S[';io or the Proiect reference tool'
t;'ñ;;
h¿
Proiect Set UP and SYstem

Settings
You use the proiect Settings
box to specify the Coordrnate
dialog-You
open this dialog box from
the
:t
F-l
-_l
reference system uno unlil'¡'it*
settlngs"''
*.nu nut bv selecting Proiect > Proiect
--
If-
-
rcLlpsEtJrin,
--
-
- O,splal op¡cf,s
§loGgeun*s " '-.--:j
LÉl¡lo¡g ioml§t
T.
E
§ln¡t m
'ir' a)eq:¡tx-rilrriai i*i'liiil!
u¡*
Z
r- -,,r:¡: ¿rajn {¡
fuea unrt
ñ3 Gecdelic dailm
¡.
VúllaÉ lnil
..r lr::t*.iJ¡l;l]
Seisslc lme: ns
ñl§ Ytll! f-l rl

Serrsic veloü§ I.
l¡lum
F;'"r-,-
Projecl relerEn'<
-t '
I ¡."r-,r¡sr, 0 lr I
-
0n
á6. Project Setup and Data Preparat
Projection System
It is vitalthat every type of data, including
r-i seismrc and well data, is
displayed in the correct pr,jectr0n systemi
L- Errors can read to incorrect
rL'
interpretation. ln worst case scenarios,
seismic data can ¡u urqriruO'
f--r from the wrong rocation and wers
can be oritteo of structure or off
target due to an incorrect projection system.
r. l
Procedure Accessing the Coordinate Reference System

-
P.etrel has the capability
tr-l to handle the coordinate reference system
effectively"
L-
l.
1. ln the Petrel main window, select project > project
settings.
L'
r--d¡
2. ln the Project settings dialog box, go to the Coordinates
and units tab.
t_
r-¡
t--
a!
t_
r,--¿
L-
Lra
t_
t:
lE-ra
L_
LJ¡
r
t_
/,é¿
Project Setup and Data preparation . 27

fI
^l
-I
b¡
Proiect Units
:.Si:,.
.;
: , --
You cannot convert
,
It is important that the proiec: It: - ' : -
system. The unlt system can be eiir:'
standard units used tn the area trom
You can change the Proiect Unrt

System ' Petrel
:t
L-r
-l
F-
-l
Units after data is lmPorted
predefrned Metrrc, Field, or Field UTlvi se e:' --:
XY and Z units are defined
on the Coordinates and not follow any 0f these systems exactly'
us: -^" - F.¡
US foot Íc' X\
units tab in the Settings selection. The training proiect uses
-l
clialog box for the Proiect
--r
systenlCRSi
-J
-.-
-l
Sl¡ul¡lo¡ !nits
H
Storsge lnts
XYrrd
Zunli
:t
q2
Are¡ unrt
-d
V¡irme unl
'i
-l
Sesmchfie m!
!EGfrricrÉioc\ mls I¡.J
-¡
I
--
:
=
ffi
=-
r.
-
=
Petrel GeoPhVSlcs
28. Prolect Setup and Data PrE3:'' -I

Seismic Reference Datum
A Petrel project must be defined with a single
seismic reference datum
(SBD); however, you can import
data from diiferent SBDs.
The sBD is the onry predefined reference
datum that y.u can change in
Petrel. You can edit the distance from Mean
Sea Lever (MSL) in tne
Settings dialog box for the SBD.
A positive number means that the sBD is going
in an upward direction,
for example, 200 ft higher than MSL. you cann"ot
edit the other
predefined datums in the Templates pane
because they are fixed
reference levels (MSL) or well-specific references (KB
and CRD).
T
rtr Petrel Geophystcs
P,o,ecr Se-to ¿.0 D, a p,opo al,orl2g
User-Defined Datums
You also have the option to add user-defined datums. To access these
datums, right-click rhe Datumsfolder ln the Templates pane' You can
choose a name for the new datum, the Z distance from MSL, and a time
datum. You specify the time datum by using a replacement velocity, or
by entering two-way time (TWT) from the SRD.
Elevation at Time Zero (EII\ rs, in theory, elevation of the seismic

source used in a check-shot survey. when check-shot data is processed,
the reference can be converted to another reference level. This needs
to be considered when importing check shots through 0penSpirit. See
the Petrel Help for more information.
Procedure Setting Up Reference Datums

1. -
Go to the Templates pane > Datumsfolder'
* f- §:*fs.$?s
.i_ rt{S¿
iffi
-i-- #J?s
a. Select Seismic Beference Datum (SRD).

OB
b. Right-click Datums and select lnsert new datum
Petre Geophyslcs
30. Pto e SelJp a.d Data P eoa a ior
Double-click Datums to open Settings dialog box.
i- 5er¡lrrq¡c f*r "r*{'§ dx9'!n'.'
il.& rrl'i* 1* i,i§!,!ff.e'i1,rigx
¡ fPÉ íl (ll;rrrñ
il .:: it;tr-;l
:¡a'rÉ ,,1"- r,tr r,., fr,¿ls
I*r*¡,i§L 2*{ t
i.¡ T;n* *¡rr¡:

1 11 T 1 o¡ e;l!'
r' *rf::(kn.'.!'.*!!(j iC!l
Specify the Datum domain settings
' strfi ¡a: is' Ü¿t.n i'

ire¡p[ §R§
l:St ;;" t,-§. lar*mre*,cq* '
l,il ¡lpe +s¡atss

__ -
t- MSL
§étus d*m$s lerlig§
¡ tüfli irl§L
"i!fl€ rátu§
lJt
llfi fem *Q* ú§
:!¡. *ei,la¡exer,t v*¡c¡t¡f ili§
Prolect Setup anC !ale F'e:¿'aI : r . 31

Petrel Geophysics
Checkshot Reference Datum
You cannot set the checkshot Reference Datum (cBD)
regionally in the
Templates pane because it is a well-specific referenr..\lvh.n yo,
import check shots, you can serect the cBD as depth and
time datums
by entering values in the corresponding fields.
ffi Impor.e ch«Jchotsl Diant+nd 14,cs
'§ f,snnedtütEfE
::l:¡ He¡name:
specific reference
Velocity Modeling
Defining a time datum in velocity modeling sets the starting point
for
the model. Typically, y0u use the sBD (defining the distance
from the
MSL), or y.u can select a user-defined datum if a time
datum is set for
the SBD (as specified in the Temptates pane).
§lime: -'1f,-§FE*--,
XW
*--:__grer
orher:
Ldii€jliÉlitriffii[:l ; r nppr'¡riher: :? :'-:+: . "
32 . Project Setup and Data preparation
:
l- Lesson 2 Seismic Data Loading
-
L- Seismic data loading an integral
project. ln some ,u,t',
is part of any setsmic interpretation
load the data themselves and
in
'n"'fitiers where data is loaded by a
some cases they are ptouiJti with a project
L_ data loading sPecialist'
of the
ln etther case, it is rmportant
for the interpreter to be aware
t_
Lá
trnOá*.*uf seismic data loading steps
,f r. ,.rr n.f p with quality checkiñg
for loading data These steps
the loaded data' ln this lesson'

you
and check-shot data into

will learn how to load 2ü and 3D s'eismic
1_ Petrel.
1_ Seismic Data 0rganization
L
to
You should organize all data
in Petrel into folders and subfolders
§tismic data rs stored in a specrfic Seismic
keep the project u,uuu"J ftlters
p"OttintO hierarchy of folders and
L
É--r main folder. ln thrs foldái u folder'
extsts. You sfroutO store áf f
tei"i'
bulk data in the Sersmic
can be stored outside of the
L
!J Some data types, such as interpretations'
of the available
gives a less accurate overview
structure, but doing so
seismic data.
L
survey
I-# you Can Create multlple setsmic
ln the Selsmic main folder,
The 2D seismic data is
for each survey'
folders, preferably ont totOti rs the
iftt 3D seismic data lf the format
L
loaded in the same *ár7 as
-- load all lines in one operation'
same for all 2D lines, y0u can
L
-,-¿
l-
Í
f
---¿t
lc
a-
I
-,------a
Petrel GeoPhYsics
Pt.-.
-. ' --oFrt
s.tup .nd Duta Preparatlor ' 33
,s*rc Procedure Creating a New Seismic Main Folder and
iÉ ::: i§
r& +
liB
¡É tr* Survey
-
ca]:::;#
1. ln the menu bar, select lnsert > New seismic main folder.
t@ L4
ll
jss ,.,;,,:,.:
- -" -_ -_- _"-_-_ " -
i
I ff iler.r anncia:.icns
i {,§
,l
j kS f,lrrr intersertirn piane
i,
;+
i ,ff it*u, *,"i1
I $$ tier,.*re;i :*p.s
j S U**:tcrirfl*lt
I fJ ldeit:r-secn-irn
I fi ile,x grct--au3,
i üS fdr*r stratig.aphl¡ iB¡clEr
j & g.le#:S re.siam:i*r rnclel
| § iliert nrap seruire.,.
i.,---,,,---,,--
h t{Err raut: oÉtcf es ,-,¡tder
jfi lrlerr lL'd +ctder
ir_
*,.," ll*u'-idder
,
I ilS_: il,I€,s ¡nxÉrFrÉl¿,iicr fcicler
.+ l{ert -ock chys,cs rerds
ffi Neor se;srn;c mátn tcrder f.
t"i
§
lW. ';'. , . :: ::. ..i:' ;,: : i
i á¿ f,J¡ir se¡i ÍcldÉr
i.-
L
l& , r.::i: :r,r :,:r;
Find it in the lnput pane with predefined subfolders:

. Vintages
. lnterp survey inclusion filters
. lnterpretation tolder with an active seismic horizon.
,§ i'ü §ei¡mlc
I §S f*:re6s
;, § S **psavq¡¡,,¡c1tre,.i?sffisns
¿ ot .l In$ertrehtio¡ blder 1
¡% S ;*,*.¡ery¡it¿fssios#,Ée¿§
&l] S€¡smlehsrhsnt
i
I
34 . Project Setup and Data PreDaration

Petrel Geophysics
áb.lñ\>
rL
L
rI--¡
Use th'eInsert menu. You also can right-click the Seismic
main folder and select lnsert seismic survey.
r_
--t
L
--2
A-t
r_--
L-
-.
---
a_
l
F--¿
aU
a- Seismic Data lmport Format
r-
Au The standard format for 2D and 3D seismic data is SEG-Y which is a
binary format that you can import easily into Petrel. The resolution of
the data is decided by the bit size, the in-line, and the cross-line
l-
spacing (3D) or trace spacing (2D).
There are two SEG-Y import options in Petrel: SEG-Y seismic data
L
- and SEG-Y import with preset parameters. Petrel uses the SEG-Y
se¡smic data format to find the correct byte locations for X,
Y-coordinates and line numbering automatical ly.
L
- A SEG-Y cube can be full-fold data, near and far offset cubes, inversion
data, and attribute cubes. In addition, y0u can import data in the ZGY
L
bricked format.
The ZGY format is a seismic file in which the seismic representation is
L
changed to a bricked format rather than the traditional trace format.
,-4 When seismic data is displayed, only the required bricks are loaded into
mem0ry. Petrel loads large bricks with low resolution into memory
first, then loads the smaller bricks with high resolution.
T. Seismic data is shown as a c0arse resolution that refines overtime as

Petrel Geophysics Proiect Setup and Data Preparation . 35
-__-=--:
the program loads the smaller bricks into memory. The benefit of
seismrc bricked data is that large volumes of data can be rendered rn
the 3D window.
User interactions always are avarlable, because Petrel stops loading

the bricks if you move a seismrc line. This means that even volumes
larger than the physical memory of the computer can be rendered and
handled without data loss if you interact with the data.
Survey Geometry Definition

You can predefrne the survey geometry wrthout loading the selsmic
cube by using the options on the Geometry tab in the Settings dtalog
box for the .Surveyfolder.
This typically is done in the final stages of a processing job, afterthe

intermediate outputs from the processing sequence are loaded and
before the final seismic cubes are defined.
SEG-Y lmport with Preset Parameters

When you import sersmic data with the ,SEG-)'w ith presef
parameters option, you must specify the correct byte locations. You
define byte locations in the SE6-}/ headers from first f/e section of
the SEG-Y lmport dialog box. You can ignore traces wrth zero
coord i nates.
You can specify SEG-Y loading parameters automatrcally from a

previously loaded SEG-Y file by usrng the blue arrow at the top of the
SEG-Y lmport dialog box. Scan the frle to check rn-line and cross-line
numbers and X and Y coordrnates. This quality control step is very
important because the seismic data cannot be set up to correctly read I
any other byte locatrons afterthe data is loaded. You would have to
reload the cube.
L
Seismic Data in ZGY Bricked Format
(
When using seismic data in ZGY bricked format zgyl as input, the file
L
is read wrthout an option to specify parameters. When the frle is
loaded, a Vintage selection dialog box opens and then the Input data L
dialog box opens. Use options in the lnput data dialog box to change
36 . Project Setrp and Data Preparation Petre Geophyslcs

L-
the name, template, domaln, vintage, and X, Y conversion for the
seismic data.
Goordinate Reference System (CRS)

Petrel uses the Esri catalog for coordinate reference systems. All CBSs
in Petrel are available by clicklng Other GRS in the lnput data dialog
box where y0u set the correct reference system for the file that y0u are
rmporting. lf the CRS for the file is not displayed in the file header, you
must flnd it and set it manuallY.
Goordinate Transformation Between Reference Systems

By default, you choose the CRS of the project in the lnput data dialog
box. lf the CRS of the file is drfferent from the CRS of the project, then
y0u must selectthe CRS from the list displayed rn the lnput data dialog
box. A coordinate transformation between the project and flle reference
systems is run and the data is positioned c0rrectly in the project
reference system.
Note that unlt converslon is not possible;X,Y and Z unlts are defined in
the Coordinates and units tab in the Settings dialog box for the
project.
Pr0ject Setup and Data Preparati0n . 37

Petrel Geophysics
Seismic Data
Procedure
- Loading
1. Right-click u ,r,uir7 totOtr and select lmport
(on selectionlto
open the lmPort file dialoO bor

f . .. . .. .,.....,.,..,.,",.,,:,,.r1:r::L'}:§
0pen
2. Choose the file and its type' Click
F,'e Éxañp'e,C¿scr'Pton
p9rarel€'s to be Eet bErora tl'e h'as a'É ¡oadeo

T. s SEG Y'mpor a'roús 'ÚaJr'g
-"rl .íiá v ,"i"- .*"i"' po.,tol' t"n b* 'Ét erd tne rle tan tre scannÉd
Petrel GeoPhYS cs
38-.o.ohcl Se,Jp and Dard PreparaLlon

rL r
3. Set corresponding data type (2Dl3D), define vintage and
detection method.
Line
Ll-,
L
a-,
a
! lgnere §EGY coordinates
nYt!.
pos¡ton
13 -
,? ¡ lgnore traces uilñ nuli {§.0i §oordinates
Headerfomlai
.: bl.te (32-brt) intsger iffi',
r_ ,t b}"ie i3?'biti inieEer i. ,- , :Witt Line detection

method > Automatic, the
Line det¿cüEn meüiod Aetamatic most likely line/inline and
trace/crossline headers are
-,_- selected from trace headers
analysis. In this case,
4.ChangeLinedetectionmeth0dtoTraceheadersfieldslfyou scannlng is unavailable
need t0, check the headers and adjust because the headers are
o ln-line/cross-line number byte positions for 3D data undetermined until the SEGY
o CDP and SP byte position for 2D lines'

file is read.
l* ::.:t'_'_.'
5tc.f bF!
.. _'-'
::l r@t §&§id4
1i
.l,r
. á l¡.§
, Sa!t*.€.dd$$&§iir@
ii : tWaSE§Y.@iee §)§
l.,
lt
ll
parameters
Scan a specified number 0f traces to quality check
Petrel Geophystcs
Prolecl SelLIl oro Dol¿ PrPp¿ral o1 ' 39
6. ln the lnput data dialog box, choose a color template and a
domain.
Template ill Seismic {default} v
Domain: tJ EleYationtime
vrntage: @ffiEffi- v , r\Ew '-.
Cocrdinate refsrense sysietn {CRS}

FrojectCRS: SPCS27-17$2
0-$erQ!§..
RÉsultifts datá ránge {approx.} ---*
7. Create or add a Vintage.
40 o Pr0ject Setup and Data Preparation

L
l-:
B. Specify the CBS of the loaded seismic if it differs from the is\
il
project CRS. tl
---*i CRS transformations
L
f-
i..
ffi Input data aiso can be done by

exporting to a file or using
General
the Beference project
l* Name, tool
I-
L S typ"'
I? Template:
3D seismir
§i $;ñ(d"r";ki '-
L
I-
Domsin: ii ri."*ii."ii-*
Vintrage: ffi
L t.-
r__
Coordinate reference system {CRS}
ProjectCRS: §PCSI7-1702
-.----'-'.'-'
L File CRS: SDCSZ7 1702 C'i*IEN'TCR SPCS2I
OtherCR5..,
1702 v ;
t.i:;#
L I-_-
r_-.-
Resuhing data range (approx.)
X range:
Y range
Z range:
UNDEF
UhIDEF
3502C0,0 flü
UNDEF
UNDEF
ñUS
frUS
20$0.{X} ms
l_
Unit conversion
r-_- Seismic Vintages

When you load seismic data or create attribute cubes in Petrel, a
l_.* se¡smic vintage is assigned to different versi0ns 0f the same data.
L
r,- Typical examples of vintages (or versions) are fullJold 0r near and far
trace cubes of the same v0lume. Different attributes that generate
mis-tie corrected lines also will generate a new vintage.
L-_- A vintage is an independent seismic type; 3D cubes and 2D lines can

have the same vintage.
r-
---t
a-=4
Vintages are different versions of the same seismic data.
L-
L
--r
U
-*1
I-:
----
Petrel Geophysics Project Setup and Data Preparatlon . 41
a Display Window
Different Vintages in
u,,.,, u',. n di
1r : l:1, :*xn,f ;',U I; ñfl [ fii,jJ::'JiT,.i,.Ji:;

o]
call vrruorrLe
or on the lnput pane' Y0u
oblects in an active
window'
is shown'
line' with zoom iacto111{Oosition'
The same part of the and volumes'
áiittrent vintage lines
making it easy to
'o*pu" interpretation toolbar
to select
ln the 3D window,
if you use the seismic bv
visible seismic planes
io urr
a vintase, 1,ou can
'ppü 'htt;i;t'ét
vintage tcon'
clicking the APPIY
by clicking the Reset
the intersection to its original vintage
Reset
vintage icon'
iron, are equivalent
@ ,no Next vintage [@
The previous vintage
to using the Shift * Up * Sftitt + Down key combinations'
Editing and Assignly^Yllttntt

ii,§*
Procedure -
to
Go
§'i'*1i11t1::::Sl toolbar
1 -; r'p'ü"l to*1r'9 the
the g es
fi nd avai I abl e,vi nta
ü:;; si'Jtus'ba r)
,ffi!'i;.'¡:+;i;".,r¡rlli'.,lrii'i ¡;l'¿
l-ffi §j sersmic
:, ,{
" #!} fr'dc]rsd§áÉq'
w*aso
-,
B$ - ¡'b'i{#'stc'r'
i,'..1
fyO,+SsSr'"*'
f 4'r §r¿¿Í¿iras'¿r¿r¿'
I ei': PsrÉ!
F5-8,*d
iffi.l#Seismic fime:'
40
Petrel GeoPh\/Slcs
¿z'-+roprt s.tup und Data Preparatton

1
l_
I-
l_
L
a-
L
I_
Display one line in an lnterpretation window or several lines
L
a- 3
in a 3D window from various seismic cubes.
Assign different vintages to each line from the Seismic
a-
L
interpretation toolbar or lnput pane.
i=ff¡ffi
L
!- : §W{§ t**¿se¡
L
I_
* 5?r..ftiirs SrroíiÉ¡
,a] p§rdd
B#
#*
L
PSA,§
I-
L
I-
L
Ad
5. Activate the Seismic interpretation process and click M ot @
L
in the Function toolbar to scroll through all vintage selections
,a-é-¿
for an intersection.
L
rr
---¿
L
É
Petrel Geophysics Project Setup and Data Preparation . 43
lr--<
Checkshot Parameter Selection
To make sure that the check-shot data that
you loaded is correct, invest
some time in parameter selection and try to understand what each of
entry rn the
these parameters does. lf you click 0n an Attrlbute or unit
a drop-down list
spreadsheet of the lmport checkshots dialog box,
change the depth
opens where you can select the parameters' You can
input datum.
and time datum references to match the available
The acronyms used are

.MSL:Meansealevel,inthefileshown'TVDSSreferstoTVD
subsurface (that is, MSL). E-
o KB: Kelly bushing elevated from MSL
. SRD: Seismic reference datum
. CRD: Checkshot reference datum' -t-
YouenterthevaluesforthegrayedoutfieldsinfheDepthandTime
sectionsofthelmportcheckshotsdialogboxIntheTemplatespane
details'
during project setup. See the Petrel Help for more
given as negative
Even if time and depth values below MSL are
(MD' TVD' and
numbers in display windows, the spreadsheet numbers
L
values are not positive, you

TWT) for check shots are positive. lf these
fhe Negate
must reload the check shots. Make sure that
you select
t-
box when L
time values check box in the lmport checkshots dialog
time and depth values are positive'
_L_
L
E-
L
E
Petrel Geophysics
44 o Projeu, Setup a|d Datd Prepa'alior L
L
Procedure [oading Check
- l-.-: c< .ce Wells Shots
foiOer anJ s-etect
.- :t:^ r.e lmport trmport (on
selection)
dia/og box.
---- {,G*
L
.Á*_i _- .t
É L 1r; §lÉ$ §eti¡ilgs "jlr
,* x
L
5GL,s.r¡ be
I-J G
Yr-
É§
- ____
| ffi|§il:tJffi:?.t*,osh0ts
L
r,rmar(ASCI) (. .)
I---¡ llles to import.
,4
4. a
ct:^t
Ciick 0pen.
-i
L
I-_-
L ---_
L --
L lr----
L
I.
L--=.
LE-¿
f---4
L.
LF-J
L
F-J
t,-
E----./
Petrel Geophffi
erolect Setup anJOata

ereparation .m
Procedure Selecting Gheck'shot Parameters and
-
Ouality Ghecking Check-shot Data
1. Fit input parameters (A) to file (B).
2. Yer\fy Connect to trace and Number of header lines
3. Choose a time and depth datum.
ffi Impert rheckhokr Biawnd-l4 cs
46 . Pr0ject Setup and Data Preparatl0n Petrel Geophysic:

4. Bight-click Checkshots inthe Global well logs folder and
select Spreadsheet.
1vffi , ¿ §l,Jr,. !:itir,ri
tE! I'n¡]!.t ir,n releCi¡r,:

i3
l*
& Edit Elrbsl ;Erlrrt¡ille
i¡¡r ¡,: clert,:C l5o Jr lDt ttr,pli:r

':1
5. Change depth from MD to TVDSS and compare TVDSS and

TWT with input files and other time-depth information.
{$ Crt',*ts::or :preaAshet {e'Diffiild-14..r
.. -
ltell: ¡d-.ri ','tx" -- §onie
l#-lLlElr4liryl
¡tA TUJa AÉraq€ *lo€ity lateml Ela€üy soBtu tire *if=,*t ,nft r¡re[
'1
1E n -58.3fi.3€ t4
¿ -5,r,:S.8¡ :'i.;'1 Bi*m&14
] '1
1C.3i .51't:.¿,n .5:{:¡ *l ütumd].1,*
539 '185
3i ,5¿*1.8: "E4¿G.6É 1 E'1 l{. }t l24r.t üi#sd*-1é
5 -\281 iÉ -5&414 $5 fi2 1.r+. l EriEffild-É
,5:5,!.rl ,5813.: &14
¡ ,54?A.li 151+8.55
1 ]S*:.S! -485.:d .s'r{§.sl 15'144.§€ Ditrwld-'14
9 1 F'tÁ1.81 3E3.;i üam$l§
le -:{*, ¡' f 'l
-É383 7! ].]',l ai 1 51 ria *'t €S¡S:; D{a,@#'}4
11 -5;:{ * .EEZ' 3: 17421 1514¿.3: Í:Ld
1¿ -€É¡'5.5i 1 3t.é; 15'1¿¿.Ee niffs¡Bl.'1d
r3 :3-§§ E: -Í8.€n ,sEt1.2¡ 15146.¿1 üiwe$f4
14 -¿3T.5,S -¡t§: .6i 1€¡.tr 1 51 4á.!; D¡MSt4
15 i:gq Fl --¡{6-?.f! 151eS r: 0imd-:1,"{
1ü ,6¡:-2:{ j''l€* ¡l{ 1g*:: I51.i3 1{
11. iiirP i¡i ,€11.1tJ I 514E.24 -¡Si4 D¡-sw¡d.]4
1A irES:i, .Eqq m üErod-14
19 I A.{ü - t-5i\:1 15T{i.3i Bism&14
2* A':R i]- 243 [d I 5t¿"8 l1 €á9 l,! Bi*Mxd-1S
z1 {é21 4f 13'¡¿d,.tl Eil 1í d-1¿
z2 ¿ -6:68.11 3:5.É4 Biawrdl-1ia
33F.§i 31'1.¿l l¡3€.Tt EliáMd14
Petrel Geophysics Project Setup and Data Preparati0n . 47

Reference Project Tool
The Reference project tool is useful for quickly transferring horizons,
faults, models, surfaces, and data from a backup project to the working
project.
The Reference project tool is object generation aware; it can identify

older object versions from the most recent ones in the working and
background projects. This information is iconized behind each object
entry in both projects. You can filter this information for easy selection.
lf incompatible coordinate or unit systems are set for the working and
background projects, you cann0t c0py the data. The Reference project
tool performs coordinate transformations between reference systems if
the projects are set up with different CRSs.
Refer to the Petrel Help for more details about the Reference project -¡-
tool and its use.
48. Pro.er . SetL0 a.o Ddtd Prepatat 0r Petrel Geophys cs

L
L I-
Procedure
-Transferring
Project Tool
Data Through the Reference
L
-- 1. ln menu bat select File > Reference proiect tool.
L
I-<
I-r
2.
ffi A*l*r*nr* prr¡er:i
Choose a Background project

t*ai t¡rl'Lol
L-
File n¡me: fioudspin_SecandaryProiest.pe{R y *pen
Files nf §pe: ¡§l Fdrel files {".pd ; "pdR} f,¿ñeql
E- 3.
L-
Toggle on the Background project dara check boxes
4. Click [El to transfer to the Working projecr.
¡"re..-" so'*t trl
L-
i';1
-- lá6p¡rs!.i §i§!al4 dd:3§súCtl P.

§anrdináb rFeH §ptslr_1ñrf &§&rffi §Pa§:i 14?¡& ra§dúr§ 3yr&n! sFc§:¿-t ffi, i-ul§rffi §H§?¡_118?N
E¡, tr I .C u
::---! Y ¿ *", üi;i-*-lL§ §:v :,e , .;
--<
r__- :t
.&i §a'¡mr
irde
&i
§i. ri
,l
- rl; ñrl
-----
s E]::
ta i¡i:]
l----1 íJ ri
I r...1-.I ü"l
$§ Br
ül
§I:
É¡,
SEG-Y 2D Toolbox
Petrel 2013 introduces the SEG-Y 2D toolbox to improve loading of
2D seismrc data that has navigation and header issues. The tool is
intended to be used with 2D SEG-Y files that cannot be loaded correctly
using the standard SEG-Y import tools in Petrel.
A major focus of the tool is the handling 0f 2D navigation data. The

SEG-Y 2D toolbox can work with navigatr0n data from multiple
sources, including:
. a variety of externaliextfile formats that have either a fixed
number of characters per field, or files where fields are
delimited by a specrfic character, for example, a tab, c0mma,0Í
semi-col0n in Excel's comma separated (CSV) save formats. lt
also can work with UK00A standard formats including
lonqitude and latitude c00rdinates.
Pefel Geophysics Pr0ject Setup and Data Preparati0n . 49
se¡sm¡c vintages that are loaded onto 2D seismic lines that
already exist in the Petrel project.
offset-VSP seismic data, where you specify a surface location,
(for example a wellsurface location), the azimuth, and a fixed
distance between traces.
links to coordinates of a polyline set.
For more details on the SEG-Y 2D toolbox, see the Petre! Help.
6S sre-v.zr to*t**
¡ Tcalbm ¡ t{ut1, rqqq { Uqlie i
Lcading *rrldcx i
r---: i
EEü-Ydrectcqr r,iá"*ü"i.¿ i_,,i§ j
I
E/le posit¡ors: f.¡or i"nn*O ; ,!
f,,iavÍgatirnsauree: iqF.q.Iq*g",.qlgs¡!e.,F-u,.........,,........,.....,...,.......,,,:J -'ll I
'.,.;; l
EEG'Y a¡.*n!des:
Corrdi¡áe relerer¡c¿ system ltESi
lnpulñlÉ CHS üo t"áiJi"J r,=r"Á-iJ;;; &s

OuhL.tfle 'GroiPcJ
Cnh tdo cüord¡nate slstem detned
üesl¡na§¿n
_;:
it¡ruPÍ' r .:
!.in¡ao€: i"Jit
OUFTJiSEG-Y
direütrry
§ Lnad gen*rated SEtrryñles t* PÉlrÉl
50 . Pro.lect Setup afd Data Preparati0n Petrel Geophyslcs

- Seismic Data Export Formats
-
1_ The standard export format for 2D and 3D seismic data is SEG-Y which
L
l- is a binary format that you can import easily into other applications.
The other export format is ZGY bricked format (3D seismic data only),
L
l- which is faster for rendering data through a cube than the SEG-Y
format.
Procedure Exporting Seismic Data

-
1. Bight-click the seismic data and select Export.
i+ ¡rc".:... C1.1.t
'¿E :d'1 ú.::¡ .rl.: :.rie

' ¿l ¿r,.u'",", . .
' - ! .uta,x eatt: a)
..;r;,. ál ro', 1y,.".,.'

TY ¡L:a !órr' É
!G lu:¡ ¡a,¡: ¿ r
. B
'¡¡ "¡. ¿::.:r.:*, .
i $ Serñ ii r:f-rrir-!
. )e1tE.-. t.¡- t.t.s'r../
# .'e¡:e s:tgr.¡, -ar.er,¿rr
B rr¿á:e,rr-qo,¿:':,c..,nd.rÉ
ffl :u-:r..¿¡,qr,..
6i ir:erPrEi¿:r.1 rrañ:q€r.,
2. Specify the output File name and format. Click Save.
Seismic data in ZrIY bricked format {'.zgyJ

Shapefile i'.shpl
3. Complete the export dialog box to create disk files

SEG-Y export --,.:: :.',, r,.l:: :, lpit1.'.'.r
üs'rdinatq§calei¿ctú. ffi ; i--i

'- ; i;
§amplevelueformat rrrrrcatlntfoini' - .,)
l_.ll '.-it¡-:::1,,,1:-¡'t;,.,rt:,¡1, i-,_.:i
Lr-e,[,-,-j {,¡
Petrel Geophvsics Project Setup and Data Preparation . 51

Lesson 3 Enhanced Performance Through Data
-
0ptimization
will learn to optimize your data through cropping and
ln this lesson, you
realization, which can help improve computrng performance'
3D Volume and 2D Line CroPPing

By cropping a 3D volume or aZD line, you can reduce
the amount of L
you to focus on the

Oáta ava¡tante from a 3D volume. Cropping helps
zone of interest and allows for faster computlng
time'
you can crop the 3D sersmic data by reducing the volume in the X, Y or
Z domain. lt also is possible to skip in-lines and cross-lines.
with 2D
lines, you can skip trace numbers, CDPs, or SPs so
that y0u can reduce
the vertlcal range as well as the extent of the line'
rii'-*li Procedure GroPPing a Volume

il .,:ir iii
,:1 - .l -
1'Bight-Clicktheseismicvolumeandselectlnsertvirtual
:1 --.-i
the
croppeO volume' A virtual seismic cube appears under
original seismic cube with identical ggonn'tty
: ffi ,+] Lrieg sruey inrlusien frlfers

¿ i5q : IriterpreÉlisa fslder 1
: ffi ¡1; 38mfe4n irrl¿¡s¡a¡ ¡!?e¡s

& ;-] $e*srn¡c lrarizon 1
a ,$ i-l S:rrvey t
Crop the virtual cube:

h.
lS
a. Click SelecVpick mode ' in tht process toolbar and
the green handles display in the 3D window'
OR
b. Select Settings > Cropping tab and specify line ranges
52. P'oier'SelLp d'd Dat" Prepa'otror

5e*iilqsict ,iil§ $rssl 1'
i?$áe
isl ? ,5§
iir*r*lin*:ange Jru ' ;**
li{*{;i:§ste.
,l:tü
tr
.si.'
To docertain types of data manrpulation and interpretation (for l
example, autotracklng and ant-tracking), it is convenient t0 ..-.... , -...: A contlnuous read0ut
of the volume size disPlaYs in
reduce the size of the cube when you work w¡th lt.
the lower r ght corner when
graphical y cropp ng the
cube.
Seismic Data Realization
Realrzation ts the process of creating a physrcal copy of seismic data in
the ZGY brcked selsmic format. The orrginalvolume can be an imported
SEG-Y file, virtual seismic data (for example, a cropped volume), or a
previously realized volume.
Realizatron serves four important purposes. lt

o creates a physical representation of a cube. A reallzed seismic
volume is created as a ZGY format file. lt cannot be used in
other applications that supp0rt only SEG Y However, you can
rmport it into another Petrel project. The reallzed seismic
volumes usually are noticeably faster t0 use c0mpared to a
SEG-Y file. You can export the realized data into a SEG-Y
f ormat.
. changes value resolution. Many SEG-Y files use 32-bit floating-
pornt format for trace amplitude values. Such resolutlon
sometimes is not necessary. lt adds a certain overhead to all
operations on the volume. You can gtve volumes that are
realized in Petrel a value resolution of 16-bit or even B-bit
integers, which can increase the available storage space.
However, gorng from a higher bit format to a lower bit format
can decimate seismlc data Changing back to a higher bit
Proiect Setup and Data Preparation . 53
Petrel Geophysics
format adds to the storage size only and will not recover the
initial data.
changes how seismic data is handled. You cannot completely
visualize arbitrary intersections of any volume. ln a SEG-y file,
for example, data is always stored sequentially as trace
following trace, then in-line following in-line. The realization
operation creates a new volume file that is organized for rapid
ACCESS.
increases memory-loading speed. A realized cropped cube is

significantly faster to upload than the equivalent virtual
cropped cube. The entire original cube needs to be accessed
when loading a virtual cropped cube.
54 . Project Setup and Data Preparation

Petrel Geophysics
L
-,-- ffi Settings for'miq'
L
J-
L
---l16.8SESlo -1 14.1ülll
I- Súúrce anlpl¡tuds rtsngs:
§-) Setfronr s*urce as shom above

' .. S¿ifronr source symnretjcal
L
,t- l,':
8j
UsEr d¿fined
Zero centric P+li¡:
L
Histogranl
I- +w
:; I suv 320§ SEGO +G00
L
J-
L
r--
L
r,_-
ffi
-88 -48 § 40
Lower clipping: 0.01186".'!, Upper clipping: 0.üC0Biá
L
I-
L
I,
Realized v0lunits size: Max$2. M8
L
-
kl:-,¡[-'..] Et!*] @:g-l
L
-= Bealization requires disk space and can be a time c0nsuming process" lt
is strongly recommended that you save your project to a specific
T
location, preferably the local hard disk, before realizing large seism¡c
volumes. Otherwise, the system's temp0rary directory (for example, C.\
TEMP)will be used for the generated volume file.
L
-a-1
L
;---=
F
--L:
Petrel Geophysics Project Setup and Data Preparati0n . 55
Procedure Realizing Seismic Data
1 0pen-the Settings dialog box for the cropped setsmic cube'
2. 0n the Operations tab, g0 t0 the Realize sub'tab' +-
3. Toggle off rhe Zero centric check box'
option as the
4. Select the Set.from soLtrce as showtt above
Source amPlrtude range'
5. Click Scan.
6. 0bserve the histogram'
1 Click the Filterbóx and observe that the spike (zero values)
is
removed from the histogram display'

Realization quality is lnteger B bit
B. Ensure that the
so r0 0 '10
@ rower ci¡pp¡ng: ü.&0s09i lJpper clippiilg: 0 Sgflü:t
Petrel GeoPhvs ¡s
56 . Pr0lect Setup and Data Preparation
l-
-,- Prefetch to Cache 0ption
lnteractively browsing through huge 3D seismic cubes and 2D Iines in
L
--
-,-
an exploration scenario requires quick access to the data.
The speed at which data is read from the disk can reach 100 IVB per
second. However, in some cases this is not sufficient. With the
r_- emerging 64-bit operating systems, it is possible t0 store data in BAM;

Petrel includes an 0ption to prefetch seismic data to cache.
-,- You can use the Prefetch to cache option on seismic volumes with a
size that can reside in the computer's memory (independent of operating
system, that is, 32 164 b¡I) Both SEG-y and ZGy volumes or 2D Iines
have the option to load all seismic data into memory. This operation
will run as a multi-threaded asynchronous task.
Prefetch to cache is similar fofhe Load iruto m,n,y option that was
used in pre-Petrel 2007 releases.
Procedure Using the Prefetch to Cache 0ption for

-
Seismic Data
1. Select Tools > System settings > Seismic tab t0 set the
Seismic cache size and graphics card memory.
: Tt:*le 1-Wind*.w..,!:!§!p .... .,
t9l _r*iefi]5É1iifi!5.,.
.'§ (,,.'
h
I -:
il
2. Right-click on a seismic data object (3D volume or 2D line in I .-,,.t SEG y and ZGy
voiumes can be prefetched
either a SEG-Y or ZGY cube) and select prefetch to cache.
to cache if the volume is not
larger than the available
cache size.
Project Setup and Data Preparatl0n.5T

:¡-
=-
-.t_
lf you selected a seismic cube in SEG-Y format, the Task

manager 0pens (if it is not already open) below the
graph¡c display area of Petrel and a counter updates until
it reaches 100%. At this point the volume is successfully
-
Ioaded into cache.
lf you selected a seismic cube ln ZGY format, the petrel
+
Message log opens and reports the Levels 0f detail (L0D)
that is prefetched to cache. When Level0 (highest level of
detail) is completed, the volume is successfully loaded into
cache.
Seismic Calculator
Use the Seismic calculator to generate virtual calculator volumes
based on existing cubes or between two or more existing cubes. The +
calculator expects that all input volumes are of the same size and
definition (in-line, cross-line, and sample count).
Any calculator volume can be realized as any other seismic volume.
--<
58 . Pr0ject Setup and Data Preparati0n

Petrel Geophysics
-4I}**
Procedure Usino the Seismic
1. -
Righr-ciick the s
Catculator
** =.:?l1-f_1l.1ru and select Catcutaror
#:-:g:il ,
.:4
l:iJ {alcul¡tor,..
2. Enter the equation
bv tuninn and selecting
vartffi ,n¡._ calculatoi
variables and vv,wq,qLUl brtton,
^;;:=-
from the seismic
uurruils.
^",^,,,1l.]yprng
lm
3
aces, functions).
L4;j
SelBCt seism¡c vBriable:
. $m:n
:o,1,.r" seismic.
il'"
,Fornea
Ér*t i T:.11::::19::::
i';,,----:- ;----- ,;-i_Tt L,Ü G:]

ggEqEñ8,É§
;#§=r§_EErE@E4rr
#*PgEqFrtrr:s
I
4
th e eq uation A new,iu,u
f, "r'[:llilT#l r *illi,,o,.uo
@,-*j m,q-F;r¡¡*{
i i& il tntine 77ü
:$ ll
: j-§il-l xlrne 4rc
: r-ffré
x#* tJe,¡*-rht
: r& i_l Intine €35
, l..-l ¡tu.* +zO
Petrel Geopffi
Pro;ect Setup and

Da-a pápaitton .E
Examples
To cut back a seismic cube between two surfaces:
!-
(X,Y), Seismic, U)
NewSeis = lf (Z<Surfacel (X,Y) And bsurface2
NewSeis: The name of the new volume
Surfacel and Surface 2: Surfaces
Sersmic:Theseismicvolumeonwhichtoperformthetransform
To clip values to a value range of (MinVal, MaxVal):
a:-
NewSeis = in (MaxVal, Max(Sersmlc, MinVal))
NewSers. The name of the new volume
Seismrc: The selsmic volume on which to
perform the transform
+-
To transform selsmic using a function:
NewSeis = Function (Seismic)

NewSeis: The name of the new volume
=-
perform the transform
Seismic: The seismrc volume on which to
pane that acts like a
Function: The function stored in the lnput
lookuP table

Lesson 4 Mis-tie Analysis
ln
-
this lesson, you will learn howto analyze and remove mis-tres from
the seismic data.
ln an ideal world, a sersmic interpreter would prefer to work on seismic

data that does not have mis-ties. However, this might not be the case,
particularly when interpreters have to work on data sets coming from
different vrntages that were acquired with varying acquisition
parameters and processed differently.
Mis-tie analysis in Petrel allows you t0 extract and apply mis-tie value
corrections for different seismic surveys. All lines contained ln the
Surveyfolder or a subfolder with the same vintage will be used when
a mis-tre set is created. You can estimate and correctforthese mlstie
va I ues:
o Vertical Mis-ties: Corrects any vertical mis-tie between seismic

lines. You can define if the correction to be applied is a
c0nstant shift (default)or a floatrng shift.
o Gain Mis-ties: Balances the amplitude differences between
the sersmic lrnes, applying different sets of gains to normalize
= the display. Correcting for these mis-ties is useful when data
from vrntages that have been processed wrth drfferent
) parameters are drsplayed together.
. Phase Mis-ties: Extracts a phase rotation value for every line in
relation to the respective cross pornts. This value can be
applied t0 c0rrect differences in phases between lines. For
every crossing point, the algorithm calculates the correlation
_ between traces at the corresponding line and tries to minimize
the difference between them.
<
-1
§urveyx Vir¡lácü
< ffill¡4:v+
:/,.?ü§{r1¡By§ FinMiE
¿ü$ir6§tJ I
i
?
?
>
; :'rl 3¡
s 5Éfécleo 1u
Tirne{v¡rtualelsssedl 1 i *
L
H. k:r:::l gi:§L,l
@.
H
--
L
i,,* ,.
Petrel Geophysics PrOiecl Setup and Data Preparat on . 61
---?-
Mis-tie Manager
The Mis-tie manager is an interactive t00l for managing vertical, gain,
and phase mis-ties and corrections between 2D or3D seismic lines in
Petrel. You can use it to calculate or specify correcti0ns, select
reference lines, clear Iines to exclude from mis-tie analysis, and select
which 2D lines to display in the active graphic window.
Procedure Managing Corrections Using the Mis-tie

Manager
-
1. lnsert the mistie set by right-clicking on the Ser'smic main
folder.
,SF:ffi*,,
,#!lmiqil& -..'
-\e. LItLl5 . , ,
"
bSvlr,=
,
I
.&; xi T r;;;" ü;;J.;;";;,',

{ ;l rfli l* ixpnr: , ..
,;§: firl+L
@i; r 3*ier*. . .
;&tj x
. Survel,:'-
&'-- *is [ P:k ltr:lr r:.--. ...- ,,,,--._
, ,ÉF.i tr¡sei': -'¿lder
,'#F-lslu¡I"" tJrrllaps* ire¿rrsirr*.1
rff¡qsrnzj.¡ Erpand ir*rr:rsi,',ei
o # e ura:i*
S¡sru+ ü fo*r ic nkl*r-;
# i *tu¡ áJ 5*ri hy narr*r
I Ss srbñi §,rr-i Ly inline nur-.rber
S s stbl err &u:*. crl¡r all
# ,yl slbü .ry
$ il Filters i c¡s .É.uir name ali
'*'ciun* ¡Iribu:ps,,,
# lnseri nflls-ire se: I\
Pr*:ei.h;ü ra.he
62. P'oject Setup and Data Dieparat.on

Pelrel Geophysics
E
The survey selector showing selection of multiple surveys
Use the Mis-tie manager to control which lines to correct,

what corrections to perform, and how to perform them.
ki
0rM
The original and corrected composite lines show in the

Mis-tiesfolder.
.-
4
Éff§ H[s+iesesl *mey2
§"F, I Potueeo¡n li¡s-lie sef I Survey Z ¡
I ffi 7 finginal composite seismir
-al
-¿_
-¡a Petrel Geophysics

Project Setup and Data Preparation . ül
Seismic Mis-Tie Visualization
You can dynamically create composite lines of mis-tie corrected seismic
data and visualize it
§:owi*oorir¡anyl
¡.
i-
0rigrnal and corrected composite lines appear in the lnput pane under
the Mis-tie set
É* rvils{rÉ§
,# i,.l hlis-tie set'l 2ú lines
,' ,:4 i-:i Points finm h;lis-tie set 1 lü line
l, m i.,l üriginel conrp*siie seismic
site seismic
64 . Project Setup and Data Preparatlon

Petre Geophysics
I
You can display mls{ie values In a 2D window.
L-
I
l_*
]-
l_
I¡
l_
I.-¡
l_
r--l
L
r.
l*
l
An interactive point set with attributes is generated for quality control.
,g; §ur+ey 1
L
r¡ r ffit{ htis-ties
,r 6f ft inis-tie set I Surxey I
r p*, 1fr Folnts fro¡n táis-t¡e set 1 SurYey I
L
r
t-r f,*u,r;: Attnhutes
tI i:, J
tT ir.l i
:-l \¡ertical mis'tie torrelation furtor
tr
i
E \rertical mis'tie residual itutal ualuei

i::ll ¡:_.' Phase nris-iie {ahsolute ualuel
,,Í:i :...-l pnas* mis-tie rorrelaiion furt¡r
L
§1 ,i': e=¡n mis-tre {nnrmalized ualuei
ffi ii Line name
1- '>l
1-
t-
-1
u
1-
--{
-1
Perre Geopht/s cs Project Setup afd Data Preparati0n ' 65
-
!-
Exercises Setting up a Proiect and Preparing -

Data
-
ln these exercises, you wlll get hands-on experlence with setting up a
new Petrel Seismic lnterpretatlon project and preparing data for

interpretation.
Exercise Workflow
o Create a new project and select the projection system
. Set the seismic reference datum (optional).
. lmport seismic data into Petrel'
-
. Transfer data between Petrel projects'
o Prefetch to cache.
. Crop and realize the 3D volume'
. Analyze and remove mis-ties.
Exercise Data
-
You will be working in has been assigned to
a studentdirectory that
you. save all proiects and other data thatyou create ln this directory"
Vou run find this directory inthe Geophysics Fundamenfalcourse

ls located
directory (see the figure). The input data used in this exercise
in the oafa importfolder and the pre-made Petrel projects are located --
you cannot find
in the secon dary proiectsfolder. Ask the lnstructor if
these folders. +-
i i Geophysirs tundanrentai
i Data lrnPurt
! Serondary Frcjerts
I Student
-
:
-
Petrel Geophysics
-*
: Creating a New Proiect and Selecting the Proiection

System
ln this exercise, you willcreate a new project in Petreland selectthe
j-
projection and unit systems.
Petrel is coordinate enabled, meaning that coordinate transformatlons

can be done during import, export,0r by using the Reference proiect
tool.
i Unit conversion can take place during data lmport, but flrst y0u must
-
¡
I specify or checkthe unit and coordinate systems used in a new project.

1. Open Petrel.
2. Create a new project.
L_ 3. From the menu bar, select File > Save proiect as.
t- 4. Choose a name for your project and save it in the Student
t_- 5.
folder.
From the menu bar, select Prolect > Proiect settings.
6. ln the Settings dialog box on the Coordinates and units tab,
L- click Select to choose a coordinate system.

ffi Setrings fo*'New prejef
L-
L-*
tilisrsettircs2 I SotsbaeÉ
C6..dinstesandunits i,-jH!:9j!§,'.-']
Cqard¡nale refeence
{fl &§s:L-:l
L:
system iCRS):
l..ln¡tsys¡enrl
1-
L
Sinrslaüon units: ÉcliPsf'n¡nf¡
Storage uni¡s DisplayopüDns - '.- --*--i

"i
¡Y soit fIJS Lal{ongfomat
L
l-;
,.§'l Degrees'minutes-seconds
Z unit 11
fuea unit t? ,:::) DÉc¡mal angle (dÉgrees¡
)é=
L
Vo¡ume ürrt fll Gesdetc dahrnl:
Seisnric time: nts lit Proiect datunr
§eismic velocity: f; ,.:'-: wcse,l
L
fL-1
Proiectreférencedatu$ --
Tin¡e iSRDi: ¡
L
r_--) Depth fL,iSLl: 0
L
H
r¡----J
Petre Geophyslcs
f lcP,,--li{.e{--:.l l{-...n€a l
Project Setup and Data PreDaratior'.67
1
"__¡
I
+.J
<¡
L ln the Goordinate reference system selection dlalog box,

enter NAD2 7 Loui s iana for Fllter by string.
o
o. SelecI MENTOR: SPCS27 Louisiana State
-1702:l'{AD27
Planes, Southern Zone, (JS Foot" f rom the list and cllck
0K.
-
l-
-
<
S+leü ffidmsF refumm slFiffi {CFIS)
FilkbYsEi¡g: N'\D27Le Fiiie tly É!alq: iE§HF!a* & eGct6lw e¿blqg§ lf

.11,".'
F&er try: i,¡ &xnt insrde aea cd u*
l:r Ma shape dis**im -
;;É*- w¡&
HdzBbl únit Aut-
C¡€r frrysl CR§ asd *a lB
'MENTC'RTSFCS§3-1][3:NAB§3 Lsisiñne SñBe Rán* Oiishore Meb'"

-¡Me Ug Fmi' ;lU§
§t§
StS
-
'*IENTüR:SetS2f-l?01:MD27 Leisiann §€te F!en* NEdhetn
(}f§hDe h{ets' sts
"MENIORITAriP-Oj-|PñN L*¡iÉisna ShE Plane§,
'MEiITOR:LA-§:IIAS?? Lsa§isns Stqte Fl§ses f¡e{&sn Ztre U§ F@i irats §¡§
"trENTAR lA83SF:itADS3 Lei§isna S:eb Planes- Olúh@. US Fd"

{tl-rs §ls
%tENf Oñ:L483-O:NAD83 Lrui§ia¡a SbE Flsne§, O!{shtre Mds"
'irIENIOF:SPC§?-LI]03 NAB27 Lfti$sña SsE Pl¿nes' Of'§hse. US FN' iU§
'IiENTO*:LA O t'{4D27 Lei§iana SSae FIan*. Ú{i§h§r€' US Fd"
:.US §l§
'MENTCR:LA-§:¡iAD2f Ls¡§ane Sl6!e Ple.a§. sRthm ?tre. US Fd' *US sts

Fml' cus sts +
'¡TIENTOF L-A¡iP{F:HFG}.i LHi§itns §bte Piün§- OlJshGe U§
68 . Project Setup and Data Preparati0n

9. CIick 0K in the Petrelmessage box that refers to the Xy unit
in ftUS.
# P"to*l
i-----"
l
The selected coordinaE iÉferenee s-ys¡em {CRs} re-desse§ )l¿ ueit ¡o .lt_js,,
.r::,.
# T6 ¿voidftis. click Csncé¡ end se¡e.ts difreBntaRs.
Do youMñtto ¡B-define iheXf uniü
i
¡
10 0n the Coordinates and units tab in the Settings dialog box,

click the Unit system drop-down menu. The default unit
sett¡ng in Petrel is [Vletric.
Petrel Geophys cs
Project Setrp and Data Preoarat on . 59
All input data is given in feet. Changing the unlt settings to
Field will ensure that a correct import is done. You can change
the unit settings after you import the data; howevel the data
itself will not be changed, so a correct position of all data is
not guaranteed.
11. Select Field , click Apply and click 0K.
12. From the menu bar, select File > Save proiect'
Setting Reference Datums (0ptional)

setttng reference datums ls required for onshore projects only. This
exerciie shows you how to set up the reference datum in a Petrel
project.
1. lnthe ne, find the Datumsfolder and expand it
:q*&.. %.,m$§.:i
=-
,.arm¡lf " *SX
-";t
trr ,¡§¡*r¡s§rl'/6*i,
ffi ,?§rsaF§$.¡É§¡*$rF,rérP§ I
n: dañprt i#s r§trPrb¡§§

tri Prsdat§fi41sfi§18!6§ -
m #sfrrtdF¡s96i:if/#srsf§Ár§
tr á$4$"rioaÉ,téetrie§¡spefÍrbr¡rp,r*&3
: ffi ,i§$1É¡eÉÁdtc§F¡+Fcdfltpspi,rs.,
: frf
) ff
rÍsrffiesl,é?t*r*fiF¡*l*s
F6f§/*$m ¡esprb¡P§
5Jc-4¡str-6
-
r. m §cfüifis# üÉ€r ¡sfig-¡8í§§
' ffi §st¡á¡á §,árrlárF¿lfÉ,
,§ts¿
rf§
ffi
i. SsS !& 5éxinü§.
:
2. Bight-click SBD (Seismic Reference Datum) and select

Settings.
3. 0n the Datum settings tab, the Z from MSL field can be set ln
project units, for example, 200 ft higher than MSL FoT this
exercise, make sure Z from MSL is 0 (zero, because thls data
set is referenced to MSL). Note that Time datum is nof
editable.
4. Cancel the dialog box.
5. Open the Settings dlalog box for MSL, KB, and CBD. Observe
that nothrng can be edited!
s
Petrel Geopl'r s
70 . Pr0lect Setup and Data Preparation
*Iln-*
7 Open the Settings dialog box for the new datum.
B 0n the lnfo tab, change the name of the new datum to uy
Datum.
- 9. ln the Datum settings tab, enter a value for Z from MSL (such
as 300 feet).
10 Toggle on Time datum and enter a value for Beplacement
velocity or TWT from SBD (toggle off fhe Replacement
= velocie check box).
11 Click 0K (you will not use this datum in the project).
=
Loading Seismic Data
= This exercise shows you basic loading of a 3D seismic cube. More
advanced opti0ns for Ioading data are out 0f the scope of this course.
-
1. From the menu bar, select lnsert > New seismic main
folder.
i- 2. ln the Input pane, review the Seismic main folder and its
{
structu re.
L
3. Right-click Seismic and select lnsert seismic survey.
4. Double-click Survey 1 to open the Settings dialog box.
1_ 5. 0n the lnfo tab, change the name of the survey t0 3D
L
t seismic.
6 Click 0K.
1. Right-cl¡ck the 3D seismic folder and select lmport (on
L
.I
selection).
B. lnfhe Data import/Seismic input data/3D volumes
L
directory, select the flle mig.sgy.
r-r
9. Set Files of type to SEG-Y seismic data with preset parameters
(".") and click 0pen.
L
--)
T
--¿
P'0lect SetJp d1d Dar¿ D epdrar or.7l

l--r
--
:
Look in .i 3D volumes - *r "ñ-
. \ame Ddle moo.f'ecj ¿,,e
:
I 5 ¿e
e& m1g.sqy l, ..,2004 I I.l;4V SGv -, e 2.t?.980 (B
Reaent PJace5
ffi
B
De!Kop
i iirr¡r¡es
:r&,
Coñp!ter
t&
Uetwork File name:
F'Ésolrype
mig
SLC.,"o."¿"uu,rp,es-tL¿,a-ek,sr'.1
i Opefl
Cancel
-
File éxample/descilplor:
";;;;; /t
inls SfC V rmpon attows loading parameies to »e setbÉforeiheftes sre joa;éd

TheSEG'Yfacehesderposúronsca¡besetan!hÉllecanbéEcán¡ed
<
10 The SEG-Y lmport dialog box opens with default parameters

Change the parameters to 3D to fit the input data.
11 lnthe Vintage drop-down list, leave the selection as Set
default vintage (this command creates sequential vintage
names, the first being Seismic Time 1).
12 lnlhe Line detection method drop-down list, change &-
Automatic Io Trace header fields.
1.)
IJ. Try figuring 0ut the different parameters for in-line and
cross-line numbers by scrolling down in the SEG-y headers +
fromJirst.fi/e list in the lower part 0f the dialog box (bit
location information ts found under the first three SEG-y trace
headers).
72 o D oject Se. tp drd Data o epa a.ion Petre Geophysics
,Er
I .,; !{r:taqe §etd*iarlt';ir,lcgre r
'?ü'§3s
r!,r$rÉ 5 t{-¡ f coofóó8te§ ¡E isñsrÉ rñee$ wdh ry;il {*,*} e:**r*¡S**
§:,t*
f{eader lar¡lai
Ilaee he¡der*; p.§sf}§n
X cúsndi.'r*s ,: * btle i3;-btj i¡ricü*r ?

Y sssrdir!§tE :: w c b;ie 32.Lrt, ,rg;er
i-rsle detñetaü'1 me{,hsd ir¡ce !-r*¿de¡ fr*l** r I l
Trace* l* s*av:
su{i&Ér
,r'iiise l:] r ¿ bytr i*?-bitl in*§*r r 0+:l
üoss:rr n ¡¡¡ber q
JV .! btre ilf-biij iEiéier
{*F m¡¡,*b*r .
Sheipsil* &L§'¡eer l
I Sagrrplefoan&
, §éñWisspsrfuscÉ l.-: SamBte ,.:

"¿er.ra¡
': Íxlx¡gep*iss
ssfisie r"l {o*rd*txe s**i*
. , l-l¡e t¡aee waddrrq faet*rs
l..l §kp ked*ree¡gy q¡¡ecks
§ÉGY headels {rü.n lirs file
5EG-Y i'rt: Inret iraCe hüsd§!*§ I

!ra{l {1-,i} I 4 ,
!:nc. {í -8) 3SA §6i.
f j dr {9-111 § ¿
irecf a:.3-161 * ! ?
¡n /r : i>n\ r.8{? sr{.fi§} iS't7§1,1ü63 :1"3{i61{§63
cdÉ 431-34,1 5 6.:L § 6:
LU'J!
-l-*
r:':
....
r_¡)_¿ól
d i:§-;t]
-;,
s
!
á;
, v> {)¡*5¿ I ü
¿l
s§
t
,'-.''-l
, F Lancd l
14. SetTraces to scan t0 1000 and click Scan. 0bserve thatthe

graphic displays of in-line, cr0ss-line, and X- and Y-coordinates
are sequential, indicating that the parameters are set c0rrectly
(lnline number ai byte p0slt¡0n 221 and Crossline number at
byte position 5 or 21).
Petre Geophysics Project Setup and Dara Fre¡arar o¡ ¡ 73

E
l--
+
rnl i ne
500. g f60.0 15s858?. OO _170134.00 _-<
500,0 361. O 15S8617. OO _170114. OO
t 162.0 1598692.OO -170134.O0 ¡._
500.
500. o 361,0 1598747. OO -170134. O0 +
500, o 164.ü 1598802.00 _170114.00
500. o 365. O i598857. O0 -170134. OO
500. o 366. 0 1598912. 0S -i701 14. 00
: r.,
lnline "'- ,
L--
.tt
I f-. o
- E-
L-"
.,|
,l ,' . : -t
¡--¡
¡L
l
I
,'t3:"':e,
"E
;
t- -l
--l 2fl0 4oo 600 * ]oi H
:.J
Jrl
/l /i ll ll
lE ¡
-)
¡--a
/l
/t U
ill1/{,7
It t/ ti ii
= :
f-
tll l/ li l/u --i--ll1

/ lll,
U
?00
rl
ll
400
, V Trad.b seo
60ü 800 túri
,
" l
t. .J-
.l
L¡
Click 0K in the SEGY Scan dialog box. _l

_L.d
_l
¡.-J
_t
-\{
Petrel Geophysics _l
:l:J
16. Click 0K in the SEG-Y lmport dialog box.
An Input data dialog box opens. The X, y Z ranges should
be the same as illustrated in the figure.
By default, the color template for the seismic data is set to
Seismic (default). You can change this color template in the
Template drop-down list. You also can change it after the
seismic data is loaded.
ffi lnput data

6eneral
S Name:
ffi Type: 3D seismic
$g Template:
Domain:
Vintage:
f¡r%.r jG
Caordinate referenee sysiem iüH§i
Froj+ctCR5: SPCS27 i7C?
File CRS:
0ügrCR§...
X range 15§8554.5ó i6ts7s?.5{i fll§ j-'St

Y range
Zrange.
-"!§5S1.i.5ü
-35S2 *8
-':?Cl{re.50 ftUS
m§
ij
i-"*---i lf you use SEG-Y
Unil conversion '.-
Seismic data {".") as the
format when loading the
seismic volume, steps
Z conversian:
10-16 in this exercise will
not be performed. A
¡E Negate Z-values when mostly pasilive
Vintage selection dialog
box opens, after whrch the
Input data dialog box in
Step 16 opens.
lf you load a bricked

17. Click 0K. A new icon is displayed in the lnput pane under seismic volume usíng Files
fhe 3D sersmic folder. of type: Seismtc data in
ZGY bricked format {" zgy),
lf the Petrel message log opens, view its content and
the same Vintage
close it. selection dialog box
18. the menu bar, select Window > New 3D window,
In appears and Step 16 and
the remaining steps are
19. In the lnputpane, toggle on mig to displaythe outline of requ ired.
the seismic data.
Petre Geophysics
Pr0lect Setup and Data Preparai 0n . 75
J
I
20. Toggle 0N lnline and Crossline to display the seismic data
ffi»*;na*r1any¡ iCli§:re
+
>
-.--.
>
21 Observe that the Vintages folder (under Sersmic ln the -

lnput pane) n0w c0ntains 0ne entry, Seismic Time 1 .
Save your prolect.

22
-
Loading 2D Data
1 . Bight-click the Sersmic main folder and select lnsert
seismic survey.
0pen the Settings dialog box for the new folder (Survey 'j). -
0n the lnfo tab, change the name of the new folder to 2o
1 rne s.
4 Click 0K
tr
., R¡ght-click fhe 2D lines surveyfolder and select lmport
(on selection).
6. lnfhe Data import/Seismic input data/2D lines
directory, select the ".sgyfiles.
7 . Make sure Files of type is set to SE6-l seismic data with -
76 . Project Setup and Data Preparation Petre Geophysics
B Click 0pen.
I Complete the SEG-Y lmport dialog box as shown in the
figure and click 0K.
10 ln the Input data dialog box, make sure that File CRS is set
toSPC27*1102... and click 0K for all. lf the Petrel
message log opens, view its contents and close it.
Save your project.
Petrel Geophysics Project Setup and Data Preparat on . 77

E
L-
Transferring Data between Petrel Projects
The Reference proiect tool is object generation aware. lt displays
t
information about which version of the same object is newer 0r
older in the local and reference projects.
1. From the File menu, select Reference project tool. An
0pen project dialog box opens.
E
ffi fetrel 2S13.1 {64-b¡t} alpha - lNevr¡ prqect - lmpo
F¡l€
iiÉ loler,* prejec:

üpen prcjet:
impart.ile. , .
,
l-
§.:¡ -
ffi 5a'dÉ preieci C:rl+5 ¡-
L-
ffi Save ¡:rejec:r as. ..
e* ..--i.i.:
Sl Database lcol... L.
ffi üp¡r-t" se¡rch lnd*x
o3 i:t:1. s11:c! s5rel::r:n
[-
L
m
-5" irrrnl ... Lr-i {_ r
;
il*i : t't ,:'
T_
L
Find Cl o ud s pin_S ry P roj e ct.p efR in the

e c onda
Secondary prljects folder and open it. (lf the Petrel !L

¡-
message log appears, view the content and close it.)
All available data in the selected reference project is listed
on the right srde of the Reference proiect tool dialog box.
78. Proiect Setup ard DaLa Preparal on Petrel Geophysics
-.
I
L
----{
r-_J
§ RdereÉp¡ojdtd
r__
r--¿
i,Ei
Ba.kgroud prciéd
Olceophys¿s Fu¡damenblis¿condary ProFc§ialcudspin §éco"a..ve.¡.crpen
Cood$abqsbm: SPCS2I l¡2{'UENTOR SPC§27-I& W27LoúÉiánaSEl
¡-§
ii$l ',".lEllElB@iliEJü '[¡

1_
r-¡
k" c
ñv 'Ti
>.:spr-:- o e,¡e,
,¡i"rH-
ii. r-,-JÉ,
'El sq:.-
.," r
oaer&'s
u
E
1_ ,i ,'.cú[úB dsta
- I'rr-d:il-?r_(6t)-
E ]
L
%8tr
"*" : .r ' armcr Polrp É l
f 'l 1", o' 4erá.ó* \J
--J 3v u€qq
ii3 r, NÉ{m*r q ]
LL-l i ¡5 lsirudu¡dr€@»*e E i
r.-¿ -
.
Éó r/ÍrÉ
f
.."'
¿ r--r
--*l:'uu'""* E
] !-ü:. .i r¿mprdé I
.ñ f/m+
I §.r"""** Úl
f
---¡
r-¿
Debrrs
rime:
i&cloudainl
I .-i
li Debils lAlrackPofaonl
Tiñé: F¿bá2m706S:59
f:l
f
Febl3201311:15i3
Rete@nce DiGeophr$cs Fúndéménbtlsuden{t1y-CloudsplnFei Eets¡énce. DlceophysiÉFún&ñenblsécondary
f
--
l
+il. makh'n! I
f
E--¿
4.
Toggle on the check boxes for these objects: Wells, Well
Tops 1, Cultural data, lmported lnterpretation, Surfaces,
ATrack Polygon, and New model.
Use the blue left arrowto copy data into your Iocal project.
ü*\
,i
i
- I lf there are any

mismatches between the
coordinate systems of the
local and reference projects,
The Petrel message log lists the copied objects. a warning message is
L
displayed and you will be
5 Close the Reference proiect tool and save your project. unable to transfer the data.
This limit prevents you from
L
copyinq data between
geographically incompatible
= projects.
Also, if the two projects have

different unlt systems (metric
1-
vs. field), you will get an
error message and you wlll
be unable to transfer the
L
data.
-4
Project Setup and Data Preparati0n . 79

Prefetching Data to Cache
Accessing volumes is one of the most critical and, potentially, time
consumrng processes when interpreting and handling seismic data.
Both SEG-Y and ZGY format volumes are stored and accessed from
disk, although the bricked seismic format (ZGY) is handled much
Ir
faster than SEG-Y
To reduce the trme t0 access volumes, you can prefetch data to

cache if the size of the volume is not too brg for the c0mputer's
RAM. This process involves loading the entire volume rnto computer --
mem0ry. 4
1. ln the lnput pane, right-click on mrg and select Prefech to §--,
cache.
The Petrel Message log opens and displays the prefetch
-,
§-,
status of each level starting with 0 (zero) and continurng
y._¡
upward until all levels requrred to prefetch the entire
volume at full resolution are loaded.
To displaythe Message log if it is closed, gofo View >
Panes > Message log. )
**l
The volume size cannot be larger than the set seismic G*
cache srze for the project. l
2. Change the cache size: !l

)
+E
a. Go to Iools > System settings > Seismic tab.
b. lncrease the cache size so that you can load larger
-.J
I
volumes. However, do not to set ¡t too high because a

>-l
high number can cause unstable performance. The
range is dependent on the available BAM of the )
computer. Hold your mouse pointer over the question Ll
mark to frnd out how to calculate the optimalvalue.
J ¡
-_l
=-J
-l _l
80 o Project Setup and Data Preparation PeÍel Geophysics

§-J
l
:l
Gropping Seismic Data
cropping the seismic data means reducing the
vorume in the X, y
or Z domain and skipping in-rines and cross-rines.
with 2D rines, the
same process means reducing the vertical
range as wellas the
extent of the line by limiting or skipping trace
ñumbers, CDps, or
SPs.
1. R¡ght-crick on the 3D seismic cube (mig) and serect rnsert

Virtua! cropped votume.
A new icon with the same name as the original
followed by
[Crop] / appears below the original icon.
2. Open the Settings dialog box for the cropped
volume.
3. 0n the 0perations tab, change the Bealization quality
to
B, 16, and 32 b¡f.0bserve the changes in file size
(realized volume size).
4. Open a new 3D window.
5. Display the cropped data by roggling on mig [Crop] 1. The
outline of the seismic cube is displayed.
6. Under mig [Crop] 1, toggle on lnline and Crossline.
To add
more lines, right-click the cropped volume and
insert
in-line, cross-line, time slice, or seismic intersections
from
the menu.
7 . Activate Select/pick mode. The corners and
edges of the :*'..
i*r
volume appear with green squares. By clicking
thése green I
squares, you can drag the edges of the cube - You cannot use
manually. Selec(pick mode to crop
A continuous readout of the size when cropping 2D lines graphically in a 3D
down a
volume is displayed in the lower right corner window
petrel.
-
B. Get an exact cropping to a specific in_line and
of
cross-line
range by opening the Settings dialog box
for the cropped
volume (if not already opened) and sélecting
the Gropping
tab.
Set these parameters:
o lnline range from 500 to 700, Skip g
=
. Crossline range from 360 to 580, Skip
=
o Vertical range from _800 to 2500 ms
0
Petrel Geophysics
Project Setup and Dut, p,.pu,utrrffi
t-.
L-
t-
t_
L ClickApply and check the Stat¡st¡cs tab.

10. Go to the 0perations tab > Realize subtab for the
cropped volume and check the file size again.
1 1. Cancel the Settings dialog box.
t-
12. Crop a 2D line:
a. R¡ght-click 0n 0ne of the imported seismic lines and
select lnsert virtual cropped 2D line.
b. 0pen the Settings dialog box for the inserted 2D line. É
c. 0n the Gropping tab, set the Vertical range t0
-4000.
d Click 0K
e. With a 3D window active, toggle on the cropped 2D
line in the lnput pane. B
1 3. Change the lateral extent of the cropped 2D line. Select
appropriate values in the drop-down Iist for First trace or
Last trace on the Gropping tab in the Settings dialog box b
You can also enter a number for Skip traces.

14. Save your project.
=.
l'srEd @§e : .4f3:
C*T §P
Ff.Éffi - ¿tr 0 ?lr !1 =-
Lasr*m: ii3ú " m§§ ffise
§@tlBB L
82 . Project Setup and Data preparation

Petre Geophysrcs
,)
l
Realizing the 3D Volume
L
t lealilalpn is the process of creating a physical copy of seismic
data in ZGy bricked format.
A reatizei ,,r'óái rr.,
faster to upioad than an equivrl.niuotruf'J.ppeO is significantty
f,
L_- strongly recommended that you
cuOe. tt ¡s
save y0ur prolur, to a specific
locarion, preferably rhe locat
L"
a,
seismic volumes. Otherwise,
hard dis[, Ouioür.uul¡r¡ng
large
tf-le.sysiemt tá*po,u,V directory (for
L
example, C\TEMP)will be used
foithe generaieo volume file.
1 .
0pen the Settings dialog box
for the cropped seismic
cube.
L
f--
2. 0n the Realize subtab on the
Operations tab, toggle off
the Zero centric check box.
L
-,
I-d
¡
€G*#ñ:**"i*§i:;i.l¡l:rt:,::i:i
#
o.u,,r.
ff.,*iÜ *r*Y. 1'*:
o*,ro
i
I-
'
::il.ii.1:t:rrrii.,::ii.ijf]il..:,::r..¡i§.
':p*'
,** iq ***
i oo*" -""T F*c
ij1i:,:iti,1':ii##i
L-
-
i I S"ee *u*rde *¡rr: .?16.Ée¡é t l?§.(r§7S
l; .9. S*¡*m*§how¡b§le
i. l:., soti*******
,:.'.i LlBd¡{§sd
- '- -'- -' '
ki
"- -- " I i
il
,.d ii
t¡
I-: ¿s. me
Itsogrfr
*n : lX:t,¡ , ll** ,;:,¿ ** :d jlti
li
il
li
li
jl
ri
i:
rl
i:
ti
¡i
1!5 .r$ .is .5h ';:----"]T lr
EEI .¡edopd.g t *O. tüs ti
*r"**n O*,,' 125
ri
l.rj iño s6. ¿S org*d qr¡hy no#g per
ri
3, bt
Fe¡*rtuqqÉ¿{t ¡neg* aU,i '
. il*'o* m rj
O+*+*.. *¡:.áirá,, .
ii
' --- . li-.¡ ,**¡g,n¿¿ r" , :--,1 ] i
!*t¿* .*,
...... ii usdáftd :. ,: li
'-,s ]i
r I Éée&¿edvo[fts¿ Lt&3]0f,{B
3. Use the Setfrom soltrce as shown aboveoption

as
Source amplitude range andciick
"4. Observe the histogram.
Scan.
Petrel Geophysics
Droiect
Serrp and ¡¿¡¿ p¡gp¿¡¿flffi
I
Toggle onfhe check box and observe that the sprke

Filter
I
--:
b
(zero values) is removed from the histogram display.
Ensure that the Realization quality ls lnteger B bit.
-l
[.- ¡
1 Keep the remainlng values as defaults and click Realize
The Task manager opens under the graphic window area
showing the status of the realization process. The
_l
!J
information also is written to the Petrel message log
_l
'i**q *¡ w -.:i **:. *. :,i,;:*i *: e; e ¡*ñ4 ;e"€ É4,+e*. -til t;**"" §
l
A new seismic volume named mig [Bealized] 1 appears in l---¿
the lnput Pane.
' B'--: mig Ecrryl I [Ftea§izedl I
:A:,,1 ¡nlinÉ &3§ L--a
..§:,-: Xline4?&
.*:-i Z=_t752
- -]
B. Close the Settings dialog box.
9" Realize the mig cube in a similar way. --l
1 0. Save your Project.
L-/
Analyzing and Removing Mis-Ties -]

The Mis-tie manager is an interactive tool for managing mis-ties >l
between 2D lines and 3D surveys. lt works in much the same way
l
as the Survey Manager for sorting and viewing data. >

You can generate mis-tie sets for the entire survey folder or for
different subfolders ln the main survey folder.
ln part A of this exercise, you will analyze and remove the mistie in
allvintages. ln part B, you will remove the mis-tie in selected lines.
Part A. Analyzing and Removing the Mis-Tie in All Vintages
1. ln thelnput pane, right-click the 2D /rnes folder and select
-
lnsert mis-tie set.
2. Choose both the 2D lines and the 3D seismic survey and -<
click 0K.
=
Petrel Geophysics
84. Prolect SelLp ano Data Prepatatior
-
L_ i;r
L_ r¿l
j::l
!.¡l.,.,-l1¡@.-j
L- The Mis-tie manager opens as a spreadsheet with one
entry for each crossing between the 2D lines and the 3D
L_- survey.
feiÉiffil
:t****",-.,1¡il
L_- l
L---.
t_
L-
r___-¡
L-
H 191 St_ - . _
t-i
ari i
E: la.
t-r
l-f l
Toggle on lhe Vertical and Gain check boxes in the top
L-
lé1
section of the Mis-tie manager, but leave Phase toggled
L
off.
4. Leave the Start and End values as the defaults (they define
the time window or which statistics will be computed
>¿a
L
between any two crossing lines).
5 Click Gompute mis-ties and observe the values entered
t
into the different columns.
t--l
Use Constan¡ as the method for calculating mis-tie
corrections and click Gompute.
4
L
U
P.l rel Geophysics Project Setup and Data Preparati0n . 85
I.
r-
:
ücrrertions
rii¡ Constsnt
r Varisble
1. Ihe Gain correction and Vertical correcfion columns

are filled in. You can edit the c0mputed values in these
columns manually. lnlhe Vertical correction c0lumn,
enter - 10 . 0 (10 ms downward relative to the crossing =
lines) for all entries of slb2.
Click Apply.
>_
>
9. You can use and lock different 2D lines by selecting the :

appropriate check boxes in the Us¿ and Lock columns
Use all lines, but do not lock any of them. b
11 When satisfied with the set-up, click Realize to generate

physical versions of the mis-tied lines.
mis-tie corrected seismic dialog box, >
1? ln the Realize
make these selections:
a. Toggle onfhe Scanfor exact amplitude check box.
b. Toggle off the Zero centric check box.
c. Use lnteger '16 bit as Realizatlon quallty.
d. Selecf Default vintage.
==
85 . Proiect Setup and Data Preparation

Petrel Geophysics
I
-a
-JI
-l-
=¿
I
-
)
13 Click 0K. These lines can now be found at the bottom of

fhe 2D /rnes folder. The realized Mis-tie 3D volume is
found at the bottom of the iD seismicfolder.
14. 0pen a 3D window and display
o
the original lines by clicking the first column as shown
rn the figure.
o the virtual mis-tied lines by clicking the second column

as shown in the figure.
-l
&ffi1 r*;-
? **r_. a1
, - l*r*feut*-
:r- tt * e *rr*st*{$ i *t*rs eeti **t
r., *ti§{
--tI '1
5 Click 0K to save and close the Mis-tie manager.
16 Open a Map window and view the points from Mistie set,
--/ found in Ihe Mis-tie foldel under fhe 2D /inesfolder.
17. 0pen the Seftings dialog box for the points from mis_tie
set.
Petrel Geophysics
Project Setup and Data Preparation . g7
-1
J
L.
10
to. 0n the Style tab:
l
.--¡
a.
b.
Activate the Number annotation.
Toggle on the ,Sftow check box.
-l
-J
lE-l
c. Select a font suitable for display.
19 Click 0K
l¡--a
20 Expand the Attributes folder of the Points from mis-tie set
and choose attributes to disPlaY.
:É?100¡
l-_l
¡.--.
-l
L.-J
¡,--.
?4.16' ]
^
t-.-
n 01 g Iq
8.28
12+30 I-l
h-
zoPB,
- H.lA
¡ gñgli,? 15f." Í,
,"d,; uqiq I-_l
¡--J
t,
Ll
I
.J
5i
<
Mao
nB¡e
I l{a5itt}
0 :!10 5{tú ;t!sr0s§41:5süíü§
-
g*s L*túi! ¡E
lffi
lrÉ#é I tar*¿ F
'{sddfffi nÍ1:..?,r 1
_+&¡raffi §¡nF¡v.e
=
88 . Project Setup and Data Preparation Petrel Geophysics
Part B. Removing a Mis-Tie in Setected Lines
1.
Bight-click fhe 2D linesfolder and select lnsert mis_tie
set.
2 Choose the 2D lines survey only.
3 Select the Seismic Time 1 vintage.
4 Click 0K.
A new set named Mis-tie set 2 is generated and the
Mis-tie manager opens.
Bemove the tick marks for all lines in the t¡se column
except slbl and slb2.
Set tick marks in the Lock column for slb1.
E.n ** Co.d.tu
lador
ve&t
c.rdon
13§: 3§, 1351
531: 4tl:
:¡ti"--5ij;: - 'i¡i,
2a1l
idb!
sal ¡á?;--
-i;t:
lg¡r
7 . Use Vertical as the method and click Compute mis{ies.
B. Make sure Constant is selected and click Gompute.
0bserve that only two entries are present in Ihe Vertical
correction column where the two lines cross.
9. Vertical correction for slbl is 0 (zero) because this line is
locked. Enter -2 0 . 0 ms infhe Verticctl correction
column for slb 2 (20 ms downward relative to slbl and
)
click Apply.
10. View the result in a 3D window by using the two eye
columns in the Mis-tie manager.
1 1. Compare the two different mis-tie
corrected versions of
slb2 (manually select/clear them by expanding slb2 in the
lnput pane)"
A mis{ie set is created for the Surveyfolder or subfolder
from which it is inserted. All lines in that folder belonging
to the selected vintage are displayed in the Mis-tie
manager, including all subfolder lines.
Petrel Geophysics
Pr0ject Setup and Data Preparati0n . 89
Review 0uestions
. Why is it important t0 use the correct projection and unit
system?
Can you import different vintages of seismic data with
different SRDs?
ls it important for projects to have the same projection :
system when using the Reference project tool?
What are the benefits of cropping and realizing seismic
data?
+
What are the different types of mis-ties that can be
computed in Petrel? E
Summary
ln this module, you learned about:
. setting up a new project .<
o setting project and unit systems
. loading 3D and 2D seismic data
o importing check-shot data vL
. optimizing data by
. cropping
. realizing
>
. performing a mis-tie analysis.
-
E
90 o Projecl Setup and Data Preparatl0n Petre Geophysics

I
-
Module 2-
Seismic Data
Visualization
ln this module, you will be introduced to the seismic interpretation

interface and various ways t0 visualize and display seismic data.
r:='r
Learning 0biectives r-aü
After completlng this module, you will know how to:
o use the seismic interface and toolbar
. display 2D and 3D seismic data
. set up a seismic disPlaY scale
. make and annotate seismic base maps
. make and display composite and ¡ump tie lines
. use and link multiple windows
. use color template and palette optimization
. use the Survey manager
o use the visualization tools
. render volumes in 3D windows
. use the Light tool
. use the lmmersion mode.
Seismic lnterpretation Preparatl0n ' 91

Pelrel Geophvsics
Lesson 1 Petrel User lnterface
-
The Petrel user interface consists of two main areas, the Display
window and the Petrel Explorer panes.
. Display window: Displays objects. The objects can be
different types. You can open any number of windows at the

same time and use window tabs to select them'
o Petrel Explorer panes: Contain all data used in the project:
. lnput pane: Contains imported and created data. E
. Models pane: Contains created models

. Templates pane: Contains predefined templates'
:
. Results pane: Filters simulation and volumetric results'
. Processes pane: Contains a Iist of the available
processes in Petrel in the order ln which they are t0 be ->
performed.
. Workflows pane. Contains workflows that you insert from
the lnsert menu and modify using the Workflow editor' >
. Gases pane: Stores all simulation and volumetric cases'
¡ Windows pane: Stores all used wlndows (30 window'
>
InterPretation wi ndow).
. Favorites pane: Allows you to customize access to the
data and processes in Petrel. lt conslsts of shortcuts to >
data (lnput pane and Models pane), processes, windows'
temPlates, workflows, and cases.
These features provide access to the functionallty in the Petrel user >
interface.
. Toolbar: Dlsplays general tools related to import and
visualization. -
. Menu bar: Drsplays familiar Windows menu commands, such
as File > 0pen, Edit > Copy, File > Save, and Help > b
Manual.
. Function toolbar: Displays tools related to the active process in
the Processes Pane.
. Object tnformation: Displays information about an Object when
you select that object in the Display window.
. Status bar: Displays the status of the last performed action'
. Message log: Displays a log of all actions done in a Petrel
session. You can toggle it on and off from the View menu'
Petrel Geophysics
92. Se smic lrterpte.arion Preparatior
E
l,¿
-¡ tr
L_
rl tr
1_
r--¿
l_
L
f¿l
L J-¿
fa-r
f
--.--{
f
I-<¡
--á
Cases, Workflow, and Windows Panes
information
Seismic InterDretati0n Preparation' 93

Petrel Geophysics
-J
i--.
Geophysics Processes Pane -_l
look at the processes
Before you start t0 visualize the data set, take a t-
and thelr related toolbars under Geophysics in
the Processes pane.
-_l
process actions
When you select a pr0cess, the process toolbar and
that process and t--¿
toorúui change, depending on the available tool in
you have
*Áu, tvp. of"wirdo* (20, 30, or lnterpretation window)that
)
l
active. I>
A grayed out option indicates that the
prerequisite steps for the process
nave not been completed. A grayed out option
with a red circle
¡-
indicates that you do not have a license for
that utility' >
ñ
v
4
4
a.
¡:
F
E
T-
L
i! rl$.¡-
lnpu§
n
§
I *
L,
t"
$
ffi Seismic interPreiatian -;
er
ffi Volume atlributes i?
-
L--'
t$ Surfuce aüributes 1t
'{ft Autarnatic fuult extraclion o
,r
lY1 $,{ake velocitY mndel 3t L:
>
,, i j r {r+::: . f
=.,+,ii iif lr {-.
L'
ffi GeabadY interPretaünn
§:
fl Seismic rr,'ell tie 1:
E Make restaratian 2D model E
E -
§
j
B
§
'rr,
94 . Seismic lnterpretati0n Preparation

F
L.-
rL
I-
Lesson 2
Data - Display Tools Íor ZD and 3D Seismic
L
l-
ln this lesson, you wilr rearn about toors that you can
display and interpret ZD and 3D seismic data.
use in petrer to
L
J-
Seismic lnterpretation Toolbar
L
J# The seismic interpretation toolbar provides easy access
used interpretation tools. lt is available for 30, 2D, and
windows. You can turn this toolbar on and off by using the
in the menu bar.
to commonry
lnterpretation
vibw menu
These are the available toors in their defaurt order of

appearance:
o Active seismic obiect: rndicates the active seismic object.
' color scale: Disprays the coror tabre of the active sectián and
allows you t0 c0mpress (symmetrically), rotate, or alter the
opacity.
. F¡¡p color table: Flips the color bar.
o Reset color table: Besets changes made to the color bar.
a Active property template: Shows the property template of
the active section and allows y0u t0 change property
templates.
Toggle wiggle and bitmap: Toggles between two VI/VA/
VAVI displays in the lnterpretation window.
Active lt/horizon interpretation: D isp lays the contents
fa u
of the active lnterpretation folder in a drop_down list.

Choosing a horizon or fault from the list makes it active.
Create new fault/horizon: AIlows y0u t0 create new faults
and horizons and add them to the active rnterpretationforder.
Toggle on/off all interpretation obiects: Hides or displays
all seismic horizons, faults, and surfaces.
Selected vintage: Lists the vintages available for the current
intersection. You also can select a new vintage.
Apply selected vintage to visible seismió planes: Applies
the selected vintage to all visible intersections.
. Reset visible seismic planes to original vintage:
Resets
the vintage of visible intersections to the vintage
thatis
defined for the displayed intersection.
Petrel Geophysics
Sei.- ¡'rre,p.er¿t o- P¡epd,or 01. 95
Procedure Using the Seismic lnterpretation
1. -
From the menu bar, select
Toolbar
View > Seism¡c interpretation
toolbar
YiPH
rlt{ r¿n ps
I¿l .,sFEa:L-r
I :(É Ti¡¡r pi¡'y'er :r:rls¿r
ilirlh: si r"; r: i ¡ :cr :c r: j h ar
-{ 5:¡:us ba,-
.1,J, ;rii srieet

5.L'.! Ji:;iÉ,.!,trrali-f.,-:,._,\
I¡:¡hase'cr ?¿;¡¿{ .¡¡jf.¡r
Seisr:rlc inteipr*i¡tinn :ofl jL]tsr
im. learch:r:r:lL,ar
lr..
.a
!:lil :. :Ll ::.1! ir_s.
., prc.i=r:
Li ¡l É;r.- tri¡e ;5
:EJ lrericus pan* 5hi-: + FE
inpr-:; pane f:r!-f
)b Jrncesles p:ne
f:i+1
ffi irlcdÉis tr¿np
2 Create new faults and horizons.

.)
J. Select a template for seismic display.
4 Activate and switch between restorati0n
tr
models.
Activate and sw¡tch between vintages.
ñ.m"....r
5
Procedure- 0pening and Displaying a Seismic Line in an
lnterpretation Window
1. From the Window menu, select tnterpretation w¡ndow.
Alternativery, right-crick 0n the
seismi, ruri¡0, and serect
Create interpretation window.
2. Choose an l-line/X-line from a
3D cube or a ZD line from a
I survey folder. lt displays in-the
lnterpretation window.
3. Select the View mode &
to ,ou. seismic data or zoom in/
out using the mouse wheel. Right-clicking
opens a menu with
different options.
=
96 o Seismic lnre,pret"r,ofi[ffi,
r:
Seismic nterpretation Preparatisr'r. 97
!
.-
4. From the process toolbal select between ,.§.§, to display
the prevrously displayed seism¡c secti0n.
The top sect¡on 0f the Interpretat¡on window displays the
intersecting lines. SP and CDP can also be displayed.
&üÉ
L
#
4
4
#
ñ
&
4
#
5. Flip the seismic line by using ü on the player bar'

6. Change the color display of a seismic sectlon from the
lnterpretation toolbar.
J!)!:' L rj:'r-:i ¡¡¡.
-,
I
1 ----- .-'-.'t-i'it'{§l
!1-§.wi.*,,w{w-*+'**"-***i*
7
4 rtt
Click Llr on the Seismic interpretati0n t0olbar to toggle the
wiggle and bitmap display 0n or off .
B To display the next cross-ltne or in-line, press etther Page Up or
= Page Down 0n your keyboard. Jump to a particular Iine by

- specifying the line numller in the General rntersection player.
Specify the increment that you wish to use t0 jump to the next
= cross-line or in-line.
* :-:i *. l. §I&tisñr¿':d*:'t*:ll
,,
/ tFIl
nr!*..:..
)'
L
.,.,...,....rr.r:.........r..r.:.:...,rri
-: i#*.*@@#,#,!. : ¡i;,. -"

l,-t
L
LI---.¡
I--.-r
1_
I
i-t)
l
I
f
r-_ :,.."1
,..,,|
i
l
---- .,]
I
rl
. aa:r1
t..o,l
i
-..)
I
'..1
Petrel Geophysics Seismic lnterpretatl0n Preparatlon . 99

lnterpretation Window Data Posting >
To post wellbores and picks, select the check boxes for the wells that
you wish to post inthe Wells folder and the propertres and tops in the
WellTops folder. A time-depth relationshrp for the well must be
avarlable before the data can be displayed.
To adjust the well path appearance, use the Settings dialog box for the
Wellsf older.
To adjust well posting parameters, use the Settings dialog box for the ts
respectrve attri butes in lhe We I I attr i b ute s f older.
You can display other objects (such as interpretations, faults, and

surfaces) in the lnterpretation window. Choose them in the Input
-
pane"
Procedure Posting Data in an Interpretation Window

1 . -
Display objects from the lnput or Models pane: Horizon
E
interpretation, Faults, Wellbores (needs a time/depth

relationship), Logs, Well Tops, and 3D grid data (propertres,
-b,
edges).
>
->
>:
Change the display on the Style tab in the Settings dialog box
for each object.
a
J. ln the Settings dialog box on the Style tab, lnput settings
subtab for the displayed seismic line, set a distance limit; part
100. Seismlc lnterpretati0f Preparati0n Petrei Geophysics
of the wellbore and well tops beyond the llmit are n0t posted.
4. ln the 3D grid settings subtab, set the display style of the 3D
grrd data.
§ Settings for'Xline 580'
t* 3ü intersecti*n pl,rne r,nFy :.]
Wid$rjsize Co[*r
r§ Surfaces:
_1 - As s¡-rt*ce
'sS ir'Jetis: 1 - A.s +.,tll
ffi Seismic: l-_j üepth ntrset

.(; Palygons: Linost nmn
Style Settings Applied to All Similar Obiects

r']r-l
Clicking ':Q: on the Style tab applies the settrngs to all objects of the
same type that are attached to the same pr0perty template.
Se smic Interpretatlon Preparatl0n. t0l

Wiggle Trace
When you display seismrc rntersections in an lnterpretation window,
you have the option to display wiggle traces. You can access this option
on the Seismrc rnterpretation toolbar or from the Style tab in the
Settings dialog box for the seismic interpretation when an
lnterpretation window is actrve.
@
r-t:*
$ettins§ {*r'flnig' ffi
li §
ll*
ii
li li':
lilLl
I
It
I htérpúlatl0fl
'n*thrd
li ruqnÉ r§, Bilin*ar ':': B¡rúati, il
il, BilflrBF
I .r:l
,J =¡+w
'!q'igglsE -. ---- .
§ Bhavr
r' Fril p0tslnv€
h r{r EBqalJr'á
lntÉr'r Éll
iJt h'lanuai üainr
E.
l,Viggls *nty di*play
102. Seisnrlc lnterpretation Preparation Petrel Geophys cs

+
L-
r--{
L-
af
ln the Settings dialog box, you have options to fillthe negative 0r
p0srtive side of the traces, increase the gain (X scale) of the wiggles,
and determine the number 0f traces shown.
L"
a{
Wiggle traces are available 0nly in the lnterpretation, Intersection,
and Well sect¡on windows (synthetic seismograms). Toggle off the
L- Show bitmap check box t0 remove the voxel display backdrop.
rL-
-.__1
f-ra
lnterpolation Methods
There are three available interpolation methods.
o None: Renders voxels as original values for the bitmap. The
r1:
wiggle trace has linear interpolation.
rJ o Bilinear. Benders voxels by bilinear interpolation for the
bitmap, honoring the original values. The wiggle trace has
linear interpolation.
r.--a ¡ Smooth: Benders voxels by squared distance weighting for the
bitmap, smoothing the original values. The wiggle trace is
interpolated by a sync function.
f--¡
1:
r--¿
Seismic Display Scale for an lnterpretation Window
Most interpreters want to set a fixed scale for the seismic display
1:
r--¿
during seismic interpretation. You can select the desired scale in the
Settings dialog box for the lnterpretation window.
1_
r-r¿
L"
Eá
l_
r
a--f
t_
L-<
Petre Geophysics Se s- c'^re.preiario^ Drep¿raro.. 103

Procedure
- Setting
a Seismic Display Scale for an
This procedure sh.ws you how to have the same display scale
for all :
seismic lines in the lnterpretation window.
1. ln the Windows pane, right-click on the interpretation and
select Show settings. >
iffi,¡n"¿qr.,.. . !.+x
hi ¿i,T¡/ ¿EiÁrhll
r § rr- : tnterpreta:ian *inday I
[Tyy T] - mÍg _ Seismlc Time I _ ]tine ,!XI
:
.ffiat:ffiee§
ffi 3D wir,don " lArr] j : :c1.. se:: rL.ts , , ,.
ñ l:+:: t+ ts
I :' ' rlcii:ss+ i.-.¡¡¡5¡.,6:
'i ..::a¡il r ¿a-..s ,.É '.
. ü .'!.1:¿ rr¡¡= ali i =-

2. Choose the appropriate Xy and Z scale for the trace display.
I ffi Settinqs fsr'lnterprctarlon 1' I X i' =
=
l'l Ymin: .;J.:i..§
, Tmax: ! :
+
Unit of marorns
r -i
:..
Fight ÉÉr. ¡ñ1. ¡Lá
ri.at l1tii1
-
104 o Sersmic lnterpretati0n preparation

Petre Geophysics _l
--r
This frgure shows examples of different display scales for the same
section.
:::-= !e:phvs cs Seismic lnterpretat 0f Preparat 0n.105

Procedure Displaying Seismic Data in a 3D Window
1. From-the Window menu, select 3D window.
2. CIick on the seismic data to be displayed; it is displayed in the
3D window as a base/location map.
1{ñ§.?E: - É
ti
-
i¡l
:li *'
l;l
-
::tl
r&l
:
.a: L:
-;;i."'
i rii
I * ss§6ir ¡Éawse*¡s
I É1 t:r:re, qn¡rr,§t >
I '? ii]e¡r; itr5rr¿r
l,,r,ir-.¡n.¡+ure*;.r,.
I :!r !1*!¡ h.1§r
i:.: 'ei..& :,4:;d
:
I *.:;erhnltillÉ,rfrltlr " ,l
'':;§
'.,i **
¿h::1_kÉ'.-;;' .: q-* *I >
:t..&.o*.. <G;,
,'"'ir*l§.§-,,t
To display the trace data, make sure that lnline/Xline is -

selected. For a2D line, expand the window and click on the
seismic 2D line"
_--
106. Sersmic Interpretati0n Preparation

Petrei Geophysrcs
rL
-r
=+L;ga-.ir:
L
I'dl
r--¡
1_
a--¿
L
f-ra
1=»;Fñ@;§ §ñ#
L-
r--¡
L-
L
--I
f-'.l
f-LJ 4 time slrces, right-click on the

To add in-lrnes, cr0ss-lines, and
3D cube and select the appropriate command from the menu'
u
--J
l--
# Ii:¡ert inlirtr ir:ter:eiticn
§e Ir*rit rr*:llir,* iirt*rreitilr,
S Irrlert tir¡',e -ilise inttr:**i;'r,
& fi*',,¡ ir¡t*rle*tiÍ!'r Blsnr
f
J'é
l-_-
---J
-J¡
Se's"r'l c trle-p etatior o-epa-dti01 ' 107

Click View mode to rotate the view and Z scale to change the
display scale in a 3D window. The seismic color display also
can be changed in a 3D window from the Sersmic
r nterpretation toolbar.
&iq, !¡ tt {rSt*
, :, k*-^.p,"6n.i u*r r
'n;, :.' 1-.,...-..,,r,'
r.€?ft:¿ . : ,. -
:: ::r*eéA&§éi t :r . ll,rr::ri 1t.i:j,¡J!1.1
>_
108 o Se smic lfterpretat 0n Preparatl0n Petrel Geophysics

rL
F
--l
rt
General lntersection Toolbar
rr: General intersection toolbar is actlvated in a 3D wlndow that has a
3l cube and in-lines and cross-lines displayed. This toolbar provides
L-
r--t
:¡:ions to select and manipulate seismic lines'
-ire toolbar also is available for a 2D window with different optrons.
L .lse the Clip plane optlons t0 remove posted objects ln front of or

:a.'"0 seismrc drsplays.
f---l
r-J
,r'3u
als0 can ghosf objects by adjusting the clip offset parameter in the
Settings dialog box.
-Jjust the lrne type in the Style tab > Plane settings subtab For
1_ :rample, if you set the clip offset to 50, the objects within 50 project
f
II-J -r ts (feet or meters) of the seismic line are displayed'
tr
L
r-J :* *ee#*.§&1ff,1ü
tr
f
---J
f
Step through volume
+
--- PIay through volume
1-
-.--r Set step/play increment
Clip plane
l,_
-¿l Snap plane position
L
->'! Select plane position
L-
---{
f
---¡
Selsmic lfterpretat on Preparatl0n ' 109

Procedure Displaying Seismic Data in a 2D Window
1. From the
-
Window menu, select 2D window and click on a
2D lines survey folder in the lnput pane.
2. 0pen a 2D seismrc line from a 2D window by clickíng ,'18 in
the process toolbar or (K) and click on the 2D Ilne to be opened
The seismic line appears in the lnterpretation window.
peirel 201:.1 {fi-bi1: alph! - JN¡e!r' project - SsÉmi( ¡¡lÉQrulótioñl
-rj
?D e/i*de 1 tAny;
'-
¡:. _
i3, :
r..
i:
t:
t;
lL
;lj
i:
L
l:r
l"
t.'
1r
l'
i=
ié
t;
ir t_
l'l
t+.
i +..
1...
L
E
t; i-
To open a 3Dseismic line from a 2D wrndow, click on your 3D

cube (make sure that cube is bold).
4. ln the toolbal these icons are activated ffim Click one of
them. A dotted lrne appears on the survey outline.
5. Double-clrck the dotted line to open the sersmic line in the
lnterpretation window. You also can right-clrck 0n the dotted
line and select Create interpretation window.
110. Selsm c lnterpretation Preparatlon Pelre Geo:'
-------_---4
Se,s* 'rLe p,e,a io- P ep.,.tio-. lll
Base Maps
Seismic rnterpreters frequently navigate through base maps during an
rnterpretation. ln Petrel, you can use 2D , 3D and Map wrndows to
create and display base maps.
Base Map Annotation in a 2D Window

You can turn on in-line and cross-line annotations for3D volumes in a
2D wlndow. lf you select Ihe Draw everlt n'h inline, every n'h
crossline option on the Style tab in the Settings dialog box, a base
map grid with rn-lines and cross-lines is displayed with the increment
that you specify.
Ihe kxt evetlt n't' ínlíne, everl) n't'crosslire option displays the
in-line and cross-line numbers. Change the size of the text with the
Font size option.
Make and display base maps with seismic, well, and culture data in 20,
30, and IVap wrndows. New seismic acquisition plans can be displayed
in the base map as culture data.
t-
§lt dr¿lq 2 ia'irl
L-
b-
L-
L.-
112. Seism c lnterpretati0f Preparat 0n Petrel Geophysics

rL l.
r.-J
i
Procedure
1
2
- Creating a Base Map
0pen the Settings dialog box of the selsmic survey.
0n the Style tab, choose the base map annotation parameters
that you wish to display. The Style tab is active in 2D and 3D
windows.
L'
r
--_ E §eitings f*r'IG iines'
L'
AJ
a-
--
f-
tri
:'J,: Shew lines ti¡'¡dth: i - i
-.--J ljne hrpe: - !' li: - ,
f
¡ 5h,:r rrsmes .jt end: --ci:rt -
:
l-nrBvery :i v tr€cÉ. :
---¡ J !ho:r number Tlpe 5P

:
r I
¡ Sh¡rr ti¡km¡rk !i¡e: : -

|
i
i
-. r:- : Hide l¡hels mr*nrJing {ont si:*: .i I I i
,li
irl
3[i sei:n'i+ ¿lirr:t¡ti*r :
Col+r; 5rer,ifie-.:
i*r'¡dih:
É*!i-
I iñP [fiP -1
Bsse m,:p Énnütütisn
t' Drou elreni ill' - iñline, E'/E+'
- ':rosslin*
j TsJl,:\rery '!*11 - inline. ever¡
- rr**sline
F¡,nt ri¡c
i¡ ?
ili¿rce,ttiÉn:
Crl*r: fu sulj*ct
Iilüfn
-¡
Se smic l¡terpretat cn Preparat 0n.113
r-G:
Base Map Annotation in a 3D Window

You can display a base map view of 2D seismic lines in
a 3D window.
The 2D lines can be a coror based on the seismic survey
0r vintage. you
also can set the depth of the display (for example, to -1000
ms). setting
the depth is useful for displaying the intersecting 2D seismic line
directly in the 3D window.
You can postthe 2D line names at both ends ofthe intersection

i
and
show number annotations as trace, Sp or CDp numbers.
There are similar options for posting 3D seismic in 3D windows.
C0iGr: SpsciiieC
F!ñt size: 't¡
il, Shsvrlin¿s V..r¡$hl L
L¡né ¡{pe: §qlid
ii.i show rumes Al eÍd: -

Slñd
L
Forerery r tiaie:
l!: ,...?
i ] §hownumber Type: iail
i'l §hcwnckmark §lze:
L-
l. ilid+ labels exeediag {ont size
ts
114. Seisr ..'^terpretoti0..t Prepararior

Petrel Geophysics
b-
--¡-
Selsm c nterpretati0r Pre!aratl0n . 115
Procedure Displaying Seismic Line Annotations in a 3D
Window
-
; 1. Display seismlc data in aZD or 3D window.
2. Open the Settings dialog box and open the Annotation
I subtab on the style tab
I
i--
^
¡-
.L-
3. Choose the preferred opt¡ons for the annotat¡ons.

-L
ffi Seaing fcr'?D l¡neC ..,:,1,t:.:-rlili.r:iiii
,L
th
¡=
- pkels
§ Shrw lines
Ftrnt s¡¡e:
llridrh:
t-
¡-_
Line §pe
fi Shov+ names Al md:

E
rorevery luJ tEE:
ff Shawnumb*r Tvpe:
F1 §howtirkm¿* Si=e:
l-j Hide label*emeedingfsnt size
116. Seism c Interpretation Preparati0n Petrel Geophysics

lr--
The annotations appear in the 3D window
Selsm c lnterpretatl0f Preparatl0.. 117

-
<
.L*
Lesson 3 lntersections
ln this lesson,
-Seismic ----
you will learn howto create and use differenttypes of
¡L-
intersections in Petrel. These intersections can be random lines, a
polyline intersection, composite lines, and jump tie lines.
ly
Random lntersections in Petrel
_--
Handom lines and polyline intersections in petrer are any vertical lines ¡H
.&._
that do notfollowthe full length of an in-line or cross-line. composite
intersections are similal but they can combine various 2D and 3D --<
seismic data.
L.r
.L-
You can convert any intersection or line coming from a seismic cube .-:<
(in-line, cross-line, random, composite) into a stand-alone 2D seismic I..¡
.L-
line by right-clicking the object in the !nput pane and selecting Convert
to 2D seismic. <
¡--
.L.
.1r
l,:i'j**€ Procedure -z
Working with Random Seismic Lines
irei
'i:==:rii 1. -
Activate a 3D seismic volume in the lnput pane and a Seismic ts
interpretation in fhe Geophysics folder of the processes
-z
pane.
L-¡
_l-
r #rü nrB,
& m tntinE 638 .-1
§nput q m Xline +H] ¡-<
§tratigmphy i;§ m ¿=-]?5r _¡-
Gecphysics
ruffi .1
lL-
.E
Right-click the seismic volume and select New lntersection
plane. A vertical intersection is created that you can align .<
randomly.
l--
E
,ffiI.m,- ,<l
WE Fj lr'6C
hffixrp
§nEert inline !ñ1ÉrrE.iiEn
lneeri rroEsline inie¡rerticn
l--
-t-
&La z o §nsert tinre siice ínterEecii*n
rñlcl survel
i f.JErr¡ inlerserli*n plane h .t-
3. Click one of these ¡ron, l@W,&] lro atign it vertrcaily,
north to south, east to west, or horizontally. )-<
-.>.
18 o Seismic Interpretation Preparat¡0n _--1

Petrel GeophVsics
l-¡
>-
R
4 Click Maniputate plane Ia , in tne process toolbar and drag
it to a new position. To rotate, press Shift while dragging.
Procedure Rotating a Random Line in an lnterpretation

Window -
You can rotate random lines in an lnterpretation window. Botating
lines is usefulfor aligning them with well paths.
1. Bight-click the volume of interest and select prefetch to
cache. This command gives you a smoother rotation.
2. Display the random line in an lnterpretation window.
3. ln the Processes pane under Geophysics, activate the
Seis mic interpretation process.
4. Click the #j iron in the process toolbar"
5. ln the lnterpretation window, click the reft mouse button and
drag the mouse horizontally on the random Iine to rotate it.
Petrel Geophysics
Seismic lnterpretation Preparati0n. llg
Polyline lntersection
To create data in a 3D window, you must have an object that is used to
t,-..-..-.i You can rename supply X, Y, andZ reference points (for example, TWT). When entering
these general intersections points for the seismic aligned polyline, the movement of the
to something more cursor is
descriptive.
restricted to either the in-line or cross-line direction. For the arbitrary
polyline, random directions can be digitized.
Polyline intersections are composed of two parts: the polygon trace and
the vertical seismic intersect¡0n. The polygon trace is stored under the
General intersection object in the lnput pane under the appropriate
seismic volume.
Procedure Creating a Polyline lntersection

1. -
Activate a seismic volume in the lnput pane.
.'/Pro..o"= i&'.ig
iI Lo,:
Strabsraphr h-: j=[il::1i-
I " ¡is,
!..
I a Geophysrcs
I }{if:l-.;:r:=:=
2. Display a time slice in a 3D or 2D window and click J or
J to create an arbitrary polyline intersection (digitized in
L
random directions), a seismic aligned polyline intersectlon
(in-line or cross-line directions), or a combination of both.
120. Seismic nterpretati0n preparation

Petrel Geophysrcs
-.-----ilfFn--
3 Digitize points along a time slice.
4 Double-click to end. The intersection appears and is stored in
the !nput pane with a polygon describing the path.
.# 7 mislRedizedl
@ fi tntine 635
@ [{
l_.-- ¡a-
XUne 47*
----
§ lv: -
¿=- ¡ ¡¡¿
, ry m Gemral ¡nter*diorÉ tFrbitray polygronl
1 Fl i-*j ¡rt¡tr*r FGlysDr*
To edit the polygon, activate/bold the arbitrary p0lygon in

lnput pane and the Make/edit polygons process under
Utilities.
J.-l 6 Click the show points in Polygon € anO Polygon editing
L- # in the process toolbar.
f
Ir---¡
r---¿
l
I.--¿
Drag and re-draw the orientation 0f the line. The arbitrary

seismic intersectron is updated accordingly.
Selsmlc lnterpretati0n Prepar¿ric¡ . 121

Procedure Gombining an Arbitrary Polyline with
-
Seismically Aligned Segments
1. Activate Íhe Seismic interpretatiol? process.
2. If you are using a 3D window, post an object (for example, a
trme slice). This is not required in a 2D window. \<ll
r
3. Click Greate arbitrary polyline intersection 3 .
4. Draw the polygon using the left mouse button. To snap to an

in-line or cross-line direction, hold down the Ctrl key while
moving the mouse. The segment is restlcted to the seismic
cube alrgnment. ---,.¿
5. Double-click when you are finished drawing the polygon.
The seismic data displays automatically.
F
Composite Lines
Composite Iines display seismic data where multiple lines (in-lines or
J
cross-lines from a 3D cube or 2D lines) are displayed togetherto aid
.EI
interpretation. )
>-l
^-_l
Procedure
- Building Composite lntersections lrom a 2D
Base Map Window ,¿l
There are several ways t0 build composite lines. This procedure
describes how to build composite intersections from a 2D base map
_l
window. .Ll
1. Activate the Seismic interpretation process. )
l
2. 0pen a new 2D window and display all relevant data (for ¡-

example, 2D sersmic Iines).
3. From the function list on the right side of the window, choose 4
Select composite section t0] .. .
4. Start clicking in the display window on the various seismlc

sections that you wish to keep in your composition.
5. To change the selection, press Delete repeatedly to go back
!
step-by-step.
r-#..
tl
:i 6. Double-click the last input to close the selection.
t.---...,..-.i Composite selections
are marked in white.
122. Seismic Interpretati0n Preparation Petrel Geophysics
!
"%.-*--h.
Double-click to end the composite.
The component is displayed in the Composite folder in the
lnput pane.
f Corrposiüe folder l
i, i§ f-l Composite line'!
. $ fliC-p-¡:ip_é-;_iü line-::
, i§l iE Campasite line 3
l- k u EgrErelrqtste4rylrybi!¡¡Iypslysq{{ry¡sl t!,tsll
Seismic lnterpretatlon Preparatl0n . 123
.,.e--
_iia-.ñ-_-
5t!!l! i rt.4r : h::it irr !i, li¡,fri ¡¡ :r¡i,lr¡-ir¿:
j
:lr:Jri ii!
ilLrln¿a! (t:
Eli
4ü:
---,_?-L-_,,.,,1-._.F-
il3
¡01
t.?.
5{l
i!:
.w
::j :l
I
ol .i, ,l,l', ¡l:
i
rrll,i¡e I i!ú¡jgii
ti!-]
:lli
itil
124.Se:(- c l, e p e.a. or o epa o-0. Petrel Geophysics

Procedure Building Composite lntersections from an
-
This procedure describes how to build composite intersections from
an
!nterpretation window
1. Activate fhe Seismic interpretatior? process.
2. Open a new lnterpretation window and activate a relevant
2D Iine inside it
n l§ ti,l CorilposiÉe **ne I

k Y-, Xl-¡ne 5e* [mig]
l§ g Seismic ?D tine [slb6]
right side of the
Se,'^ L ^ "'p'"ró io Dpp. ¿ io, .l2E

\<
-=<
¡
I
<
,L
-a
_-L-
--L-
Where there are rntersecting lines (potenttal compositton

parts), the cursor appears with a black vertical marker line. .L
lf you are using Compose with crossline (Shift+l) , you can
compose only 2D data with intersecting 3D cross-lines.
To compose wlth valous parts of the crossing line (the part
extendrng away from you or against you), a comblnation of
keyboard inputs is required. To see the full list of available
combrnations, go to the Petrel Help and enter composite lines
on the Search tab. Various clip and extend composite section
possibilities also are described in the Petrel Help.
126. Seismic lnterpretatlon Preparation Petr e1 Geophys rs

I--
a-
f
I--¡
Jumper Composite Section
Ihe Jumper composite section enables you t0 open 2D seismic lines
f
--l
r.--¡
that are not rntersecting each other. I\4aking a jump correlation is
particularly useful when interpreting for regional evaluations.
l_"
IL--r
Procedure
1. - Creating a Jumper Composite Section
a-
Display your 2D seismic lines in a 2D window.
rr--¡
a-
aa*t
f
f
Ir---¡
L'
I-_-j
r--¡
f 7 Click Select composite section M urO click on a 2D line
f
r-#l that you wish to include in the jump tie.
E
-'-¡
f
f
----a
Í'-.--l
r-- Selsm c lnterpretati0¡ Preparation. 127

_. J
I
E-J
.^l
I
)
--!.
3. Draw Jumper compos¡te section & is activated. Click -',]
the icon. Thrs gives y0u an option to select either the entlre or
part of the first non-intersecting 2D line.
¡
-J
I
-l
2 I
-L
,)
-¡-
4. Select some part of the 2D line by dragging the cursor on it. >-¿
-¿
.L
¿
.L
i- )
-L-
-t-
.L
¡r-
:
5. Click on this line and jump to another non-intersecting line to
whrch you wish to tie the first.
>
128.S"; r L^-órpp-dliot oep"aiol Petre Geophys cs

Seismlc lnterpretation Preparati0f ''129
=J
Lesson 4 Seismic Data Visualization and

Manipulation - =<
ln this lesson, you will learn about different ways t0 visualize seismic
data and the tools that you can use to make visualization and
manipulation of data easier and more effective.
_¿
Windows Tiling ¡-J
¡
Tiling 30, 2D, and lnterpretation windows is a powerful tool for
,
interpreting seismic data. You can see the data and rnterpretation
¡--.d
srmultaneously and interactively in all windows. lf the same seismic ^
line is selected in all windows, line manipulation is interactively
updated in allwindows. You can resize the windows as you wish. r--J
.L
A cursortracker is available for each window. When the cursor is
selected for multiple windows, the cursor location in one window is --¡
dynamically displayed in the other windows. Note that this can have an .L ;
rmpact on performance. Seismic lines are automatically linked; you also

I
can link other posted objects.

)
+-_)
-Li
I
E
§
?l *i¡rlev,,
:! r!r,lo*
)
L--J
Li !r,.ai cq !rlaúc,1 LI
@ rils:oqram,arrdcrt
I
B :¡:EipiE;aa:cs d;¡Llcti
)
ffi in:arseciicn lrnrlen, l-J
@ i/ap*ind¡n .:- i
ffi lle: rtrdor I
@ 5:e"ecrer,rir.lci., )
ffi thartirq taindcn ¡!j
]E WEli se.iiúr hiNilúr,' ..

.ts
g liÉy,!:¡f¡¡dr: irlcl ldfr.lc8 I
)
lffil clrr*t'r:.,1!-l:1
@
l:n11Crett-;1-
ilrrlisplay aii data
!-'
El ,e nt_:o¡:ai
!l -.:t ,e,:.-a _-_/ l
h,
a,-l :l
lIlJ r¡s¡a.!e
I : il rliidEr,,1 iircLp::"] :.{¡Jl

J I
I :ir t;irdox:,,.¡cup:1l aÁ¡yl

-iirrE
: j.:erpie:a:rcñ *irc1cr, I lGrtup:l] illtr'¡ - ñiq - lÉisrrr. 1- I:i¡e 4;ü
_-l
I
)
130. Seismic lnterpretati0n Preparation Petre Geophyslcs
Dual Screens
lf you have two monitors, you can resize the petrel main window so
that it can be displayed in both monitors, which allows additional
screen space to display data. For details about the recommended
hardware for using Petrel on dual screen setups, contact local support
through the Schlumberger Support Portal at support.slb.com.
Windows to Visual Groups Linking

The option to link windows to visual gr0ups is very useful during
interpretation. lt allows a simultaneous similar display of the data in
different windows.
when objects are posted in one window, they are displayed in the other
linked windows. when you change the display of objects in the active
window the other linked windows are affected.
0bjects posted in multiple windows can have parameters specific to
each window. For example, you can post wellbores in a 3D window
using a pipe and post the same wellbores in a 2D window using a
dashed line. Petrel manages each object in each window
independently.
Petrel Geophysrcs
Seismic Interpretati0n Preparation. l3l
Procedure Linking Windows to Visual Groups
'l-.-.'j
1. ln the
-Windows pane, open the Settings dialog box for each
displayed wlndow and select Linlred to visual grolry
2. Choose Flrst from the drop-down list.
ffi Settlfi§s f*r '3D !.*fidoú, 1 aAñyl

i-;:::
l{6 r*o .!i:.
i:iU 9::i5.1-=
Name: 3D«i
3D «ind6$- 1
Cclor: I
Af *ndo* ffi
Visual group
'd: Linkedt0 Y¡süal grüuF
Sssnd
Thnd
FGUrth
Activate 0ne w¡ndow and select an 0bJect in the lnput pane. lt

L
:-
l-
Click Cursor tracking to see the cursor position in all

wrndows.
1.,:lr.., l rlr -4x

, r, :
132. Se smic Interpretatl0n Preparati0¡ Petre Geophysics

When objects are posted in one window, they display in the other
lrnked wrndows. A change in the display of objects in the active
wrndow effects the other linked windows.
0bjects posted in multiple windows can have parameters specific to the

wrndow. For example, y0u can post well bores in a 3D wlndow using a
pipe and post the same well bores in a 2D window with a dashed line.
Petrel manages each object in each window independently.
Windows to Coordinate Groups Linking

You can link two 0r more 3D or lnterpretation windows with a camera
so thatwhen you 200m, pan, and squeeze the objects in one window,
the action is synchronized in the llnked windows. You can display
different objects in each window.
When you click the Camera icon, the names of all of the windows that
are linked together are updated.
Petre Geophysics Selsmic Interpretation Preparation o 133

lir:**"*:ri Procedure [inking Windows to Coordinate Groups
II
I -*i
'*:r:
-
1. ln the Windows pane,".a-gtivate the window to link.
2. Click Gamera linking tH (0ru or 0FF) in rhe menu bar.
3. Bepeat steps 1 and Z or other windows of the same type.
f
4. Activate one window and pan, zoom, and squeeze its seismic
content. 0bserve the other windows
-S¡ xli i@, {i,t§w

. -.-..LF*§*,,._.É.j:,r.;..
+lts a$!i4*
ir''e-e "¡.¿L?,:, q3,¿iif,
IL
-É¿* 5n$ IL -
$*
HL -ñiJ 4*, 94.1 JNL
"
- ,
*
)
L-l
_-J
-j
!¡
_]
Synchronized Camera Position for 3D Windows
To synchronize the camera position for several3D windows, y.u must
link the windows by using the camera linking tool. use
_l
this tool to
link two 0r more 3D windows together so that ány mov.m.nts
or
rotations are mirrored in all linked windows. you can display
objects in each window.
different -J
_l
l
LJ
134. Sersmic lf terpretatlof preparation

Petrel Geophystcs
E-J
{h
Procedure Synchronizing a Gamera Position for 3D
Windows
-
1. ln the toolbar click the Gamera Iinking tool .ffij Make sure
that the 3D window is active.
The text (Camera link) appears after the name of the 3D

window.
2. Actrvate the next 3D window and click Gamera linking.
The windows are now linked and any movement, such as
rotations, is reflected in both windows, simultaneously.
Petre Geophys cs Seismic l¡terpretatl0n Preparatl0f . 135

E--
L
Seismic Ghost Gurve
Use the ghost curve to create a small bitmap of reflectors 0n a seismic
line. You can move the ghost curve area to other parts 0fthe same
se¡smic line or other seismrc lines to compare signal patterns and
identify the same horizons across a fault.
When you create a ghost, it is stored inÍhe lnterpretation window

folder in the Windows pane. The seismic data and the ghost in the
lnterpretation window share the window display. L.
ÉL
i: lf you click the ghost in the lnterpretation window, the ghost is
L-.- can have as activated in the Windows pane. lf you click the seismic data displayed
-ito,
many ghosts as you wish, in the lnterpretation window, lnterpretation 1 under the
L
but it is recommended that

I nte rp retati o n wi n d ow f older is activated.
you periodica ly clean up the
ghosts.
ln practice, this means that you can have different settings for the ghost
L-
L-
and the seismic data in the lnterpretation window. For example, you
can display the ghost with wiggles 0r another attribute while displaying l-
L
the seismic data in a conventional mode.
From the Windows pane, you can toggle the ghost on or off, delete the
ghost, and access the settings. When the ghost is bold/activated, you L
can change the display options for it.
l-
L
l*
L
É
L
E
b-
F
L
136. Seismlc lnterpretation Preparati0n Petrei Geophysics
*-- .". ,. ill¡FF _*

*-
a-
r-.
I.
I-..-.-
Procedure
-
1. 0n the
Greating a Seismic Ghost" Curve
toolbar ctick Seismic Ghost f}
,-}
. ...:
r_-
I--<
r_-
1-
L--
2. Draw a rectangle over the seismic line
l3 I\love the mouse
L-
inside the ghost area jn the
-_- interpretatron window and

click with the right button
r.- The rmage inside the ghost is
I' updated with the seismic

beneath it.
f--_-
f-,__-
r-_-
f
L
a.
-
I--
--r
--,-¿
3. Drag the Ghost to the part of the line you wish to correlate.
L. 4. To stretch and squeeze, position the cursor on the edge, then

5.
click and drag.
To rotate, press Ctrl + Shift.
L.
-¿
II- .
L.
-1
-
Seismic lnterpretati0n Preparat cn . ú

lntersection Style Settings
r-Él: The lntersection subtab is similar for SEG-Y and ZGY data; however,
ii
i.-----lWorking with ZGY s0me settings are n0t act¡ve for both formats.
data in Petrel can enhance
visualization and These setting are avarlable on the Style tab, lntersection subtab in the
performance. . Settings dialog box for the seismic data.
. lnterpolation method: Displays the seismic section with
sub-sample appearance. Smooth is the default selection, but
y0u can display intersections without interpolation (to see l-
seismic sections wrth original sampling interval, blocky display,

or bilinear interpolation).
. Enhance intersection resolution: Active for SEG-Y data only. -
This option is purely an interpolation of the seismic data set.
There is no added data, but the result gives a smoother looktng
L
seismic display. Note that texture memory increases, on
low-end computers, this can slow down visualization.
. Enable zone and segment fllters for intersections: Works for >
seismic volumes that are attached to a 3D grid. This optton
allows you t0 use segment/zone filters on the intersection.
. Enable bump mapping: Gives an artificial display of the seismic
l-
L._
sections where light and shadows enhance the events so that

they appear as bumps on intersections. ]-
L
¡-
)-
>
E
L
]*
r
L-
L---
138. Seismic lfterpretatl0n Preparation Petrel Geoph, ,
I-
rf
---¡ S Setti*gs far'mig'
f
J-,-t {r Styl€
:,*'BÉsÉñEp'annotsüon
a--l Tl{
L- I S€tnngs ¡re in"eriEd ñom psrentlotder
--t
Visusli¿a!iün
iilers lqr tntéasEciifi ns
lfl EneblE k€ñsparen§)¡ for intÉrssition§
MBx rÉsolution §, Full , hladiunr

P erfo rm anc e
i.?-.1 Ftsst sssnó mpuemeht

DBeimBüoh whrle dregging
TimE tD wsitfor data
']JTI ' 50jl
Pefe Geoph\/sics
Selsmlc lnterpretation Preparation. 139
Settings Dialog Box for 3D Seismic Data in a 3D Window
3D seismic
These optrons are available in the settings dialog box for -d
data ln a 3D window.
_!-
o Enable transparency for lntersections: works in conlunctron
with the opacity curve found on the Colors tab Typically' the i-¿
crossover, 0r zero values, are made (partly) transparent'
.Maxresolution:Controlsthemaximumresolutionusedfor
display.lfmediumresolutionisselected,thehighresolution 5
seismicdatawillnotdisplay.WhenusedwiththePreJetchto
cacheopfion,amedtumsettrngmeansthatnolevelofdetail t-.-
atlevel0(highresolution)willdisplay.However,ifthevolume
is used to compute a new one, for example with the Seismic
al
calculatorortheVolumeattributedialogboxes,thenthe
full resolution is used.
=
. Enable compressed textures: Shows a slightly less
smooth
seismic display at the lntersection This option compresses

the Is
-
seismic data before lt is sent to the graphics card The
compressionisnotlosslessandshouldnotbeusedfordetalled L-'
many 2D
work. This optron is especially useful when displaylng
lineslnthe3Dwlndowbecausetheoptronreducesthetexture
memory usage. [-
¡ Decimate when dragging intersection: When
you move a
seismrc slice, decimates the selsmic slice based on the factor
that you select. A high decimation factor lets you browse ¡-

!.
through large volumes by looking at a less mem0ry intensive
level of detall.
. Fast scene movement: Maximizes the performance
when you l-
>
rotatethescenewhiledisplayingseismicdata-Thisoption
acttvates lhe Time to wait.fbr data conlrol'
. ¡_
Time to wait for data: Controls the time the seismic ->
intersectionisallowedtowaitfordatabeforemovlng0nt0a
new Position.
L.
L_
t*
f40 . Se smic lnterpretation Preparation
Petrel Gecp" .:
E
- -._----.-d
--
ra
l...ir-i SÉttíngs are rnhe.iled liom pBrentfoidei
,f^lone i r EilirÉar ,6 Smooth

' ErihÉoreiIiertecl¡4nrÉ5.rilriia]n
Verticat: f -i. .J Hori¿ontsl: li
V,su 3lizarion
Enabl¿ zdne :ind segn*¡i lritEr:1 i.r{ ¡.rl!:¡.:¿iiinr:f

Eneble !rump mappinE
BumF seEle
:t'. Fast scene movement

De.imatisn while draEging
Time to h'aitfor datá
i.i
0
Seismic nterpretaÍ 0n PreDarat 0n.141

Meta Data Tab and Geometry Tab
The Meta data tab contains the processing details of the seismic
survey in the project" You can specify the details manually.
The Geometry tab displays the geometry parameters of the survey. you
can assign geometry to the survey from another survey using the
Get
from Selected button. :
Refer to the Petrel Help for details on the these 0pti0ns.
ffi Settings far'mlg'

;-'-- --: :t.-:t
t::ta::: '-:
i* . ltvF- i&- t"rq l-* s¡clr+q. i
caro* :Ll
SEG.Y*lhns
;.,J 3e" iE
iE,
o_q,",**
operarffi
-Epuiryl'Ouot,ty'ur|o,to
L O99_r"u, tr.taOuta ,üp*iry I Q@trty€ilab'xs lercpfe-.,
e*pf* I
-l-r' i..i
--ilil
il Acquisition aate, ¡lliz¡:+sr-
j¡
*;;:-" ;FrY::l .
ji *ur"*ou, pl'.."- :- ii
ir
:
li srr"r.
Stack
a.trii"
t/pe Ful,
- .._.. . -.- - i
I q¡qte ldeoreesl I
[deg.ees]:
Azjmuth
I
i '-----.*-
Processins detaits il
-
Steps
I
Sra¡c corected
lr [!-l'11 I
', l. stu,
ll-
l:.Stdcked I
, ¡
i
D[.o corÉcred
,. l.| _,or,rr
.
NMo.otecied I ;
lr
il
l.li i sour
l: , 1\M( I l
il', L'' l*..

li too
] [.oo"i
,ll
11 li: qa,
ilil
lr
ii__.,_.*-
I
¡E-
I42. Seismic lnterpretation preparati0n

Petre Geophysics
É
L
L
L
I--r
l-¿
SEG-Y Settings
0n the SEG-Y sett¡ngs tab for a seismic object, there is a list of the
loading parameters as well as binary and ASCII (EBCDIC) headers for
L- the file. You cannot edit any 0fthe c0ntent on this tab, buty0u can see
the header of the seismic data that y0u are w0rking on.
f
-
¡i :*'
-, & se*B.r* ri*'
ir-. -,t'¡i, . iñ..-,!-¡:sl§.-
li&*.@§ asrl@'.&l§* .@gáft*
r0! rir!
hI.óB
!s 4a{
ic**ny i **r*uu* ip*u¡* .*a &r1 ft{is:rt§c

(!6 *flt
rsr
&ar6
rÉr*!-{ n@wr4Pr[5iE{t
f
^ {ü§ §*}L{ rr& fr511tn( rf
-, §l
€§h3ú§pM i
*i
4l
f
I- 1i
¡
Álgy $*r sqh&]e F*r i
Fd'é :
fru* i
k. há&i Fd*5
I . shp á¡.ry .¡§¿k
t_
É* Pdsñ e8t ñ!ñbt, u1
r.eñffidrd€turer §¡É{&#li¡b9{' l
3S 4*si il§rrk tude,
!blre{¡¿ó¡i,i€!i, . :li w¿: !si'r¡É 3!3re p:¡
ASp&§i I iódróa& r c:n ",",."-* clf¡le !§i§
ElLrprji!
r3l sr* st¿ *éri.¡r nilra::
x.ed&* Ydúabmd
f
I--d 8)épd¡§n Y ¿ndrl@ r
Yco#r4d r¡k !.{e,
i:
¡l
L--
t*-
I-
-=- Survey Manager
f
II- =
Use the Survey manager to sort and manage seism¡c data in Petrel.
You can controlthe parameters for 2D lines as well as 3D volumes,
including the number 0f traces, vintage, file path, and storage type, and
L
-É-1
sort and move data into folders.
§ suruey manager
L
l- -1
Mis-tb set 1 28 li i
You also can use the Survey manager to visualize data.
Petre Geophys cs '- ¡a C L.Ió próto :0, D opo d ¡ .1¡13

=
laE
§jL¡li s
tr
i Lryl Lal
trE@E
iH Fi i-rl Élld rin riEl G] l§: Ei :.; ftEi
tr
t_-__
I r_a.J tr tr trmEn
Show setting dialog for selected seismic
Search for Seismic rn the Survey M
Turn on / off the selected seismic in current window

Toggle visibility of the selected seismic in the current window
Delete the selected seismlc
Clear filter setting
Move selected seismic to another sub-folder

Real ize selected seismic
Vertically shift selected seismic

Set vintage on selected selsmlc
Set template (color table) selected seismic

I Scan or set mrn and max amplitude on selected seismic
Vertically crop and declmate traces of selected 2D Seismic

L
Settings for the Survey Manager
Sort by double-clicking on the column name. You can make the columns
wider or narrower by dragging the column boundaries. Click on the top
left corner of the spreadsheet t0 select the entire spreadsheet for
copying. L.
l-
t-
t-
144. Selsmic lnterpretatiof Preparation Petrel Geophvs r:
E
fl
f
I--r
Procedure Using the Survey Manager to Sort and
Manage Seismic Data
-
f .
I¿ 1 Right-click Seismic main folder and select Survey manager
2. Click the Select columns to display in Survey manager icon
to control the appearance of the spreadsheet.
J-,4
r_- 1
,§ id f"!lj§ iry;t i§,iil.trl$ iBii$l § iü i.&l i!{,1 i§l
Oo@ar fme lrmpbt
r_-
--
f
rrJ
f
---
I
---
1
II=- i2a
1
i2t
1zz
.Ii-' '*'--'----
"ita
r*;;:x"
"r*¡:a
ü
a
i?3 siiú
i¡¿ ;rA
j¿5
l:i
-_- a,2?
1
II-
L"
fI-a
1.
#
T
Í
'-,
r-- Gecphysics Sói L .lerflre"'¡' o"p"":or o145

3 Choose columns to display.
§l Colurn* sefe¿tian
Visible
Nam¿
I sumev &
j \linraae ..
§ub folder
Dsmain
TYPe
Template
I Direclion
, #l rnes
# Traces
# §amples i-t
Éample interual t::i
i Firsi §P
il
LasiSP I lt: .l
Fi.sl CDF
r,;-l
Last CDP
lt ".1 X min
lll l ,l
il-l xmax
il:' lYmin
,i , Yma
Z min
Zmx
Fúrmai
File size
StorasÉ
Min amplilude
l"ilax amplifude
§túraqe lype
F¡iÉ palh
Aüibute l-
1i 'lemplá'le lü¿k
0risinai CÉS
§eÍsric line idsntiÍer
üeümeEy line nañe
i GEüftetry linE idedilÉt
t
L
r¡.
L
-
t
146. Seismic Interpretation Preparatlon Petrel Geophysics
E
If--J
Procedure Searching for Seismic Data in the Survey ...t..
Manager
- lli¡".*-,§,ft
t -ff:j
1. Click Search tool for seismic in the Survey manager to 1..,:..'j
display the search engine.
2 Enter the complete name 0r a part of a name in the Find what ;*r -,
field. The search engine starts at the top of the Survey ,lL
manager and searches for files that match your search -- -i lhe search is valid
only for the items visualized
criteria. in the Survey manager.
Therefore, if you apply the
Use these options to narrow the search:
o Match case: Takes into account both upper- and lower_
folder filter, then only the
sersmic data within the
case letters and searches for files that match the case of visualized folder is included
in the search.
your search criteria.
o Match whole name. Searches for the full name of the file.
. Search up: Starts the search from the bottom of the
Survey manager and searches up.
o Find next: Highlights the next name in the Survey
manager I¡st that matches the search criteria.
o Select all: Selects all names in the Survey manager that
match the search criteria.
4. Click Close to close the dialog box.
Data Selection in the Survey Manager

You must select data in the survey manager before you can display it,
delete it, 0r move itto a folder. There are severalways to select áata
for these tasks
To select only one seismic data file, click on the corresponding
row/line in the Survey manager.
To select several seismic files simultaneously, select one line
and press Shift, then select another line. All seismic data
between the selections are highlighted.
To select specific files, select one line and press Ctrl, then
select another line. Both selections are highlighted.
To select all files, click on one of the header columns.
Pe,'el Geophysics
Seisrnrc lnterpretation Preparati0n . 147
I
-¿
:=¿
_/
-¿
Procedure Realizing Selected Seismic Data in the
Survey Manager
- _l
1. Select the seismic data t0 be realized in the Survey
-
managef .
¿
2. Clrck Realize seismic data :§ l ._1
3. Choose the preferred amplitude range and realization
quality in the dialog box that opens. Petrel realizes the -¿
.-¿
selection rnto a specified folder.
_-¿
Seismic Data Visualization using the Survey Manager -¿
You can select and vlsualize seismic data from the Survey
manager. The sortrng mechanlsms rn the Survey manager make it
¿
,,'-¿
easier to frnd the relative data and visualize it.
i {§"-l
. i.f{,:Turn on the selected seismic in the current
Click
window to visualize the selected seismic data in the
active window. Keep rn mlnd that vrsualizrng a large -1
number of 2D lrnes in the 3D window mrght stress the
graphics card.
Click Turn off the selected seismic in the current -a
window t0 remove the visualization of the selected
sersmic files in the active window.
':'-
* -1
Click .§. j Toggle visible
of the selected seismic in
the current window to lnvert the view for the selected
I
sersmic data.
Procedure Moving Seismic Data into Folders

-
and manage seismic data efficiently, you can create and
L
To organrze
move data into subfolders from the Survey manager.
1. 0pen the Survey manager. ¡,-
tJ You can create
2. Select seismic data an-d.9!_ick Move selected seismic to
iH,:
subfolders in the survey
folders by right-clicking on another sub-folder i--':l .i E-
the Surveyfolder and A new dialog box opens where you can select a folder to
selecting lnsert new
move the data into. lf no subfolder exists, y0u can create a
folder. You can drag
seismlc data from lnput new subfolder rn this dialog box.
Data into the folders. 3. If a subfolder already exists, click in the parent field for the
148. Seismrc nterpretation Preparation Peüel Geophts.!
fr¡*-'
1-
--¿
rr.___-J
selected line in the Surveyfolder t0 select the data io
move tnto a Predefined folder.
a- Procedure
-
Changing the Template for Multiple tit
*:¡1i
i¡i i:1 it:!
L- Entries in the Survey Manager iil¡ri : r ,r,-
---¿ All seismic objects in a prolect are attached to color templates that
you can change rn the Settings dialog box for each of the objects.
f
I*¿
When you attach multrple seismic objects to a new template, all
selected objects are updated.
1. Select the objects and drag them lnto the Survey
r_-
--¿ managef
iV*t
,
a-
-l-¿ 2.
3.
Click L9$i Set template (color table) on selected
seismic.
Select the appropriate template from the dialog box that
f
I---..
0pens.
4. Display the seismic data with the new colors.
f
--j Color Manipulation
f
f-r Most objects in Petrel are tied to a template. A template ts a
comm0n object consrsting of an icon and a color table. This sectl0n
focuses on color manipulation related mainly to seismlc data.
f
rL-
Color Palettes
The defautt color template used for selsmic data in Petrel is the
Sersmrc default template. Positive amplrtudes are displayed rn red
and negattve amplitudes are displayed in blue. By default, Petrel
Í estrmates the mlnimum and maximum amplitudes for the visualized
L se rsmic.
ft
You can modify the colors for the seismic object easily in the Colors
tab rn the Settings dialog box. You also can change the color
templates rn the Templates Pane.
t
I-
-.-¿
Peirel l:eophysics Seisrnlc nterpretat 0n Preparali0¡ ' 149
\J
_F.
¿¿
¡i¿
Procedure Greating a New Golor Template

1. Go to-the Templates pane and expand the Seismic color
fables f older.
J
_F¿
l
r ffi -.1
: ffi
1#'rp#y'f[-c.8n-es§.1-§- É{e--qj L.d
Serb*lri ca/É!¡b&/es
El n sÉrsr?rbfde&ir{J
El l:
Eü
He¿¡.¡*t¡e¡¡ae
¡Teun*aeo/;cr
,t'*,ite &/iie
y_-¿
El L:l §rúi+?i
I il #ádr,ffiiri'e ÉI{,re fiers/
I {:-l als¿,qsrrcl,l.1,i1ib
@[ eñase
jr¿
ffili'-i FÉase&snd
@ ü
El ü
@n o,¡'
@ |1 x*mr*n
Frsq{re/rcl.
t¡a,se¡redse¡sJ
v-,',¿
&l
E
@
il "4*sraeaa¡
!-J ,4¡rrlrac*r¡g¡
Ü §ü¡ÉcÉsültrb¿de
lr¿
im Geür¡rP.f¡bslfÉrrF/a¡,ss
ir
,M
rM
ffi {,-e*p*ysrbe/ternplates
Fe&oprlysrba/ter*Pla/es
Fáu/fprüFer¡yfFj?lP/ete§
Y
=-/
!M l/s/ür?e fe,.rrp/EtF§
!M Hre/i tro6te*rp/etEs LJ
,!
tM .3&/sgfÉrrp/sfes
I ffi &rbcreti* lrc#logrlenrgJafes
rffi Corapfe$ol:sttsrrP/ele-s
rM
.. &
Fraslufbr¡ÉFrrEnlsl§s
üricrerbprqPedYÉÉrñP/st§s
k
i, M ta¡r$i¡¿¡ol¡s¡iacÉ¡r+propedyfempy'afes
¡M []¡icrefafacrtnepreperfyfi-'rl¡P/'3ies
l--
)M {r-esrl?ecÁár?ie felqp/afss
l. M FetsrJelnrsysá*rnslbnip/als§
:, ffi ilpr¡S¡r¡¡sffseslprll*r¡¡plafps
¡! &
, fil
ürbrrerts o#erflelrrplafes
Safrrn¡s
F
t, il: $,fe//see*bnlP"mpdafes
i, ffi FepoÉternpy'atefrlder
E-
E-
r
Petre Geophysics
150. Sersmic Interpretati0n Preparati0n
L-
2. Copy and paste the Seismic (default) template. A new
template is added with the name Copy of Seismic (default).
Se¡s*zir xolartables
Errffi
§; Resrrt*e**re
@; Rean*i,raeá{acx-
El I*i "
,8.o,n wfiire blse
l; xe{*ttebtue{ta*s}
§ J #farf greyr,,vfitre
@; r*ase
f,j',,.'. '¡""¡*'"'¡
lÉl .-1 rregüeficy
§ i-; fsrarce{sersj
Eli: ¿¡,p
@ Jl Á¡lr¡?¿¡J¡r
@ fi ,4rerua*bn
& 11 ,4rrrracÉrllg
@ i: S¿¡rfeez a#r:buÉE
El !: q"jy siqsEryEi:{cf"y!{.
lmport and Export of Color Templates

To import color templates, right-click the Sersmic color tables
folder in the Templates pane and select lmport (on selection).
Export color templates in the same way as any object and select the
correct format.
Color lnterpolation Models

The continuous color table in Petrel has different settings for color
interpolation of the color scale. ln general, the HSV(Max)
interpolation setting gives a color scale with a maximum number of
colors. The HSV(Min) and BGB settings give two slightly different
color scales with a minimum number of colors between the
maximum and minimum colors that you select.
For more information, refer to the Petrel Help.
Seismic interpretat on Preparat 0n . 151

-_i-
Procedure Editing Color Palettes

i§o**G
1. From-the Templates pane, double-click -*
rc of Seismic (default)and g0 to lnfo tab in Settings dialog
the template Copy
_§
box to edit the palette name.
tt Settings for 'Copy of Seismic {def¿ult}' ar

-:-
¡-
2 Go to the Golors tab to edit the colors.

5
fL
a
J. Click ?§§ and drag it to change the balance of the palette
flf Semngs tcr'Btack Yeilcrs Red":'!¡,¡§¡,:.

¡-
^
I -<
L-
I
--¡.
I
Max I
-¡r-'-'r
LI]14]
ll
ffi
l''i( ¡---r
llr;li
I
t-
_¡.
a
§olor interpolaiion:
mi
ñl
tH)t
,* LE]I rz
HSv{Max}
i-: Hsvluin¡
f,::l i l-
_l-
L¿.¡I
,§l nce
Lnrphssrze
Lü]
lfi Hon linear gradient
i_ii
l"il ¡-
-L-
- '-ü" - Mi
ffil
:t: i
L-
_L-
l"li
LI-]i
ftl
:::jl
I
\,!--
Irlil
,{rr Irllil
¡¡in i{
E-
0paci§ 4
f{-,ieqsJ t{§§,...'...'.,'} l*l:le..'.,j t-

H
t-
t-
152 o Seismic Interpretation Preparation
Petrel Geophysics
L
r_---
Go to lnfo tab in the seismic cube Settings dialog box to
change the template.
r_-.
L'
r_-
L-
L
I--.
dJ Eleletiengener8l
I-_-
l-
¿j GEnetsltime
zI -Thickoss depth
Tvf :rúe vett¡cal thickñess
TsT -rre sttEttgrsphtc thEkness
r_- ¿l
df
rhrúknessltnle
lhrrkness ?en+rsl
. i:r:irlra aai;it liiit!
a_- lI Seisnric fCelsutri

tl Reawhitsniue
f
I. 3I Recwhrtebtack
§1 BrownwhitebluÉ
I¡ Red u¡hrle biu-. ltransl
Il Elsrk qÉy wh ie
§J Phase
f
L_...... :I PhEsÉ frr8rsl
J+ riequ§flfil
§[ Varisnce {seis}
ál up
¡I A¿iml¡rh
I__ ll AttEnL,§tlcn
L-
31 AntirsckinE
3l SuÍBrenttribut€
g
Jii.it i;al il;§t !!r¡!-;liÉ;
ñDJ ¡lessuÉC,iepth
I-
t_
Á Drst¡nce
f -1
f--,-- Color Tables

You can apply the color manipulation from the settings
seismic line to other lines. choose 0ne 0f three levels of
of a2D
L.
c0lor tables
--1 in the Colors tab.
o
f
Local: changes are appried 0nry t0 the specific seismic rine.
--,- . Survey and vintage: Changes are applied to all objects
that
belong to the assigned vintage and use the same template.
f.
aa-l Other objects that use the same template but are assigned
to other vintages are not affected.
Petrel Geophysics
Seismic lnterpretati0n Prefrarat ,l53
0n.
--1
-J
l,-J
. Global: Changes affect all objects that use the same

template regardless of the vintage.
Change Local and Vintage tables on the Colors tab; change the
Global table on the lnfo tab.
I-l
^
LJ
¡.¿
_l
¡-J
h* i* #!"r"r*t :l
L.
:J
t¿
:J
L.,.r
:l^l
Y-a
t--J
Golors Tabs
To specify the color settings for a specific object, toggle on the
Override global property template check box on the Colors tab
:J
t-r
forthe object. lfthis check box is toggled off, the settings are
inherited from the global property template. _^-l
¡¡.d
0n the Colors tab, you can modify the colors, the scale, and the ^J
opacity level curve. When you click Apply, the 0pacity tab and the
l
displayed windows are updated accordingly. l--J
The color interpolation methods are described in the Petrel Help.
l-.J
J
154. Se smic InterpreLat 0n Prepa,al 0n P..t*l G.".hr*
-l
1--d
-l
I--J
f-
r--J
E
-{3
7rF
F n
f :s 789;6
-r -,li ir;l¡-
-
6n&
§-
r
5S&-
f,
d0fr
E
I_- -L-J *-
3,rF
f
!r*J
f
--___r
f
-
|
f
Ir,__r
f
--J
Add/remove colors
Change color interpolation
I
method.
Update (min, max) values.
-----) Make discrete intervals.
Define opacity level curve
=
Se sm c lnterpretatt0n Preparati0f.'155
f
I
..
0pacity Tab
I
Any change that you make in the Opacity tab is immediately
:.J
applied in the displayed window and in the Golors tab. You do not
need to click Apply.
lL-
:J
:l-J
5.,¿
L.¿
^l
i¡--
L.-
-)
lr'J
-)
^l
t-a
t.¿
^-l
L-f
:-l
l-J
_l
k-+ry-..l lff[...--.] faqr,l'q',-l
:
Er
_l
t¿
_¿
156. Seismic lfterpretati0n Preparation Petrel Geophysics
F.r
I
i
L.
ff-.,..-
Lesson 5 Visualization Tools
-
r this lesson, you will learn about the visualization tools that you
can use to display seismic data in Petrel.
Volume Rendering
Volume rendering is a srmultaneous display of all data withrn the tiii
seismic volume. Making the volume partly opaque and partly :. ---..--i Volume renderinq is
rransparent allows you to identify hidden structural and depositional possible only for ZGY data
format cubes. This format
f eatures. Depending on the size of the seismic cube and the
allows you to render large
computer BAN/, it is a good idea to use a cropped volume forthrs data.
T TOCESS.
Select the Volume render check box to activate the volume

renderrng feature and toggle on the volume in the Input pane.
Ilte View aligned s/ices optton gives the best results wtth large
data, because of rssues with oraphics cards.
reire Geophys cs Seisrn c fterpretatr0n Preparat of .157

Procedure Using Volume Rendering
1. 0pen-a 3D window and select the realized 3D cube in the
fr¡,*-§i
if: §S ii;
i.,::,,irt:l,i
lnput pane.
!:f ffi . i mis {Realieed}

2. ln the cube Settings dialog box 0n the Golors or Opac¡ty
tab, draw the oPacitY curve.
Colrr i¡térpola¡Dñ:
a I Hsvih¡axl
.' HSv ir,finl
,§¡ RGÉ
i-t l
¡i N0n l¡near sradiÉilr
rJ l_s_l
H
la
tca
_l
lFl
r;I
l-/ I
m
,8
F. 1:I
r-:l
l:E i
iltl-'l
lLli
¡¡,;¡1'r#*'j aG*i ,-l
pr¿r 0't Preoarati0r Petrel Geophystr:

158. \e s-,1 ,..e p
t¡-
1-
----1 $ Setings 1*:'miq ñea1¡.fld1 t'
a-
-^---1
a-
-.--------¿
a"
-.-----{
r_-
-'----¿
r_-
-*-.¿
f
E--¡
-,-;
0n the Style tab, Volume visuallzatlon subtab, select

Volume render to drsplay amplitudes specified in the
opacity curve.
Petrel GeophVslcs Seismlc nterpretali0n Precaratio¡. 159

;
r.€ !nt+me*tien lffi Yalumevisualizeti+n

# ry,§§lsi i
it't Volume walls

:, I Nsrmal ;
(,lnsrdP
.'jd l Enable transpar*ncy for r*ralls
j#; Vclume rend*r
§' D"t align*d slices

;
i',, \¡iEw aligned slisÉs
Ii l,lunrber of slic*s for entir+ seismic rolume -1

1*¡ I Hide franre,iannütali*n in vierting mlde ^,-¿
:.¿
)
-l
--¿
]
>_J
F-
-l
t-.¿
]
]
Volume Wall 0ptions
0n the Volume visualization tab, y.u have these two .pti.ns
displaying the volume walls:
o
f,r I
!*_a
t-{
o
Normal. Displays the walls of the cube in a seismlc
lnside: Displays the walls with a view of the volume
box.
_l
I
from
the inside. t--a
You can use transparency f0r v0lume walls by toggling
on the
Enable transparency.for walls check box and editiñg the opacity
t_-l
ryry1ofl@jg!§j{ pa c ity ta bs
.I-l
160. Seismic lnterpretati0n preparati0n
Petrel Geophysirs
a Procedure
. - Displaying Votume Walls
a
',
Open the 3D window and toggle on the
realized ZGy cube
in the lnput pane.
a
--¿ X ffi i* mis {Beeti¡e.di
ln 3D Seismic Volume Settings dialog

box, on the Style
--l tab, Volume visualization subtab, toggle on
a'
Volume
walls and set the method to Normal or Inside
--¡
rr'-*¡
a- ffi Volume walls
§ l.,lormal
a"
-,---J
',.-i
l§
lns¡de
Eneble tmnspareneyfor xalls
rj
I---t I Ualume render
§ lrate *iigned s!i+e*
f
I.-.1 !i*lq ¡liüi¡*d *ijt*t
,-- I tluñl,*r r,t -§l¡:*-+ ftr r¡:iire s*ismic v*l¡;¡:l*

lfl Hidefnme.,,annntatinn in r¡iemno mode
E--¿
r_-
E
--¿
T
T
T
-é=
Seismic lnterpretatt0n preparation. i6l

.:J
Light Tool ^*.¿

Visualization of structural and stratigraphic information is one of the
key elements in an interpretation workflow. Visualizati0n allows you -ar]
¡-J
to identify 0nly what you are capable of distinguishing.
This is particularly true for geophysical interpretation that relles on :.J
illumination and reflectance. Seismic data can reveal such structural j
orientations by employing shaded relief techniques that can help to

enhance geologtc understanding.
J
i.--J
Shading or better illumination is controlled by lighting p0sition, the

illumination model, and the surface reflectance that acts as a
_l
¡-J
directional filter. Features that are illuminated perpendicular to the
light source vector will be enhanced, whereas features that are
parallel to it would be illuminated minimally.
_l
L..J
Noise removal using structurally oriented light sources creates a

_l
volume that can be interpreted more consistently because an
interpreter can focus on particular feature orientations while -l
t--J
suppressing the response found in displays that use only one
headlight.
The Lighttool has an easy-to-use dialog boxthat is available in 2D

and 3D windows and in lmmersion mode. lt allows you to add and
manipulate light sources to enhance geological features.
These light s0urces can have different colors and y0u can move
I
t---J
_t
l----
them by varying the elevations and the azimuth, which allows the
interpreter to illuminate and focus on particular structural or
stratigraphic elements of interest.
:l
-l
I*-
You can use the Light tool in many scenarios including:
. seismic amplitudes t-J
. volume attributes applied on seismic data
o
o
gridded surfaces
geobodies.
_t
i-¿
_l
b¿
J
F_J
152. Seismic lnterpretation Preparat on Petrei Geophvsics
-l
-J
a-
---¡
¿
---.¡
Petrel Geophysics
Seismic l¡terpretarr0n Preparatiof . 163
1
l
.-J
Applications of the Light Tool
You can insert directional lights into a 2D or 3D canvas wrth varable
:ll
colors. You can move these lrght sources byvarying the elevation as --¿
well as the azimuth. This frgure shows the main controls of the
Light tool.
Angle tra.k
{G3§0 degreesl
L-J
-l
-J
h,J
>-¿
Tcggle
burnp
oggle Add
¡rsht
Rergr'e
ltsftt
-l
¡E--
mapplng é r
¡.-
The diagram in the figure depicts the way the light sources are )
added into the display" Assume that the seismic intersection (the
subject that is exposed to rlluminatron) is at the center of a sphere =l
i--¿
and a light source is at p0int B which can be expressed ln either
Euclidran (x,y,z) or polar (ó,0) c00rdinates.
-l
t--J
l--{
-_l
l:t
l*J
l'--J
-l
=-.
164. qe smi. lr lprpretdl o1 Prepardl 0r Petrel Geophysics _t
-l
Procedure
- Using the light Tool
1. Click § Show lighuoot.
A floating dialog box opens in the 2D or 3D window.

2 Use these controls to change the lighting effects:
. Toggle Bump Mapping. Enables and disables bump
mapping on the 2D seismic data.
. Toggle Headlight: Enables and dlsables the headlight,
which is the initial lighting source 0n the seismic
image.
. Add/Hemove light source. Adds up to seven light
sources to the window.
. Collapse/Expand light tool: Minimizes rhe display of the
light tool by hiding sett¡ngs and displaying only the
angle and elevation tracks.
Petrel Geophysics
Seismic lnterpretation Preparatl0n . l65
*¿
-
--..l
Light Tool Examples +]
This figure illustrates the directional behavior of the two light

sources in vector form. The elevation and azlmuth are defined in
J
polar coordinates; the saturation and intensrty are editable after
l
adding the source to the window and are used to define the sources -)
in the scene. :-.,1
_-.]
_l
b..J
_j
>-¿
.EJ
--.,1
1
i---J
_l
t--.
--l
lt-J
-_l
i¡"--¿
_l
:
E-J
__l
166. Selsmic Interpretatlon Preparation Petre Geophysics

l
=-¡
-_l
Immersion Mode
lmmersion mode allows interpreters to experience the feeling of
rvorking virtually inside the data, delivering high visualquality in a
ful l-screen environment.
Using lmmersion mode, you can create 3D reconnaissance

workflows of seismic data. lnteractive tools for seismic
interpretation and attributes display in real{ime. You also can use
the Flyer tool to navigate through and understand the seismic
volume with functionalities customized for the interpreters.
Petre Geophysrcs Se smic Interpretation Preparation. 167

J
l
---
_l
bJ
_t
-l
l:l
:l
>¿
-l
lj I .--. :,i
Procedure Starting the lmmersion Mode
-l
f--l
I¡ ..§1
!:lli:ij
.':: -
1. Activate a 3D window and display a setsmic cube' ,¿
LI
2. ln the lnput pane, right-click on the seismic cube and )
I
select lmmersion. t-J

3. The flrst time that you access the lmmersion mode' you are ¡=
prompted t0 enter the lmmersron activation code' for
set 4
example, morpheus. Enter this code and' optionally'
E-
the SLB-PETREL-l MMEBSI 0 N-PASSWORD environment
variable 0n y0ur c0mputer. The activation dialog box will
n0t appear when thls variable is set to the correct code'
4. ln the active 3D window, display the seismic cube -E
elements(in-line,cross-line,tnterpretation)tobevisualized
in lmmersion mode.
5. Click Exit to end the lmmersion mode session'
=-
E
Petrel GeoPhYstcs
168. Seismic lnterpretation Preparati0n
g
al
r-{
al lmmersion Mode Available Tools
a
You can access these tools in lmmersion Mode.
---{
a:
H
E--{
-r
-¿
E
E
E
tr m
tr K
tr m
Adds a new seismic horizon
lnteractive change of template
Efficient navigation through the

volume
Interactive seismic attributes
list for the activated volume
Horizon Autotrack interpretation
in lmmersion mode
Petre Geophvsics Seismic lnterpretation Preparation. 169

r-É-o
<l
-
r¡-J
Exercises Visualizing Seismic Data
-
ln these exercises, you wiil get hands-on experience with using the
visualization tools discussed in this module. L.l
Exercise Workflow
. Manipulate colors f rom the Seismic interpretation toolbar.
F
1
. Manipulate selsmic lines in an lnterpretation window.
. Explore the settings of an Interpretation window.
. Modify the seismic data display (wiggle display). y-¿
. Set the display scale for the lnterpretation window
o Manipulate seismic lines in 2D and 3D windows. _-.r'
o Display a base map and annotations in 3D and 2D _¡.-¿
windows. ,
a Create random intersections. ¡--¿
a Create composite lines in 3D and lnterpretation windows. l
a Create a Jump tie section.
)
a Display multiple seismic views on the same screen. r-.ra
a Link Interpretation or 3D windows to coordinate gr0ups
(optiona l). ..]
a
a
a
a
a
Use a seismic ghost curve.
Modify the seismrc data display.
Use the Survey manager.
Edit and create color palettes.
lmport and export color palettes.
I
,-t
,,--.¿
-_l
a Bender a seismic volume. ¡--¿
a Display volume walls.
.]
r=J
Manipulating Golors from the Seismic lnterpretation
Toolbar
ln this exercise, you learn how to manipulate the seismic color
-]
display from the Seismic interpretation toolbar. You can complete
this exercise in either a 3D or an lnterpretation window. _..¡
1 . Display or activate a seismic line (in-line, cross-line, or 2D
H
line) in a 3D or lnterpretation window. Notice that the
interface has been updated with a qulck access to the
_J
Seismic interpretation toolbar. -J
2. 0pen or reopen the toolbar. Go to the View menu and
select Seismic interpretation toolbar.
_t
F-¡
170. Seismic lnterpretatlon Preparatl0n Petre Geophysics _t
!.
Move the handles on the color slider bar and see the effect
The color table is compressed
symmetrically
4. Right-click the color table. The opacity curve opens.
5. Modify the opacity curve in the same way as if you were
using the 0pacity tab in the Settings dralog box.
6. Click Reset color table to go back to the default settings.
7 . Change the color palette. Click the small arrow next to the
color palette name and select Black grey white and other
e d ro p-d own m e n u
q_ol gl...g-pll
a+-
9!J,h{gq.
J I Seismic (de'auh)
B. lnsert a new fault and horizon from the toolbar. They

a ppea r in fhe I nte r p retati o n f older.
9. Take few minutes to familiarize yourself with the other
functionalities of the Seismic interpretation toolbar.
Manipulating Seismic Lines in an lnterpretation

Window
Use the lnterpretation window in Petrel to display the seismic
section and interpret it. Although y0u can display and interpret the
seismic data in a 3D window, the lnterpretation window is mainly
where most of the horizon picking and fault interpretation work is
done.
The goal of this exercise is to famlliarize you with displaying and

manipulating seismic data in the lnterpretation window.
1. Use one of these methods t0 open an lnterpretation
window:
. Select New interpretation window under Window
in the main menu and select a seismic line to be
displayed in the window.
o Right-click on a seismic line and select Greate
interpretation window.
Seismlc lnterpretation Preparati0n. 171
ffi^%.ñ
Jt--
r S iil
@
mig fRealkedl
i-l
Hvtff,ffi
lntine S?2
1
-l
-..J
L.J
k Z=-1440 i_!, Sn.'rv seri"gs .
I
LJ
.
¡3. l"renl:+;:inqs...
§ lxporl,,. {:tri+§
gii Edit iocat crior taLrle, .
¡( üeie{e...
,
L.r
e !-1,,:lt1:::::
-)
B
E
#
Assrgn n'retcn c
CrEsig hlerpf EtatiD! wrnlqw

Crea¡e intersec:isn Biñtlo\s
acnuert in :D erternal SEGI
-l
L.J
Press Shift + Ctrl and left-click to z00m in on the seismic

line. Moving y0ur m0use in this position allows different
horizontal and vertical scales for seismic display.
Left-click to pan. Use the scr0ll bars 0n the right side and
IL.
--J
L-
0n the bottom of the window t0 200m, pan, and stretch/
L-
1l-a
squeeze the data.
Pan the data. Press and hold the white area 0f the scroll
bar in the Iower part 0r 0n the right side of your window.
Drag the window by right-clicking (cursor becomes a hand --L I
\\\\ i
sYmbol \ 1
).
-/
Zoom in on the seismic section. ,Yt
L
a. Click Magnify (Z) ia, on the process t00lbar t0 z00m

in on the seismic section. _-¿
b. Left-click and hold the left m0use button on the seismic t L.r
data and drag the mouse. The square indicates the
c.
area t0 z00m ¡n 0n.
Press Shift + Z to unzoom.
Fa
Use the mouse wheel t0 target z00m and unzoom. Hold the
I
mouse Over the area that you wish to zoom in or out and
scroll the wheel. The cursor positi0n is the center point
E-
when zooming.
Take a moment t0 try the other display icons: View all in E
v¡ewport & , f¡t viewport to width ffi , f¡t viewport
Á
to height ffi , and Pan viewport to c:,lt-el ffi
:
L-
B Traverse a line by using the player q
or the PgUp and PgDn keys. Select;"-19 - : as Plane step E-
increment.
172. Seismic lnterpretation Preparati0n Petrel Geophysics
E
E
To use PgUp and pgDn keys, the window
and the seismic
line must be active (bold).
9. Display a previoussection 0r move back and forth
between
the section and the data that y0u
are viewing by using
Redisplay previous intersection
or. Oirf try rr*,
intersection .ffi-ffi i in
the process actioÁs toolbar.
The location of any crossing lines,
incf uOing 20, 3D, and
any arbitrary Iines, are indicated
with a triJngle directly
above the seismic line_ The names
of tfre ciossing lines are
displayed above the triangle(s)
at the top ot1f.,. *¡nUo*.
slb6
l*line 632 lnline 651
IL 6üS 618 827 636 045
XL 47ü 470 654
4r0 47CI 47S 47ü
-1ilüü
Display an in-line in the tnterpretation

window.
Drag the triangle (representing
tne crossinl iine) to another
location.
12 Click the triangle to visualize the
crossing line.
Note that both the tnterpretation
windo"w and the lnput
pane, as well as any other
active windows, are updated
with the new lines.
13 Flip the disptayed line 180 degrees
b-y,clicking Atign
camera with plane/flip window
-E_ in the status bar.
Exploring the settings of the rnterpretation

window
1. ln the Windows pane, identify t'he active lnterpretation
window displayed in bold text. For
example, tnterpretation
window l.
2. Expand the active lnterpretation
window and the
subfolder I nterpretation l.
Petrel Geophysics
§g 5mi6 ¡r¡g¡p¡a¡¿,i6" r,*"o¡0, .173
L<
3. Toggle on different options. For example.

a. 0pen the Settings dralog box for Grid lines and go to -
the Style tab. L.J
b. Change the appearance of the lines. Use size 1 0 black
crosses and modify the other parameters. ¿
0bserve how the grid lines are displayed in the =!-
lnterpretation wi ndow.
,ultuxom
---'§-:;;;áÁ*, Lr
"ffiififfi
, ffi L* üÉltrFrtáisn I I
L..¡
§i i.-l .****¡c,q'*e*g
i§ itl §§d
i5 ¡ -j ¡dsbeñ '¡"ñ3 -¿
i&:-.: s*xer
:§:iiJ¡ r-: $e*e ur
, m ,,i{ }* **ndc* t prry} -<

:, § üj }Bur"d*.*r 1 [kryi L¡
Modifying the Seismic Data Display (Wiggle Display) ¿

L-a
You can alter the display of seismic data in various ways, depending L
on which display window y0u are using. ln this exerclse, you will
I
display the wiggle data in the lnterpretation window.
1. Use the active lnterpretation window with a seismic Iine -L
from mig [Realized] 1 activated and displayed"

2. 0pen the Settings dialog box for mig IRealized]
'1
and open
the tab.
@ Senrngs tor'mig lRealizedl 1
ir':'l. None ,§
l!a.l ñillnesr
Bilinear ,;',1
r.
-.: snrootl
snoüm uá
!;E lj
Brtmáp .-.'- 11
l:-, Show
Wiggles -- "
iil srow
!] Filtpositve
l-l Fill neqaiive
lnteryali
B-i Manual gain
Petre GeophVS¡cs
174. Seismic lnterpretation Preparation
3. For the Wiggles 0pti0n, toggle on Show and click Apply to
see the changes.
4. Change lnterval to 2 in the drop-down list.
5. Under Bitmap, toggle off Show and click Apply
6. Under Wiggles, toggle on Manual gain, enfer s de, and
click Apply.
1. Under Bitmap, toggle on Show.
B Under Wiggles, toggle off Show.
I Click Apply.
10 Cllck several times on .ffi in the Seismic interpretatlon
toolbar and observe that it alternates between displays in
the lnterpretation window.
1l Try the different interpolation meth0ds with and without
wiggles dlsplayed.
12. 0pen a 3D window.
1.)
tJ. Display an in-line and cross-line from the seismic volume
mig [Realized] 1.
14 0pen the Settings dialog box for the volume (lf lt has been
closed).
15 Observe that the Style tab has changed, accordrng to the
actrve window.
Setting a Display Scale for the lnterpretation Window

ln this exercise, y0u set up a display scale for the seismic section ln
the lnterpretation window. This is required mostly when you wish
to focus on particular geological features during interpretation and
have a uniform seismic display scale.
'1. Display a seismic line from mig [Realized] 1.
2. ln the Windows pane, expand the active lnterpretation
window.
3. Bight-click on lnterpretation 1 and select Show settings.
Petrel Geophysrcs Seismic nterpretation Preparati0n. 175

¡r-
4. 0n the Settings tab:

a. Select XY scale from the drop-down list or enter the
:lJ
L.
IL¿
scale value that you wish to display. Do the same for
Z-scale.
b. Toggle onlhe Fixed check box if you want to lock the
display setting. ln this case, all subsequent lines will L.
be displayed 0n your specified scale. Otherwise, the
scale will be changed when you zoom in and out on the - ¡¡-
seismic data manually.
§l Settings for'lnterpretit¡0n 1.
:l
:)L.
h-
CoordinaEs
fi x*in, li:¡l:l-..-_. t ¡ v*i", i':r*.ii- ., r

:l
:)h-
illxmar l¡i#rti.,. .l [1 v*o l*ri]ri -- i
Y
:-)
-l
L¿
Manipulating Seismic Lines in 2D and 3D Windows -l

LI
The goal of this exercise is to demonstrate how you can manipulate

and display seismic data in 2D and 3D windows.
v
1. Open a new window from the Window menu 0r act¡vate
one from the Windows pane. v.J
2.
3.
ln the
slb2,
lnput pane, toggle
and slb7.
Display the position of a 2D line:
on the check boxes for s/b1,
J
lr.J
, in front of it.
a.
b.
Expand slbl by clicking
Toggle off the Seismic 2D line check box.
¡ # i:
:J
LJ
§tb1
S ll Seismic 2D line
4.
c. Alternatively, toggle on lhe 2D /rnes folder.
Toggle on mig [Realized] 1 to display the outline of the
:l¡r-¡
176 o Seismic lnterpretatl0n Preparation .-¿
Petrel GeophVsics
Lr
se,srntc v0lume
a Click the outline to display the default in_line,
cr0ss_line,
and time slice for the 3D cube.
3.
I.._.-
--J
Display a random line by right-clicking mig
IBealized] 1 in
a:
ihe lnput pane and selecting New inlersection
plane.
Bepeat this step to insert multiple random
-.--l ,*"ffi,
'&
Iines.
lnl¡ne 632 fí :.s*.r.-rr:n¿,n:a,5cr:.rfa
a-
"
'§ *. Xline4TB $S lr,s*¡-i ¡.rs,:iin* i¡:*rser:irn
e
f, *, z='144ü .$ :nser:,,-*,i.*,r;;,".
---l
h ruauo i;rtemreiinn pian*,
a'-
---¡l I Click Manipulate plane , in the process t0olbar t0
a-
m.ve any in-lines, cr.ss_l¡nes, 0r rand.m lines to
7---t pos¡t¡on in the 3D window.
an.ther
B Toggle on an in-line (select it in the petrelexpl0rerso

the
I---...¡l name becomes bold), set the plane step increment
to 15,
I-_-
and use the player bar to move the active in_line.
&J*e*&*gt¡tr:l
f
¡
I Activate Manipulate plane
and the 3D window.
-- 10 Use the PgUp and pgDn keys to move the
active in_line.
Notice that the in-line numbering under mig
L..
[Realized] 1 in
the lnput pane changes.
-¡-r¡ 1 1. Activate the random line.
IL--¡ 12 Set the Plane step increment for the specified line. (For
!= 13.
example, enter B).
Use the player t0 move the random line.
E
r4 Activate Maniputate ptane
15. Click the random line in the 3D window to
drag it to
another location.
16. Press and hold Shift or Ctrland the left
m0use button to
rotate the random Iine in the 3D window. Helease
the
E
key
before repositioning the line again.
17. Use Manipulate plane to drag the time slice to
another location.
I
=
18. Display line
1 9.
of your cube.
or time annotations by selecting options
Style tab > Annotation subtab in the Settings
0pen a 2D window and repeat Step 2 to

the same process works in a 2D window.
Step
dialog box
B
in the
to see how
Í -elrel Geophysics
Se.. c "'",o,eta o, orapo.¿,o, o777
---¿/
74:
-
5
20. Toggle on the Timeslice (make the name bold in the lnput
pane) and use the player to move through the data.
Displaying Base Maps and Annotations in 3D Windows

Base maps are integral parts of any seismic interpretation project.
Effectrve base map display and annotatrons help y0u t0 efficrently
navigate the seismic data and effectively present your work.
ln this exercise, you will display and annotate the sersmic base
maps in 3D windows .<
1. 0pen a new 3D window from the Window menu. \¿
2. ln the Input pane, double-click the 2D lines folder to ,-.J
access the Settings dialog box.
3. 0n the Style tab > 2D line annotation subtab, make sure
lhe Basemap sQle and Z level check boxes are toggled Á
0n.
+
4. ln the Z levelfield, enter -
700 . 0 and click 0K.
5. ln the lnput pane, toggle on 2D lines to display the 2D -¿
lines in the active 3D window.
6. Display the outline of the 3D sersmic volume
mig IRealized] 1. ¿
1 . Check the depth of the 2D Iines compared to the 3D volume
F mig
4
Activate and deactivate the display of 2D lines in the 3D
window:
a. Activate Íhe Seismic interpretation process under 1
Geophysics in the Processes pane. !-
b. Click Select line to display in current or last 3D/

!nterpretation window:G from the Function toolbar <
and click one of the 2D seismic lines.
c. Click again to deactiva[e.
Double-click |he 3D seismic folder to access the Settings
__¿
dialog box. I
10. Go to the Style tab. Note that the 3D seismic annotation I
j I
d subtab is active.
rl
11 Change options to draw every 50 in-lrnes and annotate

_l
,l
¡
with the same interval of in-lines.
I
I Clrck Apply.
i
Display the time values in the 3D window:
*
178. Seismic nterpretati0n Preparatl0n Petrel Geophyslcs
-.]
-l
a-
E--{
a Double-click mig IRealized]1.
g
--l
b
C.
0n the Style tab > Annotation subtab, toggle on
Show and select f rom the annotate 0ptions.
Click Apply
a-
rr--J
Displaying Base Maps and Annotations in 2D Windows
ln this exercise, you willdisplay and annotate the seismic base
a- maps in 2D windows.
1 Open a new 2D window from the Window menu. The
a-
other windows are now in the background. you can access
-.-_J them again in the Window menu or in the Windows
pane.
a-
-.-.¿
2.
3.
Toggle on the check box in front of the 3D seismic volume
mig" The survey outline is displayed in the 2D window.
f
Toggle on Ihe 2D /rnesfolder. The 2D Iines are now
I-d
displayed in the 2D window.
4. Double-click fhe 2D linesfolder to open the Settings
f
T- dialog box.
5. 0n the Style tab, toggle 0N these check boxes:
. Show lines
f
I-- . Show names
. Show number (Type: CDp)
o Show tickmark (Size: 10).
f
--.á 6
.
Click 0K
lnput pane, select the wells to display
ff
1 From the in your 2D
window.
B. Double-click fhe Wellsfolder.
9. 0n the Style tab > Symbol subtab, change the annotation
d isp lay.
Greating Random !ntersections

The option to display seismic intersections along any generated
Í
f
polygon can be very usefulfor performing tasks such as making
tailor-made sections between wells. ln addition, you can displáy a
random line that is aligned to the in-line and cross-line directions. ln
this exercise, you will learn to use both options.
Ía--r Petrel Geophysics

Seismic lnterpretatlon Preparat 0n.
*r-
179
=€
_l
.a--¿
I
)
L,--¿
'l -i
1. Display an existrng time slice for mig [Realized] in a 3D
window or insert a new one. )
I
2. Expand the wlndow to use the full screen'

LJ
3. Clear any other seismlc llnes.

4. Make sure the Seisruic interpretatior process and mig _-/
IRealized] 1 volume are both active.
5. ln the process toolbar, click Greate arbitrary polyline -I
iniersection (C) 'J t-¿
-:-
6. Draw a polygon by left-clicking in the window to design the
path.
7 . Double-click t0 stop the polygon line. A seismic random +
lrne rs generatecj automatically and stored under fhe mig
[Realized] I folder.
=-a
-¿
.-*.¿
-¿
:=
4
-.-
I
-<
:Y
-:-
Petre GeophVsics
180. Se smic lnterpretat on Preparation
.t
a-
---ra
a-
r
--
, ffi ,*, n.nq fñ*iál,aÉdj 1
I_-J @ 'tr: lt*rre S**
r_- i:.&
§,il
.+i Xl-jñ* fc§
¡"-1gg¡
a-
I-J
B.
" h,.tt Crlcrd ir*erB*d¡iri t*b¡trar¡e§,*6Éi
# o, *A*.*yfdfeort
r_-
--¿
9.
Edit the random line. 0pen fhe General intersection
folder and display and toggle on Arbitrarv polygon.
a-
I__J ln the Processes pane under lJtilities, activate fhe Make/
edit polygons process. 13IVake sure Arbitrary
10. 0n the Function toolbat click Show points in the polyoon is activated (bold)
;
a-
L----¡t E while editing the polygon
polygons . Note that all of the points in the polygon
are displayed
L'
I---¿ 11. Click Polygon ed¡ting
,oE
:.§, fne cursor style changes
f
r,_.-.,i 12. Drag and re-draw the orientation of the Iine. The
intersectron is updated automatically.
13. Delete points by selecting them and clicking Delete ,* or
f
E* pressing the Delete key.
14. When you are satisfied, right-click Generalintersection
f
in the lnput pane and select Convert to 2D externat
I.á
SEGY. A new object is created and stored in another
S e i s m i c S u rvey f older (2D I i n e s f oldel.
r-
Ir-.i 15. Activate a (new) 3D window and toggle on the mig
IRealized] I folder and one in-line, cross-line, and random
T
line from this cube. The survey outline and the seismic
lines are displayed.
16. Activate Íhe Seismic interpretatior? process and mig
[Realized] l.
f
1--.-
17. CIick Create seismic aligned polyline intersection
(Shift+C):J tne Function toolbar.
¡n
f
18. Drawa polygon by left-clicking
--,- in the displaywindow. Click
once t0 change direction and double-click to stop the
polygon lrne. A seismic random line is generated
f
--,-¿
J-,Á
re:re
automatically and is stored under the mig IBealized] l
folder
Geophysics c. sr:, lr lprpr" ¿ ¡r Pr"p¿.ot O r o 181
l-.-rd
_l
¡--J
I
19. Display the seismic aligned polyline intersection that you
just created in a 3D window.
You are encouraged to perform this task in the 2D wrndow
-J
t--J
a lso.
_l
r--J
-i
)
t-¿
I
I
lr-.1
)
l--d
-j
-/
:]L..J
-)
t-J-
)
**
20. Edit the created line. 0pen fhe General intersection
folder and display and activate the Arbitrary polygon. +
Bepeating step B-10 to edit and modify the intersection
changes the rntersection t0 a polyline intersectron.
¿
Composite Lines _<

Composite lines are frequently used by seismic interpreters because
they help them to better understand sub-surface geology and aid in
interpretatron. Composite lines also can be considered as pathways
between drfferent seismic surveys.
Traditionally, it is important that your sersmic lines connect to each

other at some point to create a composite section. However, Petrel
now offers functionality t0 create a composite section for non-
intersecting 2D lines. These sections are referred lo as jump ties in
these exercises.
182. Seismic nterpretati0n Preparati0f Petrel Geophys cs
,1
=
rr
EE-J
Creating Composite Lines in 3D Windows
1. 0pen a new 3D window.
f
---¿
2. Activate Ihe Seismic interpretatior process.
3. Display a cross-line from mig lRealizedl 1 and all 2D lines
in your project"
L'
!r.--l 4. Position the seismic data so that you can differentiate
between the lrnes (select View from above in the
toolbar).
i
a-
-.--¿
qt$T*n"K
ll[] ri É.i -.,¡r., ¡;s:i,".r
::1ü
f
---¡
F,.
L!+l
G
E)
! É.!'-ir'a
v -!'
fr. ! É," -íi,*, :{ rr:'l

,"É9:
f
L _H
ñ_.
ilu l'É.1 1':-, ¡c':-
-.r .* "'=*, '.,*,
f
I-¿ 5. Click Select composite section (0)l* and left-click the
cross-lrne in the window. lts outline changes to whrte.
6. Move the cursor to a 2D line and observe that it turns
f
L_
partly white.
1. Move the cursor t0 the other side of the 2D line and
f
left-click to select it"
B. Continue to select parts 0f 2D lines for the composite
--- secti on.
f
I-- 9. After you select four to five 2D lines, repeatedly press the
Delete key to clear the sections.
10. Wrth Select composite section (0) still active, take ,*
L'
a--á
another path through the 2D lines.
1 1. When satisfied, double-click t0 generate the composite
r ntersecti on.
'12. Find Composite folder / in the lnput pane
and expand
Composite line 1. All sections of the selected composite
Í
f
are listed.
, G Itj C*nrposl&e ta§der
,isii-:ffi
---z 1
f
----z
---4
i"¡ +
i-4
tQ
&
ü,,¡
XLrne 47S [mig [Realiz*d] "il
Seismir 2D line [slb8]
¡y,: Seismic 2D line lslbSl
iyr Se¡snic 2D lin* [slbl]
l_-
É
Seismlc nterpretati0n Preparation. 183
!
t3
'l
Create a new composite. Make sure that mig IRealized] is
the actrve survey (bold text) because the composrte is
based on it.
:
=
14 ln a 3D window, display a trme slice from mig [Bealized] 1
together with a few 2D lines. lt might be easier to observe
your selectrons.
Itr
I .1. Click Draw arbitrary composite sections (W jk and
click anywhere on the trme slice. Move the cursor and
observe the white frame.
tb Click on the 3D volume time slice a few tlmes, then change
the selectron to Draw aligned composite sections
(Shift+W) i[L t0 construct your composite.
anO continue
0bserve the alignment to in-lines and cross-lines.
1l Finalize the composrte. Use Select composite section
(O) i&
to rnclude some 2D lines before double-clicking.
The new Composite line 2 appears under Composite
folder I in the lnput pane.
Creating Gomposite Lines in an lnterpretation Window

The approach to constructing composrte intersections in
lnterpretation windows is different from 2D and 3D windows and
uses a different set of rcons and shortcuts.
1. Open a new lnterpretation window and display a cross-
lrne from the lnput pane.
2. CIick Gompose with intersecting line (0)1ffi to
c0mp0se with any crossing 2D line. 0bserve that only
existing lines (such as 2D, in-lines, cross-lines, and random
lrnes) are selectable and appear as black lines across the
lnterpretation window.
3. ln the window, left-click where a black llne appears.
0ne side of the crossing line is selected and displayed. lt is
stored in lhe Composirefolder and named Composite line
3
4. ln the 3D window, controlwhich side of the line has been
selected. To compose with the opposite side of the line,
use other keyboard combinations while clicking the line.
The possible selection shortcuts are illustrated in
Step 5 through Step 7.
,l84. Selsmlc lnterpretation Preparati0r'r Petre Geoph\/slcs
f
----
f
-L-.{
c{
5
6
Click Compose with inline (l) *
Press Shift and left-click on an in-line p0sit¡on to include
L-
r.--l
1
one paft of the in-line.
Click Compose with crossline (Shift+l)iffi to extend the
composite intersection in combination with the other two
a.-
r--J
optrons. Because the selections are added instantly to the
composite line, a fourth rcon is added for editing compostte
L- lines created in the lnterpretation windows.

For any of these three options, Compose with
intersecting line (0):ffi , Compose with inline (l)rffi ,
L-
IfÉ.¡¡ or Gompose with crossline (Shift+l)1ffi, these shortcuts
determlne which part of the line ls selected.
F--r o
f
LeÍt-click: Compose to the right and use the
intersecting line away from you.
. Left-click + Ctrl: Compose to the left and use the
f
rL{ rntersecting line away from you.
¡ Left-click + Shift: Compose to the rrght and use the
intersecting line towards you.
f
--J B
. Left-clrck and Shift + Ctrl: Compose to the left and use
the intersecting line toward you.
Click Glip and extend composite (0)iffi and left-click
somewhere along your line. Any part of the composrte line
I-_-
--{
an I
to the right of where you click is removed and the line is
extended from that point on.
Press Shift + Ctrl and left-click somewhere further to the
r_-- left on your remaining composite lrne. Everything to the left
E
-d of that point is removed and no extension of the seismic
line is done.
When you use the Clip and extend composite (0) ffi
T,
---4
icon, these shortcuts determine how the clipping is done:
¡
r
Left-click: Clip the composed line to the right and
extend it from that point on.
Left-click + Ctrl: Clip the composed line to the left and
extend it from that point on.
Left click + Shift: Clip the composed line to the right
and end it at that point.
Left click + Shift + Ctrl: Clip the composed line to the
left and end rt at that point.
Seismic lnterpretatlon Preparati0n . 185

I
I
)
i-¿
Creating a JumP Tie Section
'}
Jumper tie lines allow you to display two or more non-intersecting
l--¿
2D seismic lines. This is usefulwhen carryrng out regionalseismrc
interpretation with old vintage 2D data.
1. 0pen a 2D window and display all objects inyour 2D
seismic /rnes folder.
2. 0n the-process toolbar, click Select composite section ¿
(0)i* ¡
3. Click on the first 2D line from which you want t0 start
'
making your iump tie composite section Notice that the L-r
Draw iumper composite section (Shift+O)i& icon
now is actlvated. -_¿

4. Click Draw iumper composite section (Shift+O)i&"
5.Clickonthesecondseismiclinethatyouwishtoincludein
your iumPer comPosite. ¿
6. Double-cllck to end your composition You can display the
jump composlte section rn the Interpretation or 3D
/
window and activate it from the Composite 1 folderinthe
lnput pane.
This procedure also allows you to draw a jump composite z
that contalns 2D lines that are not lntersectlng' You can,
however, also include Iines that are tred to each other at
some polnt in same sectlon, if that is required'
Displaying Multiple Seismic Views on the Same Screen

ln this exercise, you will visualize the same seismic llnes
simultaneously in 2D (base map),30, and lnterpretation windows'
1 . ln the Windows pane, check that the project has three
windows open in the background (one 3D wlndow, one
lnterpretation window, and one 2D window). lf it does
not, close 0r open windows by toggling them on or off '
2. Go to the Window menu and select Tile vertical to align
all three windows side-bY-side.
3. Go to the Windows pane and for each window, take these
stePs.
a. 0pen the Settings dialog box.
b. 0n the lnfo tab, toggle on fhe Linked to visual groLtp
check box.
Petrel Geophvs.:
186 o Selsmrc Interpretation Preparatl0n
c. From the drop-down list, select the same visual group
for all windows
§ S"ttlngs for'lnt€rFretation u¡indow f [WT] - mig ...
$ ri: S*tupryFl -- --l

E Name j,rterEreta¡ron wrqdo\i, 'l -,-'rl
:- -i l
Type lnterprststionwindow t*§l

li
Visual g.oup
--.:l
"-"--"--'-'t I
i
a-l)l _t
r' t rnKÉd tc uisual group Serc t.+-,i f-i
L-:tt -i :".
i
lr ffi
After allwindows are Iinked to the same visual group,

highlight the first window and togole on the Cursor
tracking check box. Hepeat this step for all windows.
From the lnput pane, select a cross-line from mig
IRealized] 1. The cross-line is displayed in all three
windows simultaneously.
Go to the Window menu and tile all windows vertically if
they are not already.
Align your cross-line in the 3D window so that you can see
the cross section.
Go to the ln_t-e-.rpretation window and click Select / pick
mode (P) ih
and drag the cursor over your seismic data. (§ Make sure the
0bserve that when you are dragging the cursor in the Cursor tracking check box
is selected for the three
Interpretation window, you can see it tracking in the 3D
windows in the Windows
and 2D windows simultaneously. pane.
Display only one window by closing or minimizing the other
two windows. To display them again, go to the Windows
pane or Window menu respectively.
Se smic Interpretation Preparatl0n. 187

l
r--¿
L-r
J
l-rr
L
Linking lnterpretation or 3D Windows to Coordinate
Groups 0ptional /
- L.r
é
lf more than one lnterpretation window is used, y0u can link them
together in a coordinate gr0up. Any rescaling or repositionlng in one
window is mirrored in the other windows. A similar linking of 3D -l
fd
windows also is available.
1. From the Window menu, open two lnterpretation 4
windows. st¡
2. Dlsplay an in-line in one window and a cross-line ln the
¿
other window. Lt
3. Actlvate both lnterpretation windows and cllck Camera
:§ -
linking ,lB in the toolbar for both of them. _-¿
4. Go to the Windows pane and expand the two Lj
5
lnterpretation wi ndows.
5. Open the Settings dialog box for lnterpretation I under -¿
both windows. ét-.
6. 0n the Settings tab, note that the information is updated'
.z
The same group is selected from the Linked to
coordinate group drop-down list for both windows' &LJ
ffi Settingsfor'lnterpretatiün 1'
-a
¡d
--L-
Linkedto coordinate group: ;;iÁh E
: Linkeo to v,sual group .. .- .1
ir
Scal e
5
XY-scale: i l: 258ü0 i,(.1
-r
5r
Right
Unit of
'.
margins: i;$
. FÉr¿enláge
=
lEr Pefel Geophysics

188 ¡ Selsmic Interpretatl0n Preparatiof
f
f
r
ln theWindows pane, make sure 0nly the two
---
lnterpretation wi ndows are se lected (displayed).
fI--¡ B
I
From the Window menu, select Tile vertical.
Activate one window and pan, zoom, stretch, and squeeze
the intersection. 0bserve the other wlndow.
L'
I-J 10. 0pen two different 3D windows.
1 . Display an in-line from the cropped and realized volume,
'1
a-
mig 1 [Realrzed] 1, in one window and a cross-line from the
E.--¿
origrnal imported volume, mig, in the other window.
12. ln the Windows pane, make sure only these two windows
L'
are selected (displayed).
13. From the Window menu select Tile vertical.
---l 14 Activate both windows by clicking Camera linking ffi in
a-
,--_) the toolbar for both wlndow.
15. Pan or zoom in on one 3D window. 0bserve the effect in
the other window.
l_-
---¡¡
Seismic lfterpretat 0n Preparat 0n.189

iL--
:l-J
tb¿
:l
Using a Seismic Ghost Curve
To aid the interpreter in picking the right seismic event across the
t.--
fault block, use a seismic ghost curve to drag a picture of the
seismic data from one side of the fault to the other.
1.
2.
3.
4.
ln an lnterpretation window, identify an area that you
want to correlate across a fault block.
Click on lnsert seismic ghost {*..
Drag a rectangle over the zone of interest.
PIace the mouse pointer inside the seismic ghost area and
I-l
¡-.-
\--{
I-_l
move it to the desired Position. tL.J
5. ldentify the correspondtng events.
6. Display the interpretation inside the ghost by clicking the
horizon interpretations from the lnput pane (while the L-.-
ghost is active).
.
-l
1 Left-click the seismic line outslde of the ghost area.
B. Observe that the frame of the ghost turns black (ls
L--
inactive).
9. Use the scrollwheelt0 z00m out 0n the seismic line.
,.-a
10. 0bserve how the seismic ghost follows the zooming.
11. CIrck lnside the seismlc ghost and the frame turns blue (is
^-l
active).
12. Update the ghost to lts current position by right-clicking
inside the active ghost curve frame.
-t
13. Stretch and squeeze the ghost curve. L-¿
a. Position the cursor on the blue frame.
b.
The frame appears as a double arrow.
-l
:l
Click and drag or push the ghost to the desrred shape. -.J
14. Rotate the ghost curve by pressing Ctrl + Shift while
clicking inslde the ghost area.
The cursor changes to a rotation symbol.
15. Remove the sersmic ghost
a. ln the Windows pane, find and expand the active
lnterpretation wi ndow.
-l
b. Right-click and delete Ghost l. :_l
:]
:
Petrel Geophysics I
190. Seismic lnterpretation Preparatlon
I_-
a"
---J
Modifying the Seismic Data Display
' , - :an alter the display of seismic data ln different ways,
f=
----¡
:=:.icrng on which display window ls used.
'
2
0pen a new 3D window.
f
Display an in-line and cross-llne from the selsmic volume
mig IBealized] 1.
lume.
r----J ------ ----M'
€ seüingirür'mi-o!*"u,,"*oi-
. =,''- S,"'". ,,*,,,nr;J Co¡s tl ouratcre-*.t,y:*""**-l
''r- - o
.a'Easemap'anndtatiún
L--j Seü¡q:
-tl¿ e rrhelrti.l from FarenlfoldÉr
;¿ int*-'.i,.n .A_-,rrrr;:i.*fl.q,*- iry,,¡¡Áiuri** I .i

lnlerpalati§f l
, tl",to¿ .'Nqne ]rBrlrnes' €Sr¡úalh .i
Ér¡i:tie irii.r!Éiii.f i¿:+irl!ti.,r' jj i I
: 1.¡emc¡i . - Hon¿onltsl. :r -l ']
Vlsu3lizalion
,i
: i
i
i ' f¡ji!:. ¡lrr¿ air.j !i'{¡t..tJili!:: i(r ilii.rrr.rtini5
, ¡a.¡,a orr¡ .;
"'r"o,
Bu"ro ,c¿ e
i il:EnablElanspsrencyforLnt€rs¿cli.ns
] l!,laxresolLli¡n :&i' Fu¡l '-., l,ledr¡m :. Lau
l. i '::'l1l::-.--..--.,
lJlFa§ls(eneñoremenl
I ii
i
rl
Ji,I
I
L¡cLm¡¡o¡nhLPd,q6o,n0 1 - iii
Trn =lrir¡i,úr r¿ld :
r 'c3
i*iaool
.'i
I| i;;;;il- i i;¡-
:_-:-: :, l"x c"n""r I l
lr---,_-_-_,_
4. Change the lnterpolation method from Smooth to None and
observe the effect.
5. Set it back to Smooth and click Apply
6 Click Enttble btrmp mapping.
7. 0bserve the effect by rotating the selsmic data in 3D.
B. Click to clear the rotation
I Set IVax resoluti0n to Low and observe the effect.
'10. Change it back to Full
1 1Set fhe Decimation while dragging optlon t0 4.
Petre Geoph\/s cs Seismlc nterpretation Preparation . 191
a
¡--
¡<a
L.
12. Click Manipulate plane (MlS and observe the behavior -.
when you drag an rntersection from the realized volume. <
L..
Using the Survey Manager <
The Survey manager is a useful tool for sorting and managing L-.
seismic data in Petrel. You can use the Survey manager to control
parameters such as CDB SB Trace number, and line name. You also
L-
¡"
can use it to search and sort data, move data into folders, and
visualize data in display windows.
-<
1 . Bight-click the 2D /rnes folder and select Survey E
manager. --
2. View the active 2D window while selecting or clearing any
of the check boxes in fhe Eye S column. This column ¡.L-
turns the line display on and off.
3. Click the left mouse button and drag the mouse potnter L-
1
over several rows in the numbered column to select the
lines. -¿
b-
¡-
oo{*tñ fÍ}ú t*.¡*¡tÉ tW¡!á 6.ig!§l c*§
lL
¡-
¡b
1
¡h
1
Click Turn on the selected seismic in the current

th
window @ to view the lines. ¡¡-
Click Turn off the selected seismic in the current
window rffi. to hide the lines. \

Sort the lines by double-clicking the seismic column Name -
Double-click again to reverse the sorting.
¡h
l Click the Ieft mouse button and drag the mouse pointer
over the number of several rows t0 select them.
Click Move selected seismic to another
sub-folder & .
I
192. Seismic lnterpretati0n Preparati0n Petrel Geophysics
I ¡-
-
_I._
I-_=-J
L" Inthe Move selected items to folder dialog box, use the
default Create new folder and click 0K.
I"
I-_-J $ Mcve seiected ¡tems to fülder
] Select fotdsr to move th+ items tú
L-
I._-J
a-
I-_.J
10 Enter an appr0priate name for the new folder or use the
a-
I--J
[l
default name
tnt", new {older nanre
I-
Enter name of newiolder
--:)
f ----J
f
Ir._=_¡ 11 Find the new folder under the 2D linesfolder in the lnput
pane
12 ln the Survey manager, click Search for seismic in the
t_-
survey manager . The search engine opens.
-_J
13 Enter part of a line name, for example sf b2, and click
Find next.
T
É§ Find ¡iems iil rabte
l-¡nd what slD4
:-.-r Match case
i - i Matcir whole name

=
f' ; Searcir up
i rmd ne{ i
lf none of the check boxes in the Find items in table

dialog box is selected, the search engine will search for the
=
words containing the characters that you entered in the
Find what field. The search starts from the top of the
= Survey manager.
The Survey manager works for the survey folder from
Petre Geophysics
= Selsmic lnterpretati0f Preparatl0n . 193
---/
=
--
1
.t-
<
Li
which itwas started. To easily manage allof the 2D lines in
-
a project, keep all surveys at the r00t level and start the
<
Survey manager f rom the Seismic main folder. Sort the L,.
different surveys into subfolders at several Ievels if needed.
14. Multi-2D lines can be realized f rom the Survey manager.
Select the lines of interest and click Realize selected f-..
seismic ,,&,.
Lr
Editing and Greating Color Palettes -
The industry standard color palettes are included in the Templates <
L.
pane. The default colortemplate used for selsmic data ln Petrel is
-
red (positive amplitudes), light gray (zerolcrossover amplitudes) and
1
blue (negative amplitudes). You can change or edit the color
t
L-
template for seismic data easily and create new templates.
1. ln the Templates pane, expand the Seismic color tables -<
L.r
folder. D
2. Select the Seismic (default) palette, copy (Ctrl + C) and
./
3.
paste (Ctrl + V) to make an identlcal copy.
0pen the Settings dialog box for Copy of Seismic (default).
v
¡-
4. 0n the lnfo tab, change the name to My training ¿
template f-
f:l ^
5. I
0n the Golors tab, click [' I to reverse the color table.
6. Click on the middle color handle (gray) and change it to L-
white. ¡-
\-
¡-
L
--
¿r-
tL-
r¡
194. Sersmic lnterpretati0n Preparation Petrel Geophvsics
¡--
E Setting: for '{opy of Seismic (default}'
;-j-'rj-l$jÜl: il;;
U
1
a-
r.--J 1'1_1
l[]--i{
[¡1ax
r--t
iirj
;-l-r
I 1-l
r;'
I_" Cülar intarpolalión:
,', H§VihJári
, : HSViMini
'_-a,l
T=1
t¿l
a-
I.-J
i]]
,..9r RcB
Fri,ñL;dr!É
Non linear gradíent
il
iü
-:. I
ii,i
ru]
r_-
[ ]1.f
-.__J
m
f
r--J T---'
LT.]
i-rj
r--J
L-
,'^.1
:tdj
-+t
,...:)
i--,*j
rLiJ
Min
---J
I----
f
-,--l
.
f
1 Click and drag the other handles into new positions.
-,---) B. lnsert new handles by clicking between the two color
T
handles. Change colors.
9. When you are satisfied with the new color template, click
tf
0K.
1 0. ln the lnput pane, t0 0pen the Settings dialog box for
mig"
11 0n the lnfo tab, use lhe kruplate drop-down list to attach
the My training template color template.
*1
12. Click Apply and observe the seismic data in a 3D window.
13 0n the Colors tab, toggle on fhe Override global
Proqer\') temPlate check box.
Ía-, Seismic lnterpretat 0n Preparat on. 195
J.
J
14 Click Use automatic min and max in the color table
r-#.1
f-J
L-
htS. Minimum and maximum are now given as changeable
L.-
15
amplitude values.
Click and drag the handles before applying the change. :l

L.-
:l--l
0bserve the result in a 3D window.
16. 0n the lnfo tab, change back to the Seismic (default)
template and click Apply.
L.-
lmporting and Exporting Color Palettes
1. L.
:l
Go to the Templates pane and find the Seismic color
tablesfolder.
2. Right-click that folder and select lmport (on selection).
L-
3. ln the lmport file dialog box, select File of type (.alut)and
open the color table named
in fhe ata
D im p o rt/C o Io rn
Seismic-Course.alutlocated
a p s/ f older .
:l
L,-
4
5
o.
1.
CIick 0pen.
Click 0K in the lmport file dialog box.
Use the imported color palette when displaying an in-line.
0n the Templates pane, under the Seismic color tables
:l'l
V
folder right-click Seismic (default) and select Export.
L.-
:l^l
o
() ln the Export as dialog box, save the exported file to the
Sfudenf folder and name it My nxported Color-
Palette. L.¿
¡:¿
-_l
-l
tif
,I."
_l
¿
:t
r-J
--.]
Petre Geophysics
196. Seismic Interpretali0n Preparati0n
I
t.a
r-_{
a: Rendering a Seismic Volume
By rendering a seismic volume, making it partly opaque (high
a-
rI.-J amplitude) and partly transparent (crossover amplitudes), y0u can
identify hidden structural or depositional features during your
a:
Lnterpretation. You can render only realized volumes.
---{ 1 . Display the survey outline of realized seismic volume mig 1

IRealized] 1 in a 3D Window (toggle on in the lnput pane).
a-
---¿f
2.
3.
Open the Settings dialog box for this volume.
0n the Style tab > Volume visualization subtab, toggle
on Volume render (toggle off Volume walls if enabled).
Click Apply and observe the effect in the 3D window.
S se$ings for'miq [Realizedj 1'
Setings are inherited fr6m psrentfoider
vo¡umevisslüst¡sn
_t* |"}:§§!§_{ffi #*lf'§Ll§t..i
.; Volume watls
t;,;,tJrr*al
¡os¡,ie
'.1
I Eilüb¡e ir¡rlipatiilsy fo. *Éll§
:y'. Volunre reader
t- : Iiata aligñed slices
,§ Viewaligoed slices
ll ; Number of slicestorenüre seisnric volunre
,' Hide frame/annoi,etion in yiewins mode
Seismic interpretat 0n Preparation . 197

-_l
5. 0n the Colors tab:
:_l
¡r.-a
a. Toggle on Override global properlt template.

b. Adjust the 0pacity curve. ¡!-/
El
c. Click somewhere on the curve to insert a new point. I
d.
I
Adjust the position and insert more points f0r

adjustment (see the figure).
fh-¡
e. Click Apply. 0ften, the purpose for changing colors is l
to make cr0ssover values (grayish colors with low

¿ I
¡L-J
negative and posrtive amplitude values) transparent. ts
fh¡
E
¡H
E¡-
f-
--1
3
l=-
L.
198 o Seismic lnterpretat on Preparation Petre Geophysics

I-
-__-__-{
r--=J
a'' 6
a
0n the 0pacity tab.
Set Full opacity tFl by cticking lm
a"
I._J b. Select the histogram and drag it onto the 0pacity tab
to set the opacity level (as shown in the figure in Step 6
a"
r-___.J of the next exercise).
0bserve that the changes take place interactively in the 3D
window.
a"
I-_-j $ settinqs
,e¡¡?l;ii
rt{ l
100iÁ:
- --üse,r "'
L"i-r iar*ü:-T
o
o. 0n the Style tab, toggle off Volume render.
I 0n the 0pacity tab, ser Fuil opacity tFl by clicking l.§l
10 Click 0K to accept the changes.
Selsmlc lnterpretati0n Preparation . ,l99

J
f
L--¡
Displaying Volume Walls
You can display the limits of a seismic v0lume as walls. :l
lE-¡
1.
2.
3.
Toggle on mig [Realized] 1 to display the wire frame of the
VOIUMC.
Right-click mig [Realized] 1 and select Settings.
0n the Style tab > Volume visualization subtab, toggle
:l
f.--¿
_t
-l
on Volume walls and Normal-
4. Click Apply to see the effect in a 3D window.
L--¿
5. Try the Inside optlon and click Apply to see the changes'
6. Toggle off Volume walls and apply the change.
\--a
-_l
-l
5--a
L..J
lLl
I
)
l-¿
L-
¿
L-.r
L
=
Petrel Geophysics
200. Seismic lnterpretati0n Preparati0n
=
I- Review 0uestions
l_-'
---J
I-
o What is the difference between a polyline intersection and
l_'
a composite intersection?
ls it possible to rotate a random line in an lnterpretation
window?
l_'
--
I--
You want to edit an arbitrary polygon to redefine your
arbitrary polyline intersection. You have selected the
Make/edit polygon,s process, but it is not working. What
L-
!r--
could be the reason?
You want to render your seismic volume. From the
Settings dialog box of your 3D cube, you g0 to Volume
l_- visualization, but it is grayed out. ls it because you do not

have a Petrel license for Volume Rendering or you have
U
,L--
a
missed a step?
Can you display wiggle traces in a 3D window?
U
a How can you display time value in a 3D window for 3D
seismic data?
----
f
--
Summary
.
L'
E-- using the seismic interface and toolbar
. displaying 2D and 3D seismic data
¡ setting up a seismic display scale
U
o making and annotating seismic base maps
-,-- o making and displaying composrte and jump tie lines
u
. using and linking multiple windows
J-.-
. using color template and palette optimization
. using the Survey manager
T
. using the visualization tools
. rendering volumes in 3D windows
.
u
using the Light tool
1-4' . using the lmmersion mode.
T Petrel Geophysics Selsmic lnterpretati0¡ Preparatiof . 201
_._r -
=
f'
r
r-{
a-
Module 3
lnterpretation
Fault
-
a
a-
-l
r-{ Tnis module introduces you to the fault interpretation workflow and
:echniques in Petrel.
a-
I-_¿t
Learning objectives
Ater completing this module, you will know how to.
a-
---_J
o
.
.
interpret faults in Petrel
use the fault interpretation function bar and fault settings
f-..1 .
o
manually pick faults
manipulate and edlt faults
track faults.
L'
-E-I
r.-
-.-
t
f
ff--l
c{
J_-
f
i--I
f
---4
r----"r
!=
f Fault lnterpretation . 203
I---|
Jl'.¿
Lesson I Fault lnterpretation in Petrel
I-l
L-.a
-
ln this lesson, y0u will learn how to the Function t00lbar
use
lnterpretation manager to interpret faults in Petrel'

and the
"J
L--a
É, =É & ft-{
f'l -_l
-l
:' §iraiasraphy .d
l¡.-J
' Geophysics
§'
Hffi r§
t,
aF
¡lL..J
}6 I
Function Toolbar i;
-Ln ,l
Use the Function toolbar to perform these tasks: N»
t .-¿
. cut, loin, and add points t0 a segment rx, _l
. move, add, or delete individual p0¡nts L-r
. move or delete entire segments
',1s.{
I i{
, J§:
-Ll
. cOpy 0r move segments from one fault to another
i *L.
t§? )
. copy 0r move segments to new faults '[i lr*'/
L
. edit faults in 3D or lnterpretation windows' .r¡,
ist§i e -¿
]-J
g
,§. _l-
_.;§
§,
:
:'#,
s.! i& l-
eY
a
§
& §t
tr
il* t-
l"ür
'.l}
.b- §{ tr
1 lnterpret faults IF] 5 Activate fault [Shift+S]
i-
2 Join selected Points Ul 6 Selection paintbrush [Shrft B]
3 Cut segments [T] 7 Bounding box select [B]
4 Select single Point I Eraser [X]
204. Fault lnterpretation

Petre Geopr
r
f
I-=-J
I nterpretation Manager
-^= lnterpretation manager is an interactive tool that gives you
fault interpretations lt
f
and
G-T -:. l's IO arrange anO nariOte your seismtc
interpreters' and all other
, -,rr, Íor prolect administrators' seismic
to fllter and sort
Petrel users lt includes several options
and off
f
I--J -.:'pretations, create new objects' and turn interpretations on
-a r,lsible windows.
and
--e lnterpretation manager is useful particularly for arranging
f
-=-{f -araging y0ur lnterpretatián (horizons/faults)
a cetatled interpretation proiect'
when you are working on
f
I.-J allow you to perform these
're tools in the lnterpretation manager
-a s ks:
o tn current or all visrble
f
-==-.ü .
select and clear interpretation objects
windows
show the Sett¡ngs dialog box for
selected interpretatlons
f o in the active
insert new seismic horizons or faults
lnterPretation folder
--*J lnterpretation manager
. search for hortzons or faults rn the
f
-_*¿
. move interpretation objects t0 another
lnterpretation folder'
f
--_.¿
r---a
Fault l¡terl:]retat of ' 205

J'r--,
-l
liir;iiil
!: .-"
E} §il
r:t:
liii:¡q+¡§*
Procedure
1. - 0pening
the lnterpretation Manager
Bight-cllck fhe lnterpretationfolder and select
lnterpretation manager.
-l
L--J
t¡-¿
,ffi;:ffi -_t
¡¿ Shot" se::ings ,. .
I@ 5pnr1 all ;o Srurli* t--J

I iii]
I ffil
*,eiri*r'e á¡l ir*rYr §tud¡o
§ubse ¡';*e .l
L--.¿
, i$ trrpatt i*i, sei*ciicrr¡ . ,
^_J
l=B t¡lpcr:,,, irrl +ü
iX ilr*let*..,
a
L.-J
Í
t$ fftt
ilÉleie r*ntÉnt, , .
-_J
:.,::tiff : ' :
Lc¡láp5É i.i:Éurrr?ÉJ ¡¡-J

a.
; -
tiip,SITd r.recLrrSl'iei -_l
ál S"rrt i:y nar-.*rer
Ser-: bY Z-ualr.r*r ¡E-a
§' Autc c*lcr all --]
& ÁLiic rame ali
ffi Fauh iiar¡Ev.r*rk e¡hile interprcting Ll
f-i
* f *r1"*rt i* in;Érpr*'iá:it!'i
fi Ccnoert tc interpreia:ion i*ptir1riz*d
T ln:erpr*rarion manager , .
ft ínsert seisrric lreri¿ún
,
i*r ?ül
h v )
S. insen far;lt
f insert in1*rpr'*:atien f*irler F
^-
206. Fault Inlerpretation Petrel Geophyslcs

I
I__-
-
Fault Interpretat¡on in Petrel
I-_-
-.-4 'rterpreting faults is 0ne 0f the key tasks rn any seismic interpretation
a-
E---I ,',orkflow. ln your routine workflow, faults and horizons are picked and W Visually grouping t
:rte rpreted simultaneously. For learning purposes, you will learn how to lnterpretation and 3D
irterpretfaults in Petrelfirstand in the next module, you windows together is helpl
r-{ will
f
learn
'row to interpret horizons. in fault rnterpretation.
n this training, the focus is on manualfault interpretation. Petret
a-
----¡t
rffers powerful automatic fault extraction using seismlc attributes.
Automatic fault extraction is discussed inlhe PetrelGeophysics:
retati o n Wo r kf I ow Iools
a.
S e i s m i c I nte rp cou rse.
---.1
Manual Fault Picking
I_-
---r
When the Seismic interpretation process is actlve, you can
interpret faults manually on in-lines, cross-lines, tlme slices, random
I'
Irr.-J ines, or arbitrary lines in 3D and lnterpretation windows.
E
L'
---.
f
---.
E
t--l
Fau t nterpretat 0n.207

LJ
Faults Manually
Procedure
1
- Picking
. Activate Seismlc interpretation ln the Processes pane.
2. Display the selsmic section in the lnterpretation window or a
3D wrndow.
3. Bight-click lnterpretation folder / and select lnsert fault.
Alternatively, insert a new fault from the Seismic
interpretation tool bar.
The new fault displays in the same folder and is stored in the
aclive lnterpretation folder in the lnput pane.
-i&G* *
Añ).
r&&#,m.§rr
iii::a:.i:il:!iiri:lrllt:i.,i¡irii'
},'iÁii¡!düss 1{Ar1}}:
,L§
srlo::r.:*,1¡n9:.t:: . _
& ';,-l Seismic hori¿ün

.tr
m
ffi 5eñd ali te Srudic
, ñ v Juvolume ,":E S.eiriÉle ali
jf,cñ S;udic
¿ # r?r mig n 5ub5(fiile
@ E lnline635
[& r--t] xline 4ñ rLt [mF6.i ic¡ 5e!Ec.ilon] . .
r ffi -r Srruey 1 i* ixpcn ,, , C¡rl. É

, # r'j srbi
tX üelE:e , ,
L
.¡
.
t'5prrstb2
"H .rh? D:l*l:.:!n.*n:: :
Ccilairse (rE(uí5i!e:
! idP¡ñr1 (recur:¡Jei
: ffi f avoriles § Auic cclcr rii
§ iault írameucri( $¡rilE i¡riÉiÉre.i¡¡g
!* Cor,o"- :" ¡¡ieíÉ.eIái;c¡
L
* für"e.: ac 'ñieíp.elaiien icplimiled ibr iÜl
ffi fatergreiaiicn üinaller ' , ,
fr : ,=". :É L-'r -c'?c 1
It( :nsÉ-'dLl: l)
us
ffi' :"¡e-,'r.:er+re:a::o -c'de'
L*.i
5& iy-i J§ i*fi*ry Érr/+s i*n ftte rs
lS lmpod datá
t"lf ü Fault interpretatinn 1
j(tt Fi Fault interpretation 2

, Siraügraphy
ril
¡ Geophysics i"r Fault inierpretation 3
§ §e-smic L!i i-t
m Volume attribltes
+ Surface attribules
.f.ji Automatic fauh extraction
JV1 Make velocily model
: GEriÉralt:Flir.i,rr!ti:r,li
m GEobody interpretati0n
rj Sirta.il ,lr.:ll f)+
& tdlake restoration 2D model
-
208 . Fault Inter pretatlon Petrel Geophysics
C rc< lnterpret faults F in the Function bar or oress the
F key.
5. lnterpret fault on the seismic line elther in the Interpretation

wrndow or 3D window. Double-click or press N to break the
fault stick
6. ln the General intersection plaver, set the increment.
7 Clicl<M@ t0 move to the next or the previous seismic

section or press Page Up or Page Down on the keyboard.
Petrel Geophysics Fauil lnterpretation . 209

qtr"
u J
Editing a Fault Segment -
:t
>--¿
Procedure
'1. To
-
activate the Fault segment, click "É on the Function bar
or press ShiÍt + S before clicking on the fault stlck to activate
_t
¡rra
I
it. The color of the fault is highlighted when it is active. I

I
!.d §§:.:
6.*i.re !:1.6§r i'.:rii'::iti'
§f ir 'Uú¡',li ,.1:,¡: ¡* ül;l r'
.:
; . fil
a
_1
L
ffi ii i ii,
Io edrt a fault segment, cllck G ,n tt . Function bar or press

E. The points on the fault can now be moved 0r new points can
be added to the fault segment to accurately mark the fault
geometry.
-
:
210 . Fault lnterpr et¿tlon Petrel Geophls cs
To deiete a part or whole fault segment click
* 0r press
Cllck on the active fault to delete two adjoining potnts on
seg ment
erre Gecphys cs
Procedure Moving a Fault-Segment
-
1. Actlvate the fault, click I h ., then click on a single cligitized
point (node) on fault stick. Part of the fault segment turns
yellow.
Clrck between any two digitized points (nodes) on the

remaining fault segment to make whole segment yellow..
_=-
212 . Fault lnterpretatiof P.tr-J Gr.lrhy*;

E
a-
-1
Click 'lt and click on a single digitized point (node) and drag
it to move the while segment to a new location on the seismic
section.
1.
rI-J
a-
--{
E--/l
r_-
a-
--.
E
f
f
--/l
E
-_¿
T
_.
a,_
J¡-,-
-l LJ
Move Faults laterally 0ption --J
0ften, when an interpreter is handed reprocessed data, the faults
picked on earlier versions of the data do not fit the new version. This ¡...¡
sometrmes is the case when the field-processed data version is l
different from the final, or more intensive and detailed, processing -,¿
versions. To avoid re-picking the fault model, y0u can use the Move _F
faults laterally opti0n in Petrel. -
j
I..J
'':
i¡.'.*--r*
l:1 .- Procedure Moving Faults Laterally
- to Settings > }perations tab > Seismic ¿
E -e§=E rJ
-E==
E'e§
F,5::r€H 1. Navrgate
operations > Move faults laterally.
¿
ffi Setf*ry tor'Fautrtlnterpretaliun 1' l
L.r
I
J
f.r
H-M §eismlc op*rations ¿
,ir-l$@l ),-a
L
ü"ffi §en*mlfunctions
M Arqhfunrti*ns
.a
S
l-d
o ffi R*plar*wt*re ,l
l§§ M Lkmrn8t*$rrE.re
Elir¡inst*$hÉre
I 6 M §tochasticfun*isns
it¡ M C*mmonopemt.rsre
___¡.
l-r
§ ffi Surfac* cpamtrons
E ffi f;rnverf pir*sJplygonsjswfac*
§t-ffi Velcci§, ccnversian I
tt ffi kmeínconv*mion _t
f-a
_<
lplhe strike af $'re approximafedfaultplane. td
--JL
.r<
_\.{
¿
-F
¡"-
Set the Distance value.
214. Fault lnterpretat¡on Petrel Geophyslcs _1

u
-,r
L-
L
L_-_-__-¡
Click Bun and the actrve fault is moved laterally east 0rwest
depending on whether the drstance is set in positive or
I'
I----t negative value.
I----¡
L-
L'
I-.J
r__-l
L-
I'
I_-_r
I---i¡
L-
U
L_=.r
U
r=__,,i
J=--¿
L.
-4,__J
r_.
l_
-l
l_
---l
u
------J
l_
rr---J
_::-: .:-.-r:1l,rS CS Fa! : ¡terpretatlof . 215
I
J
-l L-.J
.1¡'i,s
= t§
H'.. ;€
Procedure
-
Displaying and Annotating Faults
This procedure shows you how to change the display settings of the
-l V
l,-¿
fault in the lnterpretation and 2D or 3D windows.
ln the settings for a 2D or 3D window,fhe

available.
Surface option also is
:-J
r-l
1. Right-click on the fault inlhe lnterpretation folder and open i
I
the Settings dialog box. -¿

l-J
2. 0n the Style tab, change one 0r more of these options for the .t
fault display settings. ,
Points Displays points for the fault stick. You also f-J
:!
can change the color and size of the points.
Lines Allows you to change the color, width, and

J
l,-¿
style of the Fault stlck.
line Dlsplays the projected location of the same
L--
projections fault on the previous section. You also can -4
change the color, width, and style of the lines
.J
Name Allows you t0 annotate and display the name
-,!
L-4
of the fault rn the lnterpretation window.
Surface For 2D and 3D wlndows, displays the surface .J

\.J
for the co-related fault. -=-+
l-r
=i
.<
\-r
J
<t
td
:+
<l
¡d
--
+L-
216 . Fault lnterpretation Petrel Geophys cs _¿

I
'-' Seiting:ior'F¿uitinterpretaiion l. ffi
ü =",5;L*l
Points
./ Shsvr
;
I
:
I
§urface
? sho* Llolor; Specifi+d
Tran:paren*y
Material: Plastic
Lt¡r't-i lr* -_l b rl.l_l
lau t l¡lerpretation .217

L-l
_:r
l-J
-l
Clean Faults
Performing fault interpretation in both strike and dip directions causes
L..d
the fault sticks to be lntersected, increasing the amount of work to be
done during fhe Fault modeling and Pillar gridding processes.
-dl
It is hlghly recommended that you use the Create clean fault operation f.d
to clean the fault sticks prror to modeling them. Running this operation
ensures one directlonal sticks based on dip and azlmuth. ,¿
fr
J
Procedure Gleaning Faults <l

1. ln the- Fault interpretation Settings > 0perations tab,
\d
i:l il§ riri
LJi:in tr.ii
expand Convert points/polygons/surfaces.
<,
J
\¿
<
"¡!d
¿
l--,J
-_-L
.J
_¿
I
..l
Select Create clean fault.

218. Fau t lnterpretation Petre Geophysics
-á
Click Run
Fault Autotrack¡ng
lf the fault ge0metry is not too complex, Fault autotracking rs a useful
tool that you can use to get a quick view of a fault system or to
interpret faults in more detail.
The Fault autotracking meth0d uses existing fault sticks as seeds to

extend the interpretatron throughout a selsmic cube based on how the
autotracking parameters are set. You set these parameters on the
Autotracking tab in the Settings dialog box of the interpretation fault
Method
lf you are working with conventional selsmic cubes, use the Voxel
corre atron meth0d. lf you are working with Enhance edge detection or
Ant volumes, use the Maximum value method. Lower values will
restrict the autotracking.
Fau t nterpretation .219

t-
Search L
The Search area has these options.

o lncrement: lnterval between two segments to tracl(, taken in L<
the horizontal tracking direction.
. Range: Number of voxels in which to search for the best
Ld
position.
Elasticity L
lf you select fhe (Jse elasticiQ check box, the faults can change
shape at the top, the bottom, or both but the other parts of the fault L--
I
remain fixed.
lf you do not select Ihe (Jse elasticity check box, segments are Ld
I
tracked by keeping the faults the same shape as the seed segments.
Tracking !
lf you select lhe Between seeds only check box, segments are ¿
tracked between seed segments only rather than throughout the entire _\-
seismic cube. When the fault is tracked, fhe Fault interpretationfolder
in the lnput pane will have a new attribute named Tracked. Use this
attribute to drstingursh between tracked and seed segments. -L
You can undo the autotracking by clicking the Undo icon in the Function
toolbar.
-t-
220. Fault Interpretation Petrel Geophysics

Procedure Tracking Faults i.1'-'--':.1
1 . -
Create a new fault interpretatron and interpret it manually on ii.,l r:* Él
t-r:n:S-g+rin:3i
one or two seismic lines.

2. Adjust settings on the Autotracking tab.
3. With a seismic cube active, either:
a. Right-click the fault in !nput pane 0r in the 3D wlndow and
select Track faults.
EÉ¡l :f- ¡ersmrc

$:.* l+nrages
B q: f*ferp surv*y mclss¡b¡¡ ¡flfe-rs
, S ,-f-,i lnterpretationfolder 1
, tk i-t: Jl?nrlerydrc/{/sri:n §ftP.rs

,' & i:l Seismic hori¿on-i
" *; : Seismic horizon 2
ilil:§ffi., .-.
.' Éault interpretatton 2 L-ti
..
' Fault interpretatton 3 m

il; Fault interpretation a
{lr , cuiaed Horizon ffi
l:", lVlanual lnterpretatro L4
\;! . Fsultinterpretetions §k
{+.t Faull interpretation E
:' : Fault ¡nterpretation I ^
. Faultrnterpretation 3 .b-i Cr,py íaulri irr,ler*rÉtatisil {data oniyl
,[i Fault interpretation 1 f¡
Jrtt i-l Fauli interpretation 1l : r* f añvEi-t t.} pÉrnis
'.' Fault interpretation T '-'
Jüt il faun inerpretátion !i fl/ {cnve-: tc pclygcns
"i: f¡ults
Jttt i--J Fault interpretation Sf Track:
ett Copy of Fault ¡nterpr l= tniErprPtst;0n El¿náqe!' .,,
l1tt .. CopyofFault¡nterpr y*.
f nnr; nf tr¡r rlt intornr É9 lnsÉr ;n-erpre:¿ricn a::ríiru:e
Petrel Geophysics Fault lnterpretatlo¡ . 221

I
b. ln fault Settrngs, click Track. +
-¿
r--J
+
ú "r" ; stui ,'., ' j ;Áo^ r" opereriore
lLlliBli§lel
Ir'etl,od
I l-#- Choose nethod alltomaticaly
'.:'.. 1'.. ... 0.65:

n.,¡... ., : , .. ,. c s5 :
SearEh - --
I
i lflcreñrent
I Range: l0 +
i
iJi Use elasti.ity
-.. Tüp
i t,
I , Bnltan¡ +
I g fop End bottEm
'"¡ Eet»een see,Cs anl¡-
-4
The fault extends along the seismic cube, as shown in the figure. +
222. Fault lf terpretatlon Petre Geoprys cs

r--{
Procedure Digitizing a Fault on a Surface
r,_- - -
Activate Make/edit polygons under Utilities.
E
I--
a---1
¡ Ulitr*ties
ffi Hakefeditpolygaas
ffi rulate/*uit surf¡ce
ffi NaUe simple grid
** Train rstimatinn mudel
& frlap-based r¡nlume calculatinn
;
{
r=- :
't'''";t' ''
Ljirr:*ii;!;-¡i'
:ii'"
i;i *piimi:*ri,rri:
:
a-
*r
rE-{ E-
ffi Ulohal grrd crarsenrng
I§
E
.
ffi frtate¡eAit annntatinns ffi
F--__i 2
^¡;r
r=-
Display a surface in a 2D window
§{'
'.:,.¡#
{;} The d gitrzed po ygon
f
IL.T :.:§fi can be converted rnto Fault
interpretation.
§
f
-L.-
Ef-{
i:t
;
-.
r=- F
6jb
.,¡
-i{
É
r-j
,:J
.l
r.\j
ú¡
,lll
ft
retfel Geophys cs
F:uI l¡terOretation . 223
a
]
¡I
J. Click Start new polygon on active set of polygon* 3{
and digitize the fault plane on the surface displayed.
-T
I
a
I
I
4. A new polygon displays in the lnput pane. Right-click on

I
the polygon, open the settings dialog, and select the a
display options.
f
-|
I
.¡I
J
t
a
I
a
I
I
I
224. Fau t lnterpretation Petrel Geophys c.

I
,J
Restrict Mode
Restrict node ls useful for interpreting faults in 3D windows and
showing the horizons and fauits only where they intersect in the
displayed selsmic sections.
.'i.
Procedure Restricting lnterpretation Displays in a lii¡i,*"eE
3D Window
- ,il
lj:i
,&ii
,§
tÉs.qii.§*
i.E
1 . Display interpretations and seismic lines in a 3D window

2. To view only interpretations projected along seismic lines,
click these icons in Function bar:
o Click !ff for active interpretation.
-.i
. Click ftl for all visible interpretations.
Petrel Geophysics Fault Interpretation . 225

JL.-
Exercises lnterPreting Faults
I^J
].-
-
these exercises you will learn how to rnterpret and edit faults in
ln L-J
Petrel and use the lnterpretation manager. --J
L.¿
Manually lnterPreting Faults
Good fault interpretatlon often leads to a better understanding
of :.J
L.J
the sub-surface geology. ln this exercise, you will manually interpret
faults to get hands on training in fault interpretation' I
1. Activate fhe Seismic interpretation process in the y-,¿

Processes Pane.
2. Display the selsmic section in a Intetpretation window or
3D window. For this exercise, you will llmit the fault
jt,-
interpretatlon on the cross-lines.
3.Bight-clicklnterpretationfolderlandselectlnsertfault. ,¿
You also can use the Seismic interpretation toolbar to
J-
lnsert faults.
-/
The new fault appears in the same folder' A fault is stored
in the actlve lnterpretation folder in the lnput pane'
-y
4. Bight-click the newly inserted fault, open the Settings
5.
dialog box, and rename the fault cldspin-E10'
0n the Funct¡on toolbar, click lnterpret fauhs ffi '
-y
6. lnterpret the Cldspin-F10 fault on cross-line
an lnterpretation window or 3D window'
470 elther in
ts
1 . Double-click to break the fault stick. ¿
B. lnsert at least three more faults and name them
Cldspin-F2 O, Cldspin-E3 0, and Cldspin-
;!-
E4 0. <
tE
9. Bepeat SteP 3 through SteP 5.
10. In the General intersection player, set the increment 1 5 '
11 . Work across the seismic volume and interpret the faults
across the survey. You will use these faults later in the §
trainlng.
J
¡r
§
Petrel Geophystcs
Editing and Manipulating Faults using the Function
Toolbar
S= s-lc interpreters often have to edit and manipulate their fault
^ -=':r:ration. ln this exercise, you wrll edit the faults.
0pen an lnterpretation wind and display a few

interpreted faults from the lnput pane.
1
0n the Function toolbar, click Activate faullhorizon
';l
(Shift+S) '% to actrvate the Fault segment.
Click on the fault stick to be activated. The color of the
fault is highlighted when it is active.
0n the Function t00lbar, click Select and add/edit point
;H-
(E).'t+ to edit the Fault segment. You now can move the
points on the fault or add new points to the fault segment
to mark the fault ge0metry accurately.
Delete a part.of q-r the entire Fault segment by clicking
I r"r
Delete (X),# on the Function toolbar. Clicking on the
active fault deletes the two adjoining points on the
segment.
During your interpretation, identify which fault elements
belong together:
a. 0pen a 3D window and display an interpreted fault.
b. Use the Bounding box select (B) ,", h-' tool to drag an
area around related fault elements to select them.
c. For better control of the point positions, digitize points
on a time slice. ir,.:
Alternatively, use Select singte point i*bj, then Ctrl
+ left-click to select the fault elements (click the line
segments between the nodes, not the nodes
themselves).
7 Hight-click the active fault inside the 3D window and select
Move selection to new. A new fault object appears in
the active Fault interpretation folder with its own color.
Note that you also can use the lnterpretation window for
this process.
o
o. Bepeat Step 6 to make a new selection and create a new
fault object.
Petrel Geophysics Fault Interpretation. 227

J
-J
!--
¡..{
Editing and Manipulating Faults using the lnterpretation ^-J
Window
f..-
1. Activate fhe Seismic interpretation
:l
process.
2. Open an Interpretation wlndow.
3. Make a copy of a fault (in this exercise, use Cldspin-F20)
L.J
and display it in the lnterpretation window.
4. Step through the seismic line until the digitized points are
- x
visualized on the fault. You might have to change the step

)
L-J
lnterval number to locate the points.
4l
5. ln the lnput pane, make the fault active. )
Alternatively, y0u can select it from the Seismic y
interpretation tool bar.
6. 0n the Function toolbat click Select and ediVadd points
.Eñ
(E):.H
y -r'
. Move a point in the lnterpretation window by clicking on
ts
1
it and dragging it to another location (the point turns yellow

when it is selected).
B. Move more than one point. -/
L--
o ffi
point I ]to ,¡.
Press Ctrl and click Select single
activate the points that you wish to move. )
. Clrck on the fault segment to activate all points along
,+
)-.J
that, §ggment, then cllck Select and ediVadd points
(E)r-_E L..-
9. Press Ctrl and click on selected points or lines to clear =4
;
them. Use the Undo or Redo icons as needed.
10. Add points.
-!i
-l
r.J
a. Activate the fault stick, I
)
b. Click Select and edit/add points (E)tffi
c. Left-click where you want to add points.
ts
Gutting a Fault Segment
1 . ln the lnput pane, activate the fault segment to be edited
-v
by toggling it on. .-/ I
¡.,..J
iltr
2. Click Gut segments (T) "-!'i .
3. Click on the fault segment. The fault is cut into two

-J
ri. "
segments.
228 . Fault lnterpretation Petrel Geophysics -l

L,,.J
I
Joining Two Points
1. Activate the fault segmenttote edited by clicking it.
2. CIick Select single pointi-$-i.

3. Press Ctrl and click the two line segments to be joined
0bserve that all points belonging to these two line
segments turn yellow.
f;,r1
4. Click Join selected points (J)ffi ro connect the faults.
Using the lnterpretation Manager for Handling Faults

1. ln the lnput pane, right-click your active lnterpretation
folder and select lnterpretation manager.
2. Click lnsert new fautt [.&j

3. 0pen the Settings dialog box.
4. Double-click the first cell of the row for the newly inserted
fault.
5. 0n the Info tab, rename the fault EauIt rnt
Manager and click 0K.
6. Highlight Fault_lnt_Manager in the lnterpretation
manager spreadsheet and click Move selected
,r=.
interpretation to another interpretation folder [t{l .
ln the Move to folder dialog box, selecf lnterpretation

folder I and click 0K.
Petrel Geophystcs
Fault lfterpretation . 229
J
-l
¡--r
L-J
Displaying and Annotating Faults
During seismic interpretation, y0u can display and annotate your
interpreted faults.
_l
f.J
1. 0pen an lnterpretation window and display a fault. -_l
2. ln the lnput pane, right-click on your active fault and open t--a
the Settings dialog box.
3. 0n the Style tab, select the different options for displaying
and annotating the faults. Play with the different settings
:_l
l--a
to familiarize yourself with these options. -_.1
§a$ngr far'Frull k!*rpx§ls*l f y
lr-¿
v-,
v--¿
v_-¿
v¿
v-¿
-1
-¡..a
=¡
:!.,¡
F
t--r
230 . Fault lnterpretation Petrel Geophysics -.'

¡-J
Review 0uestions
You have two interpretation folders in your project
under
the .Sersmrc main folder. you have just realized that some
of your key horizons and faults are residing in one
interpretation folder and some in another. you now want
t0
move allof them into one folderto be able to manage
them
properly. How will you do this in petrel?
During your fault interpretation, you want to quickly select
another fault on the seismic section. Which icon or shortcut
can you use to do this?
Summary
ln this module, you Iearned about:
o interpreting faults in petrel
. using the fault interpretation Function toolbar and fault
settings
o manually picking faults
o manipulating and editing faults
. tracking faults.
Petrel Geophysics
Fault lnterDretation o 231
Module 4 Horizon
lnterpretation -
ln this module, you will learn howto interpret horizons in Petrel.
Various horizon interpretation techniques, such as Seeded 3D and 2D
autotracking, horizon operations, and making surfaces, wlll be
discussed.
Learning 0bjectives
a access and use the horizon interpretation Function toolbar
a change horrzon settings and parameters
open and use the lnterpretation manager
interpret horizons using different techniques
use these interpretation tools:
. Seeded 3D autotracking
. Guided autotracking
perform manual interpretations
edit horizons and parent/child relationships
lter i nterpretations
fi
correct horizon problems using horizon operations (bulk shiftino

and smoothing)
a flatten horizons
a annotate horizons.
Seismic l¡terpretat 0n Preparat 0n . 233

Lesson 1 Horizon lnterpretation in Petrel
-
ln Petrel, y0u can choose different technrques to rnterpret your seism c
horizons, depending on the time that you have available, accuracy

required, and, more importantly, the size and quality of your seismic
data set.
!
Essentially, these techniques can be classified into two major
categories. autotracking and manual interpretation. There are several
autotracking techniques, which will be dlscussed in detail later ln this
module.
ln this context, suppose y0u are working on a data set from a complex
tectonic regime where nolse, reflector contlnuity, signal strength, and
structuration are major challenges" You might constder using manual t-
interpretation because it allows you to draw on the seismlc event.
However, you also could use autotracking by selecting good
autotracking parameters. t-
Similarly, workrng on data sets from a less complex tectonic regime
with better reflector continuity and signal strength can significantly l¡-
enhance the autotracking results, savrng you time and effort. L
ln essence, horizon interpretation is a combination of different

techniques. For example, the selsmic event that you wish to pick
t-
t
depicts strong amplitude and continuity in one of the surveys; howevei'
it gradually looses its amplitude and continuity as the subsurface ]L
geology changes over an area. ln this case, ustng autotracking in the
high amplitude area and manual interpretation in the remaintng area
can be useful. 1l-
§
ln this section, the baslc workflow for horlzon interpretation is
discussed. The focus will be on baslc techniques of selsmic
rnterpretatron. Tying seismic events to well data ls not discussed
After you are familiar with the workflow, you can employ it usrng well
data to pick your selsmic horizons.
234. Seismic lnterpretation Preparati0n

Function Bar lcons for Horizon lnterpretation
These icons are active when the Seismic Interpretatioz process is
¿
.- activated.
táó7 z el.* ts x S :# ü I &. :§1 ? H q f,#,l.* % *f:§$:§§ * *l &..r
ffi
'*
*§.
é,
re
l§4;
%,
i§
&
'§
€ 10
11 r§
& 12
§{
lnterpret grid horizons IH]
Seeded 3D autotracking [Shift+A]
Seeded 2D autotracking [A]
Guided autotracking [G]
Manual interpretation [U]
Paintbrush autotracking (resize +/-), [0]
Actíve box autotracking [Shift 0]
Autotrack inside polygon
Select interpretation point
Activate Fault / Horizon [Shift+S]
Selection paintbrush (resize: +/-) [Shift + Bj
Bounding box select
Eraser (resize +/-), txl
Petrel Geophysics Seismic interpret¿ti0n Preparation . 235

1--
Horizon lnterpretation Techniques L
Petrel offers different methods to interpret your horizons.

. Seeded 3D autotracking ¡,-
o Seeded 2D autotracking
o Guided autotrackinq
--
. Manual¡nterpretation !-
o Paintbrushautotracking
o Active box autotracking
o Autotrack inside polygon.
I\-
ts
-¿
l--¡
'Ll
_J
\--{
LI
I
EI
t-.
I
r-j
---:,-*-
i;t,
-l
!'<a
J
Lr
_l
236. Seismic Interpretation preparati0n
Petrel Geophysics
.-
J |
Horizon lnterpretation Workflow
The main workflow for horizon rnterpretation is the same for all
methods.
1. ln the Processes pane, activate the Seismic interpretation
pr0cess.
2. ln the lnput pane, activate the horizon.
3. Select the seismic line that you wish to interpret.
4. ln the Functron toolbal click Interpret grid horizons
'Bi
and
select the interpretatron method (for example, Seeded 3D
autotracking or Guided autotracking).
5. Pick the event that you wish to rnterpret.
ln areas with poor data quality or complex geology, the autotracking

technrques can be difficult to use. ln such areas, manual interpretation
can be a way to interpret the seismic data. With manual interpretation,
you click on key picks and Petrel interpolates between those picks.
You can rename both the lnterpretation folder and the new seismic
horizons on the lnfo tab of the Settings dialog box. You can have
multiple interpretation folders and you can add subfolders if necessary.
However, it is recommended that you manage your interpretation and
rnterpretation f older caref ully, because having multrple interpretation
fo ders can be confusing later in the project.
You can interpret horizons in 3D and lnterpretation windows and on

most seismic lines and displays (for example, in-line, cross-line, random
line, arbitrary line, and well rntersection fence).
The undo/red0 steps are limitless. These steps are saved for each
horizon, but lost when Petrel is closed.
r:ire Geophysics
qe.mic lrlprp'erar 0r Preparal o .237
l--
Procedure Creating or Inserting a New Horizon

l:i.'i*&§i:
[ii -*
F: ei4
¡1
1. - lnseñ
Bight-click on lnterpretation folder 1 and select
tri+f,:n=,!é
seismic horizon. ¡-
ntarp Srcr ret:'gs .
* iLi *eiemic horirca 1

SE:rd aÍ¡:ú §I.rdiÉ
r §i(l 3D
rSpjmig *e!fiÉ!* áli irom iludiD
q {: !n'iné §3.8 Subscri§s IE
@fi xliae:l7n Impcü {ea sÉl*(iion'i ,, .
, rB i-r 20 (xi:ori, , ,
: ff rj slb]
Clrt.!
''# i-"1 ,tuz nEiel8 , , ,
'# ll rtur
' # lll ,tu+ acll¡i]iÉ {r'éturgrrÉi
:4§ánd {rciurs,}É}
*
a -4uie aoi*r üii
5au¡i .iafi Éiqürk Eh¡ie in:e.ÉrÉ1in g
BF.1::ffi** _*..*** * Cún!,e* ic interpretaiiet

Csnrer": i8 inierpfe:rtl*n {optifii¡ed te. ;al
l¡lterprqialiei¡ fi ¡itsqe., . . ¡-
-t-
lnsen se,srrc lorizon
rñ inr€tr faul:
# irseit ;niBrprÉta1iún iüldsr
-.L.
Alternatively, create a new horizon by clicking the Create new
horizon icon on the Seismic interpretation toolbar.
lllSeismi. {.lsi?ultj Ilo hcr;zo§ seltrl€ 4, Selgmrc f rre I Nc restoralion 2rl mo
Activate fhe Seismic interpretatioz process and display the t-

seismic line you wish to interpret in an lnterpretation
window or 3D window.
¡¡-
f*
¡-
&-
238 . Sersmic Interpretation Preparation PefeL Geophysics
,L
-
S¡ÉtigBphy
:é+ SurfaÉe sttributes

'i;ü AutsmÉti{ fault extraction
lY1 h,lake velocity model
:'-;¡icr3r;É¡l,i¡¡r¿rsl¡í
ffi Geabady interprÉtairon
i'. liÉ,iiiii. snii ila
B h,lEke restoEtjon 2D §rodel
§lrocaure, framesark
Comer poinl griddin§
Pr0perty Eodeliac
4. Activate Seismic honzon 1-in the lnput pane and click
tnterpret grid horizon iffiiunO then one of interpretation

¡ron, *3§:$&&.# in the Function toolbar.
5. Click on the seismic event that you wish to pick as Seismic
horizon 1.
a. Hold down the left mouse button and move the cursor In
the directron of interpretation.
b. Either double-click or press N to break the pick.
c. Continue picking the seismic event across the fault on the
s ecti o n.
Geophysics Seismlc nterpretation Preparati0n. 239
I
tl
t.¡
_I
L.J
_l
-l
L--
-J
:E--
-l
L-¿
tr l--J
-_l
tr L-r
t-rl
>l
_l
)
F
j¿l
r'
-¡-
the l-.r
Go to the next seismic line by either selecting from -L
General intersection player or pressing PageUp/PageDown'
Set the increment t0 use t0
jump to the next seismic line by I
tH
ánt.tlng a value in the Plane Step field on the Function toolbar' -L
<
i¡-
(in this case' an rn-line)

B. Choose an intersecting se¡smic line
that shows the point where Seismic horizon t has been picked
onthecross-|inetoaidinpickingtheeventonthein-line.Build l-
a loop across as you work on the data set'
Petrel Geophysics
_-L
+1L
€f*rFear¡añX#rt lGry:l fne¡rl - rt¡t - Seit¡$itT:r€ 1-}|q.-riet35
-__:----'------rjF;:r--
'E',*c.sl§;r''
=vffi
:.A . X,_ir§ 4:i
k?B
ln an lnterpretation window, an active horizon displays a

sectr0n of the survey where the horizon has been interpreted
Petrel Geophyslcs Selsm c lnterpretation Preparatl0n ' 241

J
L-
_l
-l
\--J
-J
¡--J
L----
-l
-l
1--J
-l
t--J
¡--¿
/ft-, L6r4 .-' - I

_l
t. -
-)
L*á
-_l
5l
l
F
_1
E
F
Petrel Geophysics
242. Seismic lnterpretati0n Preparation
Lesson 2 Autotracking
-
As discussed briefly the previous lesson, autotracking is a powerful
in
toolto use for interpreting horizons, particularly in areas with good
reflector c0nt¡nuity, srgnal strength, and data quality. ln this Iesson, you
will learn about different types of autotracking and the parameters that
impact the autotracking results.
Guided Autotracking
With Guided autotrackrng, you choose two 0r more points and the
trackrng finds the best route between them. This option gives you a high
degree of control to determine how the interpretation will develop.
li ,i* ii!
Procedure Performing Guided Autotracking lr,.r::li
1. -
ln Input pane, actrvate and display the seismic line for Guided
Autotracking in an lnterpretation or 3D window.
ñc§
4g 47ñ
';' lnterpret Grid horizon ffi

2. Click and Guided autotracking
"& Cllctr along a reflector to select the starting and ending

points. The interpretation follows the seismic event between
the two seed points.
Petrel Geophysics Seismic Interpretatl0n Preparation. 243

L 4
)
I
L
519 536 554
446 4f6
)
¡,-
h¡¡
L----¿
N- ,---¿
&
l,-.-¿
L-¿
Double-click 0r press the N or H key io end an tnterpretation
segment to break the pick.
lL--
L¿
L
244. Selsm c lnterpretat on Preparat 0n Pet el Gúoph , r

Seeded 2D Autotracking
,^i ith this type of autotracking, y0u choose 0ne seed p0int and the
'rorizon is tracked rn the direction 0f the displayed intersectt0n (cross-
ne or in-line) based on the autotracking parameters. The horizon
continues tracking untrl it n0 longer meets the specifred parameters due
I'
---J
I---¿
to a fault plan, amplitude decay, or reverse polarity.
I_- Procedure
1.
- Performing Seeded 2D Autotracking
ln lnput pane, activate and display the seismic line for Seeded
a-
III--¿ 2D Autotracl<ing in an lnterpretation or 3D window
Click lnterpretGrid horizon

:@
E and Seeded 2D
a-
E.
Autotracking ,+F' Clrck once along a seism¡c event. The
interpretation follows the event to each side of the point
--r
selected and stops when an abrupt change in an amplitude
II-- value occurs.
I_-- Repeat the procedure for other segments and lines.
f
-f-5
f
If--
---z
I_-
f
,tu
tl_-
-"
f
--.¡
fr.
--ó
a--a
I
Petrel Geophysics Seismic nterpretati0n Preparation ¡ 245
J
:
l--J
Seeded 3D Autotracking
The basic workflow for Seeded 3D autotracking is similar to other
horizon interpretation workflows. However, the real control for Seeded
:t
¡--.¿
-_l
3D autotracking comes from different options on the Autotracking tab
in the horizon Settings dialog box. These options allow you to pick
t--J
horizons that require minimum quality control from the interpreter.
-_t
You can choose 0ne 0r several seed points and the horizon is tracked
outward in alldirections from these seed points. When the reflectors lsa
are of good quality, this method is a very efficientway of interpreting
through the seismic cube. _l
l-..J
-_l
.$* Procedure Performing Seeded 3D Autotracking ¡--a
- lnput
§=s§ 1. ln the pane, activate and display the seismic cube to be
auto tracked. Display the seismic trace data in an
lnterpretation or 3D window
:l
¡--a
-)
Click lnterpretgld horizon iB:tf,.n Seeded 3D
iÉ. Cl¡rL on the seismic event to be 1-.
o
autotracking
autotracked. The interpretation expand over the entire cube --l
J. Alternatively, 0pen the Settings dialog box for the horizon.
Choose between peak or troughs, give a seed point on a l.-r
LI
seismic section, and click on 3D Track to expand the
interpretation. _l
:
l--J
L.
l
F
_J
:
F
l-r
t-..,a
ts
-
246 o Seismic Interpretation Preparation Pefrel Geophysics
-_"{É..____
* s*{*¡¡* *r ':¡*r{ ¡rs'affi L ffiffi
,¡' !-ry*.
je ry-q l.;..,ryqfr:..§ -fry:- LeC .*tp§y.-1X Á!rsa(!i*l
r¡¡rr./ .+-¡d ; S..r
_jl
!r*{? ¡úiÉk&e !e*fi{}- lurlq 56* h: .*
¡il 1.5i:nal**u* a l*lür-rr*.!ÉÉ Ps*are4t4 .i
le*ffiñ,...,@§$1,-.,,...
? 5úsd.¡er,* :-*l :!
V¿¡rr.¿r{É
ils
ij
1: rúB¡g*!,{i eri
9¿ñ§J4r¡.16 rGl
,i:¡§tl J!Ir i.l!¡¡!
Petre Geophysics Seismic nterpretatiOn PreparatiOn. 247

¡-r
_l
]----
_t
i
lu {'ii
I -1:. {}il *i0
a--
_t
]--a
_t
l-¡
_l
¡--a
_l
f,--a
_l
-l
F.
]r-.t
-_l
L-a
-_l
LI
t--
)
Li
L;
L
Autotracking Tabs and Settings
The Autotracking tab in the horizon Settings dralog box has different
options and settings that gives you good control of your autotracking. L
There is n0 recommended set of parameters for autotracking because it

varies from horizon to horizon, depending 0n the character of the h..-
seismic event that is autotracked. Therefore, the focus here will be on
the parameters available in Petrelto help you decide on the best
options for your autotracking.
-
2il8 . Seismic Interpretati0n Preparation Petrel Geoph\/slcs
Use the Autotracking tab to control the way your horizons will be
a utotra cked.
ift kttinqs ior'Seiss¡d horizon 1' ffi

Seismia vol!me:
i{-i,ry.":'r .,.;s
Priorityr Amplitlde & Prurnrly Ouality: Aalc *: .i
-;B
i.:-.I NQ¡-¿era cantric P€k or trcúqhs .,.i
.q¡-jl
PaEfieters
Ampliírde
=Ji Seerl co*fdence: 3t 9.
I Velue rsnge: i1r.il
i,arl+..r L,,r¡
i.Ll*
Dip
=P{€
ii l:
2.t0 lt¡ ?*¿ 2 BE
iÍsysmet*cal sampletñe lj¡] Symmetrical
Optimize for dipping teffeclors

-;
,-a* l-Jse wavelet lracking
;orelatewilh: Se€dtEÉ
Correltslion qualily: B5
aj
.¡t Symmetricalsi¡dows
.ij Above: 12 samplesiSSms)
IJ Belaq 1l samples[48ms)
Length: :.i i sanrplesfgGñs)

I
-I":1tll':::1Y- - -{--€l::!, - Gr
l?t*ry.:-l Elr-.:-l hGg-r
P:trel Geophys cs Seismic lnterpretati0n Preparati0n. 249

fr-.¡
b_-.-
L--¡
B
I p'Á*.t**" 1-l;-i;;*t"-'. l
LateraJ limits
Eoundary polygor: r lh¿

I i-,i Stüp aivisiblefaults
l
i Verticallimits
¡-¡
Uooer t* oo::l m5
,!
i--lLo¡u"r ,.*" l-'- ms
91":' :l ¡-¡
i_i Vertical rsnge: :
t
, rend dala. i
lkr
f.,iün-zerú iéñlric
i lr-:l-:
l--¡
L
fáili ii füisi :ri5t"§ ;r L.r,ih r:iírn*r
r...r 1,..sluil tangÉ: :
-,¿
I--a
Ll
'Seedjlocking
3D Seeds ¡ck ..J
Viaible points
§ i*_, )
'>-¿
'-l
Selected points
,:
-, lr-.-.
seedfller:.*l:
._-_'.,,
I n¿k filior
J
j¡,1 Ovenide
Itrlax venical l-i i--=:----",

rj Z sámDleslS I JU bnüp I
:
¡-l
The activated seismic cube is picked up automatically. Use the blue

_.,]
arrow to change the seismic cube. l.J
L-l
ffi §ettings far '§eisrnic hor;zan 1'
úpÉretisn€ l§ A*otrarking
_J
¡-,
¡']
E¡sic 3x3
L-'
)
L-¡
Ll
--J
¡-
250. Seisr r lrLe.prerarion Preparattor Petrel Geophyslcs _l

l--d
Priority regulates the priority queue of available seed points for the
expansion process.
Friori§: Anrplit*de & .:n i:

r --- An:nlitude
'l*lnllll
,i risignat prsxrmitv i
This figure shows the comparative tracking results 0f the three seed
priority methods.
tr
Amplitude & Proximrty

Amplitude
Proximity
Petrel Geophysics Se smic lnterpretation Preparati0n . 251

J
l
¡-{a
Seed Priority
Ihe Priorie option regulates the priority queue of avarlable seed
points for the expansion process. Choose one of these values:
:t
L-.J
LI
. Amplitude: Prioritizes picks of higher extrema for early I
expansion, leaving lower extrema picks to expand later. _)

. l--J
Proximity. Prioritizes picks with the shortest expansion paths
.
over picks with longer expansion paths
Amplitude & Proximity: Combines the first two methods.
_l
t-¡
The default priority is Amplitude & Proximity, which offers both high
quality growth and trmely finish of points close to the seeds. :l
lb-J
Signal Feature
fhe Signal feature opÍton controls the feature to be tracked. Use the
:l
l-r
Non-zero cenfric check box to toggle between these signal features
for tracking:
:_l
l-¿
. zero centric (for example amplitude cubes) "-l
. n0n-zer0 centrc (traces n0t having a mean equal to zero, for
example impedance cubes).
7-t
Ll
I
ffi settings tor'Seism¡r hüriEún 1'

)
)"-r
\-
Seismic v0lume l=F
, W mio
-i
l*¡
¡r-
.Ü i Sisnalfeature: i, Non-¿ero centric Pe¿ks
1
Toggle off lhe lVon-zero centric check box to get these options l.r
o Peaks
. --<
.
Troughs
S-crosslng L-
. Z-crossing
o Peaks or Troughs I
. Any Zero Crossing
. None (flat).
b
-
¡-
.
252 Seismic lnterpretati0n Preparati0n Petre Geophysics
¡--
L
-
Peaks l-
-. Non-zero centlic
Canstr¿ints i
lw :nlugns
l
S-crcssing
Z-cr*,tsing
Peak cr tr*ughs
Any zerc crossing
::i:* I$üne tTlÉtt
get these optlons:

Ioggle on the lVon-zero centric check box to
o Local maximum
o Local mtnimum
o S-increasing
. Z-decreasing
o Local extrema
. SIZ evolutlons.
Fj Ncn-zero centnc Lrcal nr¡xtnrun'l
L*r:at mininrunl
5-increasitrg
Zdecre*sinE
.ta s¡
Lrc¡l extrenrunr
a .-!* lb
s1¿ e-volutlÉns
horizon interpretation is Peaks

The default for the tracking feature of a
0r Troughs \Non-zero ,ui,,i'check box toggled off)' When you make
the pick determtnes
the firsi autotracking pick, the amplitude at
peaks 0r tróughs are tracked and the feature setting changes
*t rtf,.,
manually'
accordingly. You also can set Peaks or Troughs
Zero Crossing and Petrel
Similarly, y0u can setthe feature to Any
when you make the first
selects §-crossing 0r Z-crosslng automatically
pick.
ili * i. nt.,pr.tatio
I n Preparati 0n' 253
Petrel Geoph\/S cs
The illustration shows what non-zero centric means. A time-based Lr--
SEG-Y plots along the time axis. A zero crossing for this represents a
local minimum or local maximum in the non-zero centric world. A peak
in the zero-centric seismic represents an S-increasing feature while a
trough represents a Z-increasing feature.
lnpaderce
E-
lim*
L-_
L-_
T
¡r-
I
L
T l-
J-
1 Z-Crossings
2 S-Crossings
254. Seisr'c lrLerp e,otior Preporarion

Petrel Geophysrcs
L-
Ouality
--= Oualin'oo¡ion on the Autotracking tab controls how stringently
:3i- sse0 pcinr is checked before it is expanded.
$ =ti-ngr
fc:'Seismic ho.izon 1'
r=; i # *ir
AmplrtuCe&Prürmjty - üualil,¡
Nlon-lBr0 [Entric Peks
Qualifr.
Fe¡hs V¡lidat*d -1x3.

Vrlid¡tr=d 5.x5
Shoose one 0f these values for Ihe Quality 0pt¡0n:

Basic 3x3: Checks the eight closest points against (only) the
seed p0int. This method will expand a seed p0intto its eight
closest neighbors, valrdating each against only the seed point.
The seed point expansion ¡s d0ne using a 3 x 3 grid cell
validation to verify the eight neighbor traces of each seed
point. All eight neighbors 0f an accepted seed p0int must pass
the validation for that seed to be flagged expandable. The
tracking then expands in all directions. The cycle repeats as
each new accepted point (child) now becomes a potential
parent for all of its eight neighboring traces.
ln this technique, all eight neighbors are compared against
only the seed point to find a valid event. lf this phase fails, the
tracker stops, marking the seed point as non-expandable.
Validated 3x3: Checks the e¡ght closest points against the seed
pornt and each p0int's neighbors. The first phase of this
method is the Basic 3x3 technique. lf the first phase is passed,
each event on the corner neighbor traces is validated against
its adjacent neighbors. lf all validations are successful, all
eight neighbor locations are accepted as potentral seeds and
the tracking expands in all directions. lf this phase fails, the
tracker will stop, marking the seed point as non-expandable.
Validated 5x5: Checks the 24 closest points against the seed
point and each point's neighbors.
Seisn'r c lnterpretati0n Preparation o 255

J
L-
_t '
This advanced technique for tracking involves two phases that
g0 beyond the two phases described for the Validated 3x3.
These third and fourth phases expand 0ut to track/validate the
_l
I--a
16 neighbortraces that enc0mpass the 3 x 3 grid cell area.
t**¡**- - {
_t
l--.
-_l
tr§
*t
:.
**.'.*a{'*
¡--a
]
lE-J
-l
i--
-_l
,.--{
lE-¿
I
Validated 3x3
l
L, -
Validated 3x3
Validated 3x3
f_-
J
Seed Point (black)
Potential child polnts (blue)
Accepted child picks from phase
1 and 2 (green)
-J
ll- -
_l
i--a
_l
II
256 o (e. riu lt te p Ftat 0r Pr"patdt ol Petrel Geophysics _t

[-
-l
Seed Gonfidence
-^,e Seed confidence option specifies the minimum value
for the
s: smic amplitude as a percentage of the seed point. The confidence
:,e determines how much slack the tracker will apply to the seed
,a ues when determinrng whether to accept or reject expansion points.
Picking an amplitude of 120 with a confidence level of 30% will reject

amplitude values below 36. A high value makes the tracker strictet
, ielding fewer pornts, while a low value makes the tracker less
:iscriminate, yielding more points.
When you use this option with the 3D Track button, the confidence
level rs applied to each seed point, so a potential expansion point can
be reached from a seed pointwith a high value, but could be
unreachable from a seed point with a low value.
Value range
fhe Value range opfion allows you to specify a minimum andlor
maxrmum amplitude value seismic attribute to be tracked. Picks outside
of these amplitude limits are rejected. To quickly see y0ur amplrtude
range, press P on your keyboard and trackthe event. The amplrtude
values are displayed in the 0bject information area.
Doublet
Ihe Tracking rule oplion specifies which part of a doublet the tracker
follows. A doublet rs defined by a wavelet having four 0r more inflection
points and only two zero crossrngs. Set one of these values for the
Tracking rule.
. Lower: Lower peak/through of the doublet.
. Upper: Upper peak/through of the doublet.
The search window for the doublet feature is in samples and is linked
to the dip given on the Geometricaltab. By default, the search has a
minimum of four samples that it searches (even if the dip samples in
the Geometrical tab are smaller). However, if the dip samples on the
Geometrical tab are set to more than four samples, this search
window is used.
?errel Geophys cs Selsm c lnterpretati0n Preparatlon. 257

J
f
lr.-r
ffi Setrings for 'Seis.Ei. herúon 1'
:l
l*.-{
:t
t*-J
_l
¡--¿
-_l
lL-J
:-.1
¡--J
:-.]
tk
ts
)
|--a
t-
-¿
l-.r
L
É
L
E
¡-
Minrmum attributes L--
t-
Maximum atttbutes
Amplitude/reflection strength
Accepted maximum event
F
Accepted minimum event
¡-
L
Legal event region
Z (time or depth)
E
E
258. Selsmic lnterpretati0n Preparati0n Petre Geophysics

E
E.
Dip
Ihe Dip option allows you to optimize the autotracking parameters for
dipping reflectors.
fhe Symmetrical check boxes control if vertical posrtion changes in

the in-line and cross-lrne directions are allowed to be symmetrical
(toggled on) or asymmetrical (toggled off). Using these options
increases your ability to fine tune the autotracking.
You can enter a numeric value or use the scroll bar to input a value
between 0 and'10. The defaultvalue rs 2. The dragrams show
asymmetry of the cross-hairs in either or both drrections (image
representations showing three traces with the selected input).
Toggle on fhe Optintized Jbr Dipping Refiectors check box to

activate a guiding plane that goes thr0ugh the neighbors of the dipping
reflectors (as specified by expansion quality, that is 3X3 or 5X5 points)
and uses its trend when autotracking the event. Using thts option can
increase the accuracy in areas where reflectors are dipping steeply.
Wavelet
When the (Jse wayelet tracking check box is toggled on, the
autotracker tests potential expansron points using the correlation of a
seismrc trace wrndow. Choose between these correlation methods:
. Seed trace. Cross-correlate with the waveform of the seed
trace.
. Adjacent parent. Cross-correlate with the waveform of the
adjacent parent trace.
Selsmic Interpretatl0n Preparatl0n . 259

b
Dip -
Crossline lrline
i*
il
r-3 t r*il
i.i
lMi r--li
i {{J
2.§8 2 [$ 2.0ü i - ttt
l; -- -J
¡
I 2.*C
smple*ltrace Fl §l¡m*ietrical
;---j Opümize fcr dipping reflectcrs L
y' Usewavelettracking
Conelaie wilh §eedtr*ce
Correlation quality.
ü &.5
E
i{] §yn.rnreirical windcws
Cross correlaüen
ü Above. 12 samples{48 msJ
E
* Below: 12 samplesi4S m=)
Length: t:4 I samples{§§m§]

t-
l*§,ant ü*dü :¡¡'l* fraqir

E:§r:sl L
Correlation Ouality
Ihe Correlation quali1t opti0n sets the correlation threshold at which ¡-
tracking willfail. Identrcal neighboring traces give a value of 1.0. The
Seed trace method has a default value 0f 0.5 and a range from 0 to 1.0.
The Adjacent parent method has a default value 0f 0.95 and a range
from 0.75 to 1.0.
These methods account for the drift in the correlat¡ng waveform

c0mpared to the waveform of the original seed trace, as the distance
between the waveform and the 0r¡ginal seed trace increases. ln this
case, a correlation quality less than 0.5 rs considered uncorrelated and,
consequently, the lowest correlati0n quality value avarlable is 0"75.
260. Seismic rterpretati0f Preparation Petrei Geophysics
L.
f
--
I=-*
--=
---
.-:-.:
¡¡;¡¡r¿¡ric¡ti',ritttlr.ttr.! chcck b¡x ccntrols rf the ivindow tracking
-S',
r; r ie 'eni arú\,e a¡d beiow the picked seed p0int. Toggling the
acx 0n means that the tracking is symmetrical;toggling it off
r_- ^^eans ihat the trackrng is asymmetrical.
"rcr.lcan enterthe distance above and belowthe seed p0¡nt by enterrng
f
I--<
e ¡Jmericalvalue or using the sllder bars. The values are gtven as the
r-l,r,ber of samples
f-
--.¿
The totalwindow length is defrned in the grayed out area named
Length. This value also is given as the number 0f samples.
f
The Cross correlatr0n rmage shows the horizon, seismic, and pickrng
parameters in relation to each other.
-'-¡
I--
f
I---
Constraints Tab
The Constraints subtab on the Autotracking tab has optrons for
l_-
lateral limits, vertical limits, using co-volume, and seed/locking.
f
E--
f
I--
f
---
f
r---
f
----
f
-r--
f
r--5
f
-.-5
I--
I-
Petrel Geophysics Se sm c lnterpretatlcr¡ Preparat 0n.261
J
f
)-J
:t
la--¡
_l
-J
lL-J
t--
:l
th-J
:t
¡--J
_l
-.l
lHr
L,,.-.A
_t
L-d
L¡
_l
l-a
_l
b-l
¡--J
laterial Limits
the Lateral limits area has these options: ¡-¡
L
. Boundary polygon: Allows you to specify a closed polygon
beyond which the autotracking rs not permitted to expand.
. Stop at visible faults: Allows y0u t0 use interpretation faults in §
the fault model to stop the autotracktng.
t-.¡
Vertical Limits
Ihe Vertical limits area has these options. *<
. Upper. Horizon above which the autotracking is not permitted
!"-
262. Selsmic Interpretatl0n Preparatlolr
L-¿
to expand. You can apply an offset to the upper horizon.
Lower: Horizon below whrch the autotracking is not permitted
to expand" You can apply an offset to the lower horizon.
Vertical range. Controls the vertical interval for the autotracked
horizon in project units. For example, if you specify a vertical
range from -1750 to -1790 ms, the resulting autotracked
horizon is limited to this vertical interval.
Trend data. A surface or another interpreted object that Petrel
will try and match (in shape) when tracking. Using this option
is recommended when trying to interpret a dipping event. The
seed expansion will take place only where the trend is defined.
Use Co-volume
When you select the (Jse co-volume check box, the autotracking uses
two seismic inputs instead of one. This area has these options:
. Signal feature: Controls the feature to be tracked for the
second volume. This volume can be either zero centric or
non-zero centric. This option functions the same as the signal
tracking feature of the primary volume.
. Seismic co-volume. Specifies the second seismic volume to
USE,
o Usage: Defines how to use the two volumes selected as input.
. Track if co-volume is inside value range. Finds the best
pick on the primary volume and uses this pick if the value
of its location in the co-volume is inside the value range.
. Track on best volume. Evaluates points on both volumes
and chooses the best evaluation.
. Try seismic volume then co-volume. Tries to track on the
primary volume first. lf no acceptable candidate for the
pick is found, it will try to track on the co-volume.
. Value range: Uses only values within the set range for the
co-vo lu me.
Seed/Locking
For 3D seeds, use the Seed/Locking area t0 determine what to do with
the existing interpretation. Most settings apply to both 2D and 3D
seeded autotracking. The lock and override filters are valid only for 3D
interpretation data.
Petrel Geophysics Seismic lnterpretatlon Preparat on . 263
L-..¿
Er
-l
-)
¡-J
This area has these options: Ll
o
l
l
Lock/override visible points: Uses all vlsible interpreted points
.
in the active window. b.-
Lock/override selected points: Uses only selected interpreted
points (for example, if you use the bounding box selection) in
¡L¡
the active window. The selected points will be a subset of all L
visible points.
. Visrble points: Uses all of the visible points in the current ¡H
interpretation as seed points. L
o Selected points. Uses the selected points in the current
interpretation as seed points lr-<
. Points satisfying filter: Uses an interpretation filter to
E
determine which seed points are used in auto tracking

. Lock/override filter: Uses only the interpreted points that ¡L-
L
match the selected filter. You select the filter by using the blue
arrow. The 3D interp inclusion filterfolder found under the
¡L--
lnterpretation folder provides the list of fllters that you can L
select.
¡ 0verride check box: Allows you to change between overriding lr¿
and locking interpreted points.
L
o The Max. vertical parameter: Controls how much the vertical
position is allowed to change from one trace t0 the next when lE-
L
autopicking along 2D lines. Picks jumping to a vertical position
above this vertical limit will be ignored dulng autotracking.
The search window used is two times the Max. vertical delta
¡--
L
value (that is, Max. vertical delta above and below the
.
reflector). The default value is set t0 two vertical data units.
3D Snap:Allows you to search within the defined Max. vertical
i:L
delta window for pornts defined as 3D seeds and snaps these
points to the selected Signalfeature. This button is used only t
on 3D seismrc data.
\
o lnstant undo and track: Available after a 3D autotracking has
been performed. Automatically displays any changes to the ¡--
L
autotracking parameters in the active window. This feature
will instantly undo the last autotracking step and redo a 3D
¡-
autotracking based on the new parameter settings. L.
. 3D Track: Starts autotracking using the specified parameters in
the Settings dialog box. 0nly 3D tracking is available.
tr
264 o Seismic lnterpretati0n Preparation
l--
¡-
r
E
f
I.
Paintbrush Autotracking in 3D Windows
click and hold the cr0pped-volume so that some seed pornts fallwtthtn
f
.J the area. Points are tracked outward from the seed points, limited by
the cursor box (cropped volume). Dragging the box enables you to track
horizons wherever the cropped volume goes wrthin the seismlc volume
f
I-4
This tool works in both 2D and 3D windows"
Procedure Performing Paintbrush Autotracking in a 3D

--.-,{ -
Window
1. Crop a small volume around the seismic horizon'
-, i{r'
'i' m
L-1 F+.
& ífr lnline 571

@ ui Hlitre 447
t Activate and display it in a 3D window with a partly

interpreted horizon.
ie.;.
a
J. Click Paintbrush autotracking
rrr rn the process toolbar
4 Drag the cropped volume from the top side around some
seedpoints to start the 3D paintbrush autotracking.
Seismic nterpretat 0n Preparation '265

'etrel Geophysics
¿
5. Ouality control the interpretati0n.

¡*
r-a
Paintbrush Autotracking ¡J.

Points are tracked outward from the seed pornts, limited by the active
box size. Dragging the cursor enables the autotracker to track a horizon
interpretation following the cursor path.
Active Box Autotracking

Drag a (rectangular)rubber band to capture seed points within its area.
Within the active box, the autotracker tracks the horizon outward from
the seed points, limited bythe active box size. This toolworks only in
the 2D window.
Autotrack lnside Polygon

Along a time slice, drawa polygon t0 capture seed points. When you
have finished drawing the polygon, double-click. The polygon area is
now tracked. This tool works in both 2D and 3D windows.
l-
\-_
\-
L--
¡{
\-
¡-
¡¡-
t-
t-
L
L-
266
' Seismic lnterpretation Preparation
Petrel Geophysics
t-
L.
-L__
a'
-L_j
f
I-d
Procedure
Autotracking
1 .
- Performing Box and Polygon Paintbrush
Activate a seismic v0lume in the lnput pane and display the

partly interpreted horizon in a 2D wnrdow.
|á:
i:i: -.§
i¡ lt#
iti:i!{rlj
i'i'
ri
2. Click Paintbrush autotracking ry . Paint the horizon

r nterpretation outwards.
3. Resize the parntbrush auto tracker by pressrng the + or - key.
Seismic nterpretat 0n Preparation. 267

J
-t
L_J
L-..¿
4. & . Drag an area around the
Click
seeds.
Active box autotracking
_l
r-J
ii
't:i
al,:
:_l
:l
h.-¡
-_l
¡.-J
iEf
5. Autotrack inside polygon

t#i O,r* a polygon and
i¿-.l
Click
double-click to track inside.
=-_l
¡--{
>
--/
)--i
t-
É
E
E
Lesson 3 Horizon Editing and Manipulation
-
- --.s ,:sson, you lvill learn about editing horizons and changing the
r s3 3'( settings.
Seismic Horizon Display Styles

-r: Settings dialog box for horzon interpretations changes, depending
: ^ ,', r
ch disptay window is active.
''ou can display 2D and 3D interpretations as points or lines. You can
sel the colot type,and size/width and dtsplay crossing points as
s'r,mbols (2D)or lines (3D).
Procedure Annotating a Horizon in an

- Displaying and
1. Display the horizon interpretation in the lnterpretation
window
Ee¡ja¡ *i$,S.*t
i arlü :s 57! €ü! E4! 5&1
[ 470 470 4?0 4lü l?ü
Petre GeophVslcs Seismlc lnterpretati0¡ Preparati0n . 269

J
f
2. 0pen the Settings dialog box for the horizon and click the
Style tab. I
r.--J
l--C
_l
-l
ih-J
l--{
¡Hf
Set the display style for 2Dl3D interpretation and crosstng

-_J
points.
l-¿
il aP Symbal: .H
§ne: 1&
Dia+*nat aless
..-..-.* : r.l
l-t;s
:l
>i
¡k¿
l¡-r 30 Linen¡Pe: --":'. Stileled )

I
V{idth: 2 lét
lL-
-
4. Choose the annotation to display on the seismic line.
A,nnotatrün
§ Nanre Color:
?
Font ; E{3 t=
t-
E:
+
.
270 Seisrnlc lnterpretation Preparation
r=
L.
Procedure Displaying and Annotating a Horizon in a 3D
-
1. Display the horizon in a BD window.
2 Set the display style for 3D interpretation
3. Manipulate the resolution slider bar.
ft Setrngs for'Se¡smic horizon 1
ff
: _ Restrict mode .l
2D interpretatioil -':
Cülor: EF*.ciiiEd
,9.i Lines Li¡e tvpe §olirl

width: -
,:-" Poinls sun¡bol: -2
.;_ l¡nÉ¡*.r, ;
§i¡e ;
\li¡ ed
r-1. . .
)
fti,n Mex
&ry....] L::L...,'r ,¡;;rr"l -i
Sersm c lnterpretati0f Preparatio¡ . Z7l

-
b-
Procedure Displaying a Neighboring lnterpretation

-
Activate and display a horizon in the lnterpretation window'
i-
272. Seismic lnterpretation Preparatlon

L_
2. 0n the Style tab, select Previous and Next to display
neighbor sections and set their style.
€ settiftgs tur'§eirmi{ h0¡¡zsn 1'
i¡litlim&.,;
2D ánd 30 i*terpreiaüon
Cól§r:
Neishbor sestiúns {:D only) - ' - ird

r, P'É,,,8,'i 1.rñr
.,/ Nen Color @ -
Lineirpe
widfi:
Navigate to the next lines
lnterpretation Editing
ln many cases, y0u might need to manually editthe interpretation to
clean up the picture before modeling the result further.
However, because an interpretation (and an instant quality c0ntrol 0f

the result in three dimensions)is quickto do in Petrel, deleting a larger t3 Always check to see
part of the interpretation and redoing it can potentially be just as which horizon or fault is
active (bold in the lnput
efficient. pane) before using undo/
redo.
The undo/red0 steps are limitless and are saved for each horizon. You
can retrieve them by activatrng the horizon. Note, howevef that they
are removed when the project is closed or saved.
Petrel Geophysics Seismic lnterpretation Preparatlon . 273

J
)
*,-dl
_i
--¿ I
J I
*
-,
F
:i--¿
H
-
z/
Undo (Ctrl + Z)/ Bedo (Ctrl + Y)
\*...
t-
Select by polygon and Bounding box select )

l--r
_L.
Selection Paintbrush
'!.
Parent-Child Editing
The autotracking uses a trace-to-trace meth0d of verifying and _¡-
expanding the seed point. When a point or a selection of points is
accepted, it becomes a parentto other potential child points that are }-
prcked from neighboring traces.
-¡.
selecting parent p0¡nts enables you to investrgate the path that the
t-
autotracker made to reach the selected point. Similarly, selecting child
points enables you to track subsequent points that originate from a
mrsrnterpreted Prck. l-
L
Petre Geophysics
274. Seismlc l¡terpretalion Preparati0n t-
¡-
Procedure Editing Parent and Ghild Points in an
lnterpretation
-
1 .Select the misinterpreted area and click on the Select single
N;i;l:':ii-i¿!
point rcon from function bar.
i,§ This works only for

autotracked horlzons.
2. Click Select parent po¡nt l:Ll and click a misinterpreted

point. The path back to rts original seed pornt turns yellow
(;§ C ick on the Select
single point lcon from
function bar before selecting
parent points.
3 Click Select child point {:l and click the first wrongly
tracked point along the path. All points originating from lt turn
Vellow.
Fetre Geophvsics s",,^ "op-o.io,

D"p".iorr275
J
:),.J
4
4 Delete the selection X. fn. yellow po¡nts are deleted'
-l
-J
LA
-l
L-
L..J
-_l
lL.J
-¡rl
v
I
lnspector Tool
informatlon about
Using the lnspector tool is a quick way t0 access
changes interactively.
objeJts in your windows and visuallze setting
ThL lnspector window displays detailed
forms, such as example histograms, charts,
information
and
in a variety of
tables'
v_¿
lnspector window and resize it' You also can c0py )

You can move the |-a
l-i
and paste all lnspector statistics.
Settings ) I
You can change how the lnspector tool looks with these options' L;-a
. Continuous mode: Displays a constant read-out
of objects lf
_1
this option is cleared, the lnspector shows object information L,¡
¡-
onlY when You click the object'
o Auto resize: lnstantaneously fits the height of the lnspector I
lEd
tool to the viewed content' ¡'
.Windowlinking:Allowsyoutolinkthelnspectoft0aSpeCifiC
to
window. This means that the lnspector will react only ¡--
L.
objectsinsidethelinkedwrndow.Tolinkawindow,activate
thé window that you wish to link and click the Link
button in
¡
the lnsPector window'
Transparency. Adjusts the background opacity of the
tr
lnspector window. Move the slider from slde-to-side to
change from transParent to oPaque' tr
tr
lt-
276. Sp .m;c lrlPrplPtar 0''l Ptepatat or
¡-
0pens the tool settings
Displays a constant read-out of selected objects
Adjusts the background transparency of the
Links the lnspector tool to a specific window or all windows
(optional)
Petre Geophysics Seisrnic nteipretation Preparation. 277

)
,-,J
_l
Procedure
1. - Using the lnspector Tool
From the View menu, open the lnspector tool.
-l
-.J
--J,
Fanes -_J
Tinr* player lasilgar
á
liiglhr! :irulal*r'lÉÉibár --]
L..J
2. Click an object. The lnspector window updates to display the
settings for the type of object that you select.
:-l
t-.J
I
¡ll--J
-/
J
t--¿
--l
>-)
--l
3.
w
Manrpulate the object propertres in the lnspector window
:
tL-
and visualize the changes immediately. I-¿
-L
i;.L.
E-
E
L,
E
L-
278. Selsmic lnterpretati0n Preparati0n Petrel Geoohvs,::

i=
L-
Petrel Geophyslcs Selsmlc Lf terpretatr0r Preparati0n . 279
-
Horizon Flattening in 2D
You can flatten individual lines on an interpreted horizon in the
lnterpretation and !ntersection windows. The interpreted horizon
does not have t0 be consistent over the entire line because petrel
allows for gaps in the interpretation, such as breaks over faults. These
-d
gaps are interpolated linearly; you can interpret on the flattened
sections -
ir=. ffi
! § :;i se¡silic
' S ii: t'mssé,§ e7 &§ s3 fft 699 ?1r 71i
, B iii /rF.F srrye,,iE/r*, tu-s r7§ ¡7e ¿i0 ¿?0 47a 470 qa 754
4?§
. ,@.y- ¡nereer;m OlA. r
' B y :O¡¡e¡o *¿*, ¡¡ss
'*:;jñffiEffi§§?.
.liir j Fe*ideFBEto¡t rti
--
ill i : Fa{ÍtiaieEieEuofr Z ffi
F¿ú[rfteFreÉúo¡f B
s
.' Faunrnrepreeoor4
". ¡lo 13
'&'¿ -;s
l&,. litiñe És
:
e
x
l* v Rine 4ñ
EDÁ
:
L"
Fi-
i&lF@§i-§--E;",¡
iffir¡*c+... .. :.]]]:]:: .:] s
"§
.-1
&
ry Add,?u!di¡Erir.rür¡¡ +:ñÉr¡c*_
l-a
L.
'f t¡q úF¿ri.ns
'T l1:EaGiáiicn ir$:gs. , ,
s :is§: i¡ie.p.é::¡il1n foj ¡cr:fe su.rey i:¡j f1
,¿
L.
-4
h-
-,_<t
h.-
F
L.-.
t-
L--
280 . Seismic Interpretation Preparation
l--¡
L
Procedure Flattening 3D Volumes
-his -
procedure shows you howto flatten 3D volumes on interpreted
1,r,'._."1ii
:|::' :... .||
i]i ] .... ,
"orizons There are two ways to flatten a seismic cube.

1. Usrng the Make/edit surface process, convert the holzon
interpretation to a surface.
2. Flatten a seismic cube:
a. Activate the seismic cube that you wish to flatten.
b Right-click the surface and choose Flatten active
seismic volume. A vlrtual flattened seismic volume
named Flattened 1 ls created. Also, a new folder named
Flattening surfaces is created. Use this folder to track
the hrstory of flattening operations.
3. Right-click the seismic cube in the lnput pane and select
lnsert flattened volume. A virtual seismic volume, Flattened
2, is created (but not yet flattened).
i.---1.1,?.,f,,$1,.,, ¡r..,,..,iir r¡rrj,, i rr.:i,:::r,i:,:,.:jr:,riri*:ri:
- f¡üt
¿ SI ? Seisnic
, -4§ +rñbs-es
& : f , Ir¡rto, u tr*, nr¡* i,n §tré! s
Fr vl lñteryrebrion blde. 1
" E ;t ,?rs-pÁn/c
,#ir.ffi ..
q ..: I ii" §\c{Lse:ii.gs...
II
fay )ñ i. !:Nr1:c
Xl! z) : §End
L¿ 1;iriere ilcil S:!Llic
L' :-.R. íLr:r !PiÉ.ii.il .
n i{rai:... a.f!:
ü irs¡iE f Ér!,§cai sEicr :§qÉ¡d
& :di: q;eb;i..ilr :abiÉ.
Á
fái.u:¡:c:
r,ir!!iF!¡üql". acii¡ese iEcLrisiJÉl
:ffirarcr;e ., I ari¿:¡d tÉr!.q,f-1
e ¡D¿r. ic cajer:
§c.:5y nár¡É!
§¡
!G
lii tciL:¡E 3-. ¡trrrÉs . . .
ET
fJ
d a:€ai¿ !:fLr:u:é: l¿¡i+iLC¡(
B {ie;is ¡iÉrqreiárir rrl.rlc!!
-..,,, ".------.,----.-..t ii Sur!¡ÉJ' ¡tráaaql=i,,,
ioÉP.oe* tr ;r:Erp.e:stlo¡ ranrqp..
; i;t;i 18..i¡rEci.r,s5,¡! iiie! ..
i+ tmpot aat á;i l¡sFfl ir,li¡ e i.ieaseailcil
, Srdisráphy !nsei .i.ssilnE inierseciion
. Geophysics 'dl L
P Seismic i * :ns+r 1ar¿ sll.e i¡tE'!e(iic¡
ffi vokrme at § i{ex,rie.5*ii.:r alBre
!5 srriace
iü Autonra
lvi Llake
ffi Geoba¿y I
i:e¡É:ále aUeE tA)Jeui .
EÉ ldakÉ rÉsr Lri¡Eiái? ErJa: :.JaE 1¿,au:
Seismic nterpretat on Preparation o 281

J
l
;-a
l
Á
i..J
r. §& l-e.l lntery surv*y indusiott §llets
i. §F üj faterpretaticn Íolder 1
. B i*
'#ivim
sü Seisrr,te -J
._l
t--J
@ i-: lnline 635
T..J
&§ il lnline 635
t@ i_j ]fi-inea7{] .]
¡--J
4. ln the Settings dlalog box for the new volume, open the
)
I
tab and insert a Reference surface for flatteni l--.d

L
é §eJtings lor"Flattened 1' I
-r
¡--d
-/
l-t -/
--l
Objecis iB conyeri iniatten sPace
H I
)
h-
---¿
I-r
L.
l--
L
t-
E-
L-
b,
282. Seismlc lnterpretatiotr Preparati0n L-

\-
Take one of these actions to actrvate interpretation objects:
o ln the lnput pane and click .t'-i to insert the objects into
the table.
o Activate lhe lnterpretationfolder and click New fault
-:-
.
interpretation i& , New horizon interpretation ú -,

or New grid interpretat¡on l§ ]
Click Apply. The seismic volume is flattened on the reference

su rfa ce.
Click Re-flatten, Un-flatten, and Flatten to flatten and
unflatten the objects in the list.
r,.j
_,;
Hr{"-"- ] i;;.6r" I 7la§p.,
:ai§
@lfg--j E*-."r--.r
This figure shows the unflattened surface (left) and the

flattened surface (right).
Se sm c lnierpretatlo¡ Preparatl0n . 293

-)>-.4
)
t-J
Flattened 0biects
You can convert existing interpretation objects ln the flattened space. _l
--J
These objects can be fault, horizon, and grid interpretations (which are
sub-objects of the horizon interpretation associated with one seismic
survey only) and surfaces or p0¡nts.
_l
--¿
You can create new lnterpretati0n objects (faults, horlzons, and grtd I
interpretattons) and interpret them directly in the flattened space.
A history of the flattened ob.¡ects ls stored on the History tab in the

-¿ i
Settings dialog box.

*-/
lnterpretation Filters _¿
You can filterthe interpretation 0n any one of many parameters Use =-
the filters to display the rnterpretation and to define points as seeds for
autotracking and locking pornts, or to select them for reinterpretation. y--r'
You also Can USe the filters with the Bounding box select opt¡on t0
delete specific parts of an interpretation. --/
l--a
b-
Fllters related to interpretations are located ln the Sersmic main folder
0r y0u can find them under each horizon rnterpretation obiect in the _-¿
lnput pane. lnfhe lnterp survey inclusion filtersfolder, you can filter
,-./
L
cells belonging to the different surveys.
_-,/
All interpretation folders contaln 3D interp inclusion fllters. Choose one l-r
L
of these types of ftlters.
.
.
3D autotracked: Contains all seeded 3D autotracked
r nterpretatr ons.
2D autotracked: Contalns all 2D autotracked rnterpretations
tr
o
(seeded 2D and guided).
Manual: Contains all manual interpretations.
tr
. lmported/converted: Contains all interpretations imported from
OpenSpirit files or pre-Petrel 2007.1 (point data sets) files
converted to the current Petrel format.
t-
L--
k-
284. Seism c lnterpretati0n Preparatl0n
Petrel Geocr
F
ii 3D inÍerp i*c/¡¡-sr'¿:¡¡ fi?e¿s
6iá t Jü aufcbetA'Éd
-í. r !L] EttülrctkPd
§" Qj ¿,rani/s¡
i
+i /rnsn¡fed.¡br:¡¡ r¡erted
. ;.h" v Seisrnic horizon I
$1 ¡1; 3D Cube
ln the example drsplayed in the frgure, the 3D autotracked horizon

rnterpretatron filter is cleared.
Selsm c iterpretatio¡ Preparatl0f . 285

J
>-J
-J
t-J
lnterpretation OualitY Filter
The 0utput attrrbutes are created durlng 3D horizon autotracking -J
--a
Procedure Using the lnterpretation Ouality Filter _l
-
1. From the lnput pane, under the horizon interpretation' display -
the output attributes created during autotracking'
, t& ig"1 Seisrñic horizsn 1 F..J
>
, ffi iil 3tr Cube
tI i* T1¡vr
HM iJ Autotracker: llnnñdence -¿
>,,,.¿
§lI {i Autotracker: AmPliiude -
r4r {} ,qr*totracker: Úistance
¿
2. ln the horrzon Settings dialog box on the Filtering tab' Á
ch0ose 0ne attribute to filter. The histogram updates'
d
'-;-';*'::i * r ^.,**,* ,. " ', ;:*'"::l: r bd ,F*@ r mo*q ¡'s
i o4T
,- "* """,P k * J¿ k ¡ - L ; ñ r
';-*--"- -
-
l,*:------ii,ili
ilililirir
: : l' -._:::_.':.:ok¿
_.1
l-.a
[:
_\=
r illlr'§ : r
[:
ffii
hi &§ .¿
,¿
\
1
,
re**pffiúa
ffil
,& rl- df f "i¡-w,mffii.
,ffi,
'ffi ::
'.,.gt
¿l
F-
L-
l-
lri
<
¡-
!t
tr
Left-click an area of the histogram to filter it away from the
display.
T-
tr
286. Se -m,c In.erpte,at;or Prepara'ror L.--
E-
--4.-d
%
Horizon 0perations: Bulk Shift
Before you interpret a horizon, you can c0rrect problems, such as the
vertical mis-positionrng of seismic data or datuming problems, by
applying a bulk shift to the interpretation that was done previously. This
horizon operation shrfts the data into the correct position.
Procedure Bulk Shifting a Horizon

1. - lnput
ln the pane, 0pen the Settings dialog box for the
horizon.
lf,,.[-.1*H-i.li..¡i.=.:.::.:r::=,i.:**....-.4,i
.1"1"1-Hi,,r,.r,:..,,,,,:
¿ &! v ¡elsmlt
", iS ü L{:¿sss.s
@ I v I l*te.rpsrrr*y ¡n¿-/asrbn,f¡la¡-r
, üiF t{: xnterpretaiion folder I
mJ jü nle{p rn,:luÉJon Élleís
¡ |k i¡ Sersmic hori¡on 1
, $l iul
¡.'¿ 2D Ij s',",rsÉ::lgs...
ñ\'l¿r¿-iff.,i
fi; á'--^ i.\j :"-::!É':'irs
Ac- ,:re sersm ;
.
ffi
.
ñ- sen,l:¡ !':rrli¡
l*UJ 1É:i É', e - C,-, 51
E '¡.ts.-'. ,
§ freale:¡¿+ lncai r
-
? 0n the Operations tab, expand lhe Arithmetic folder and

selectZ=Z+Constant.
Se smic lnterpretatl0n Preparat of .287

Define the c0nstant value and click Run. The horizon shlfts
vertrcally.
.E
L.
t-
L.
¡-
l¡.
C
L
l-
ü-
L
288. Selsmic Interpretation Preparation
Petrel Gecp-"-.,:
tr
-&-
Petrel Geophysics Seismic lnterpretation Preparati0n . 289
J
-J
.-J
:l-J
¡-J
Horizon 0perations: Smoothing
There are two smoothing methods available for horizon
L.J
i nterpretation:
o Gaussian: Use this method when you need t0 set the
.
number of iteratlons.
Median: Use this method when you need to set the number
of iterations as well as the radius.
-l
--J
-.-¿
liÍr**§.T'
il: -* ::i
il.iÉ!¡l:§;$
Procedure
1. Expand
Smoothing a Horizon
- the Seismic operationstolder and select 1
b-J
^_l
Gaussian or Median smooth'
l§ lettings für'3S sel§ffilc' ¡r-J
:l* Creete ¡nte.pr€totian attnb§te

:-l
l--J
*)
iffi
ru llledi¡n s¡¡ath
>-r
Ll
)
L--.d
\. I
i:l# Converl FeiñtslFly§an§¡su.faces .J

L¿
ii f;
tIl &i_t-
V--lmrty co*r'eeior
Dsmain cünte§ien LI
2. )
For Median smooth, set the number of lterations and l-¡
L.
Badius.
l-¡
br
'<
I-<
Jb.
_¿
l-.-
t
¡-
5,
290. Se,smir IntPrprelat 01 Prepatat or

tt
E=
This figure shows results from the Gaussian
smooth method
(left) and the Mediam smooth
merhod (right).
Petrel GeophVsics
Seismic lnterpretation pr.parit,on . Zgl
_-
lesson 4 Horizon lnterpretation Surface ,a-

-
Conversion and Surface Attr¡butes Generation
ln this lesson, you will learn about generating a surface, using
the
smoothing process, and calculating surface attributes.
---
Make Surfaces Process
0ften seismic interpreters wantto generate a quick map to see the
trend of c0nt.urs and their interpretation. This map also helps them
é
to identify area of interest so thatthey can do a more detailed
interpretation. You can create qurck maps for surfaces and display
them in 2D,3D, and Map windows. you also can customize these
maps with user-defined color schemes and contour intervals.
,=,
fhe Make surface process under the t|titities f older offers =
different algorithms for the different types of input data that you
can use for surface generation. Then you can use these surfaces to
calculate surface attributes and for other processes in petrel. -
ln this lesson, you will create a surface from a horizon
.-¿
*-1
interpretation, but you also can create surfaces from points, well I
tops, polygons, or images. Refer to the petrel Help for more )

information about other types of input data and further details on t,,--r
¡¡. I
fhe Mqke surface process. I
)
t--{
L-¡
Procedure Generating a Surface -]
1. -
ln the Processes pane,
edit,surface process.
utilities foldet open the Make/ i--
2. From Main input, drop in the interpreted horizon that you
,]
wish to convert into a surface. L-¡
J
s-
¡-.-¿
l,4ain input: iq * Seisnir i.orizor l _l
L-¿
fg ii l.lanie. ,;*,i;;¿
F: Run for all main inpr:t in
' i I the same {older
_l
l:l
§Ugqedsstingsfffimir¡Eut ? L-¿
292 o Seisr c rlp 0'eTd io, Prepar.,io.
Petre GeophVS cs
Click Suggest sett¡ngs from input. Petrel suggests the
gridding algorithm based on the chosen input data.
Rmult rurfam:
tnDijt -, á:: Elsfrlt T.il;lr i;]
lilarn ¡
ii1
i
§.,1 lt"t*,::!,,,::li
:'il rr
t*- Run f¡r ali main inpL:t in
tsound¡ry. l=), I-l the ramefalder
taufi cemÉr : ¡,
l¡nes.Jp(1[,gof s ::L .
§rlq8d dttng§tsm inp{n -
0n the Geometry tab, specify the grid outllne and

resol ution,
r ris figure shows the origrnally interpreted horizon (left) and the
surface created from the horizon interpretation (right).
:l': i:1,.'.S CS Selsnr c lnterpretatlon Preparation. 293

J
,- : Procedure Smoothing a Horizon
I
4
á
_l
-".
lJ *l
lñr 1 .
-
ln the Surfac e operations foldet select Smooth'
rtr:T*I-r
2.
3.
Define lterations and Filter width parameters.
Click Run.
üF+ertti+ns
:l-l
-,--J
L-J
>¿
ü*r,*,r.sl td¡{ü*ea ^_l
ü! ffi &rgi*'furuti*r*
ü y-_!f I i,rr';atr; r* ts*r*til;na
i§
H
ff
ffi
ffi
h
F*tis.;* *4t*t*
Eli*,i¡¿{*n**r*
Sudar*t udsr,,* *§,*¡sti$rs
-J
t¡-J
m F* $ir,*",hcxtiu, fun+ti*rrs
ür
F ffi
§ ffi
fr t*n+r*r *É*rstie,r*
P*ints +r.erati*n'+
Sur{at* og*ratir:re
-J
t¿
tE Hrt:t+ sric
'l b,.J
$r,"q*-'ih
, ,-
^,
r* É-tJrilqJáte
I
-)
; 1L ErtruEe.luie'+ithi¡ L*'+r'**,t'
: B Fsiiit.ist66t L.--
, S üin¿¿ir¡,,+tt+
: S Eirsql*
-"1
ÑE
E!ü E.\t'Br1{
r 'ffi §r¡¡otr
. Sll F*fir*
, :ütt R*s*n:pl*
; .dL Fiir I :
l-¿
-]
i;i--l ¡--a
I
_t
r
-:i"-:!
l¡.i
t¿ue'; t{q§; f§,§e'r{.:
:
H
I
t--,
294 . Seisr¡ic 'tle.pretat 0't Preparat o'
*-J
L
This figure shows the origrnal surface for smoothing (left) and the
surface after the smoothing process (right).
Seisnrlc nterpretati0n Preparation' 295

J
-J
,r--J
l
>.J
Procedure Greating an Attr¡bute Map Based on
l:: " *-+i:
iil - :!
¡ir 'q i
-
Surface 0perations
:l
1-.J
§:I::¿==5
1. Display an unsmoothed surface in a 3D window.
2. Rlght-click the surface and select Greate/Update dip
angle and az¡muth.
@i-iffi :)*.J
reü,r195
tl! Shcr
m
g §erd f0 -tt-Jis
m Rei.ifl'e ?ros stEdio
á
la Erurd,,. atrl-E
:J
-l
frests rÉ* lo{=l calÉ. leg*nc
,& fCii glslral .alof table . :J
¡{ Del€t€ ., ,
¡l!, aal.LritJ"..
Ll:l aop, at !u¡J3d€ rttlibute >.-J

á§
a{pir rsgul¡r rBri3c: id¡ta rr,l}i
ReserÉrnte
-_l
2t
o areat€ !udr.e 99gE
-l
¡---J
I
és 1ft5€á riEs nitribL.te
É lreáiElugdate dip n§glr nad a¡il¡§th h
3. Expand the surface rn the lnput pane t0 drsplay new

surface attrlbutes.
,.ffifilffi
tT {-l rrur
LI
l-¿
I
& {"* Brp ansle -¿
t-a
& i-i mp a¡¡¡x*tt
This figure shows the unsm0othed surface (left) and the
new surface attributes (right). ¡E-r
--a
I
l-:
L-
----/
L'-
t-
E-
.
296 Seismic lnterpretati0n Preparati0n
k=
Surface Attr¡butes
Ihe Surf'ace attributes process is comparable fo fhe Volurue
ctttríbute process ln the sense that attrlbutes are organized into ,-l You can use both
surfaces and horizon
c Ia sses.
interpretations ln the
c e attri bttte,t Pr0CeSS
You can calculate surface attributes based on a single horizon, Surfa
between two honzons, orfrom (time)depth to depth. You also can

capture specific parts of the signal ln a time window or an event.
This sectlon offers a brlef dlscussion on the functionalrty and

procedure for generating surface attributes. Because lt ls beneficial
for your rnterpretations, you should explore the various options.
For further details, see the Petrel Help.
Procedure Generating Surface Attr¡butes

1. 0pen-Surface attrlbutes in the Processes pane.
I ¡ GeoPtry't¡c*
i sr-
lEg Seismic interPretation
I H
;@ l:Éffi|
lrolume attnbutes
2 Choose a surface attribute ln the library.

,J. Choose the lnput seismic.
4. Choose from the optrons to create new, add, or append to
existing attrbute.
:$ Sur-face attnbr*tes
ht¡ke srrf=r:e ¡ttrib'ut¿ ;

t_*_.*_***-
l,4ll r I
lnput selsmic.
i liumber,:l negati\re zeto ffosslnu§

I llumb*r r,f Fositive Ee¡o Ero§sings
i l{umher,rf ?Erro crotsrñgs =16-,ia
Add to rurface
Standard deviation ,:f amplrtude

Add to nev+ surlac* EMS Amplitude Surface
lr rm nf ¡.¡nlitr-rf15----,-.----*-
Append to attribr"rte
Seismic lnterpretatl0n Preparat 0n . 297

:=¡:hislcs
Define Window specification or specify from which
horizons to calculate the attrtbute.
Fepeated tündows
6. Expand the surface in the lnput pane t0 display the

attribute. (The image shows the BMS surface )
ü* # ffi HilS Amplitude surtece

, tI Ü l'n¡r
:§lIffi HmsAmplitude
Petrel Geophysics
298 . Seismic lnterpretati0n Preparati0n
Exercises lnterpreting Horizons
-
"'ihese exercises, you will get hands-on experience with a simple
f---¡
IE-.¡
^¡r'izon interpretation workflow. These exercises show you the basic
s::ps that you will have to consider or perform whenever y0u are
.ierpreting horizons in Petrel.
)uring interpretation, any interpreter will use a combination of

1,1.i:'
autotracking or manual interpretation, depending on the type of §l Bight-click on the
cata available, the subsurface geology, scope of work, and lnput pane and select
Collapse all folders
accuracy/details required. However, in this case you will be taken (recursive) or Expand all
ihrough each procedure one-by-one to make sure that the folders (recursive).
differences in each are highlighted, enabling you to better use these
iechniques in your workflows.
fiefer to the Appendix for a list of seismic interpretation shortcut

(eys.
Using a Simple Horizon lnterpretation Workflow

1. 0n the Processes pane, activate fhe Seismic
interpretatiotx proceSS.
2. From the Window menu, insert a new lnterpretation :l
window. §§ Try opening an
3. Expand the Sersmic main folder and the seismic survey Interpretation window by
right-clicking on a seismic
from which you wish to display the seismic line. line (in-line/cross-line or a
4. Display cross-line 470 in the lnterpretation window. 2D line) and selecting 0pen
5. From the lnsert menu, select New interpretation folder. interpretation window.
This step is necessary only for this exercise to ensure that

you keep the work that you do separate and arranged. ln a
routine workflow, this step might not be necessary.
6 Go to the Settings dialog box for the lnterpretation folder
that you created.
7 . 0n the lnfo tab, rename this folder S imple Hori z on
Workflow fofder.
B. Bight-click Simple Horizon Workflow folderand use the
menu to insert two new horizons.
Seismic lnterpretati0n Preparation . 299

J
t-1J
Define Window specificati0n 0r specify from which

-J
--J
horizons to calculate the attrlbute.
l
E-J
--¿
t_l
-]
-"1
---,.¿
>
I
F.ryq-] Eq¡ll¡]ry:e.] E.
6. Expand the surface in the Input pane to display the

attribute. (The image shows the RMS surface.) !.-
+
---=
-
ü* €l Üj Hl,,l§ Amplitude surlace
; tI * rtr'r
'flI§ HmsAmplitude
!--
=
r
\-
Exercises Interpreting Horizons
-
ln these exercises, you will get hands-on experience with a simple
f
I---¡ horizon interpretation workflow. These exercises show you the basic
steps that you will have to consider or perform whenever y0u are
Ir--¿ rnterpreting horizons in Petrel.
f During interpretation, any interpreter will use a combination of

autotracking or manual interpretation, depending on the type of
data available, the subsurface geology, scope of work, and
,lll
{l§ Right-click on the
lnput pane and select
Collapse all folders
accuracy/detarls required. However, in this case you will be taken (recursive) or Expand all
---¿ through each procedure one-by-one to make sure that the folders (recursive).
differences rn each are hlghlighted, enabling you to better use these

techniques in your workflows.
Befer to the Appendix for a list of seismic interpretation shortcut

keys.
Using a Simple Horizon lnterpretation Workflow

1. 0n the Processes pane, activate fhe Seismic
interpretation Process.
2. From the Window menu, insert a new lnterpretation
:,,ii
window. t§ Try opening an
Interpretation window
Expand the Seismic maln folder and the setsmic survey
bY
3.
right-clicking on a seismic
from which you wish to display the seismic line. line (in-line/cross-line or a
4 Display cross-line 470 in the Interpretation window. 2D llne) and selecting OPen
interpretation window.
5 From the lnsert menu, select New interpretation folder.
This step is necessary only for this exercise to ensure that
you keep the work that you do separate and arranged. ln a
routine workflow, this step might not be necessary.
Go to the Settings dialog box for the lnterpretation folder
that you created.
7 . 0n the lnfo tab, rename this folder simple Hori zon
Workflow folder.
B Bight-click Simple Horizon Workflow folderand use the
menu to insert two new horizons.
Seismlc lnterpretation Preparation . 299

J
l
.-¿
{§
.'
Always ensure that
the correct process, wlndow,
From the Seismic interpretation toolbat insert two more
horizons. These horizons also wlll appear tn your new
folder if that folder was active/bold when you inserted the
:i
:I
§-d¡
and folder is activated. new horizons.

I
10 Rename the new horizons based on the horizon

interpretation techniques:
É
-¡
. 3D autotracked horizon
. 2D autotracked horrzon
o Guided autoLracked horizon >
o ManualIy int.erPreted horizon'
You also can change the name 0f the horizons on the lnfo
tab in the Settings dialog box. -
,¡ # § §de *kr,i¡*¡ lTs*dtsrfdds
t' §fu ill .Is*xesp,**dx*r¡#*s >
& i.-i :* *x*'lt***** nuttu*
q' 20 a¡o¡¡cited hoÍtctl
'rii:
i-: *¡¿ueca**la*e¿ltotl¡*n >
€* n M*x.*J§esp{Etid h§ri¿ün
I
ffi §*tti*gn É*r'3D autotr*ckÉd heriz*n' >

§§iS t*. i
j:::i!
I ¡,t=*", ffii >

C¡lor:
rIL
Type:
b-l Er
Domain: tJ Elerati+ntine tdet
,i:;;,:'.
+
11 0n the Functi0n t00lbar, click !nterpret grid horizon (H) ---
ri;'
(3 You can switch iB, tn.n click one of these four icons, depending 0n h0w h=
-¿
between drfferent techniques you wish to interpret y0ur h0r¡z0n 0r at what point you wish
on the same horizon at anY
time. to combine these technrques..--
. 3D seeded autotracking ié
. 2D seeded autotracking i"S
. Guided autotracking i.{,,.-
oManual interpretation i*Y*.
-
12. Go to cross-line 470 and interpret different events using
different methods based on their contlnuity and quality. To
meth hon
Petrel Geophysics
300. Seismic lnterpretati0n Preparatlon
\-
=
13. At the intersection of cross-line 470 and in-line 590,
interpret these events:
o l§ Make sure the
3D autotracked horrzon at 035 ms (peak)
-1
horizon you want to interpret
. Manually interpreted horizon at -1330 ms (peak) is bold in the lnput pane.
. 2D autotracked horizon at-1 870 ms (peak)
. Guided autotracked horizon -2015 ms (peak).
For this exercise, use default parameters for autotracking.

You wrll work with prior specificatlons of the autotracking
parameters later in the exercises. The manual
rnterpretation allows you to virtually draw over the horizon
ln the general intersection player toolbar, enter 25 for the
increment and work across the cube to pick your horizons.
#*#e&#&ici;;
Press N or double-click to break your pick across the fault.
Display the faults that you have interpreted.
Use a seismic ghost curve to help you pick the same event
across the fault. To erase any pick, click the Eraser icon.
Petre (jeophVS cs Selsm c nterpretati0n Preparatl0¡ .301

JÉ--
_l
-,.-1
19. To help you pick the setsmic events, swltch between
different seismic templates from the Selsmic interpretation
toolbar.
_l
\-{
20.
21
Change the color by sliding the color table bars.
r, ilGj *¡.,'.,;:-. ülÉ!IS*isr'i¿ (deiaul:i
Change the display scale. Press Ctrl+ ShiÍt, hold down the
_l
b-¿
left mouse button, and drag the mouse over the area that
-)
you wish to display.
')) View the interpretation by inserting 3D and 2D windows
,--¿
from the Window menu and linking them to a visual
group, as discussed in Module 2. -]
r¡-J
Durrng horlzon picking, make composite lines in the
lnterpretation window using the icons in the Function
toolbal as discussed in Module 2. >-á
_l
l
Setting up Horizon Tracking Parameters >,.-¿
ln this exercise, you will learn how to set tracking parameters for
the automated horizon interpretation. These parameter are >-a
important because they are key to good results for automated
horizons. Setting and changing parameters are vitalfor allforms of
autotracking including Seeded 3D, Seeded 2D, and Guided
-Ll
-l
a utotracki ng.
1. Activate lhe Seismic interpretatio¡? process from the --/
Processes pane.
2. lnsert a new horizon and name it hori z on- -
tracking_parameters. ¿
iFi:.
il 3. Bight-click on the horizon-tracking-parameters horizon and ¡
ll Autotracking
select Settings.
--.,: The -=r
ts
i-,"""-
tab has been modified for 4. 0n the Settings dialog box, open the Autotracking tab.
Petrel 2013.1
!-
.'
F
302. Seismic nterpretati0n Preparation Petrel Geophysics
L-
=
I
a-
-E:*¿
I--
eurey É*sic &l

F's* e tesh§
t_{l se*es*xm: ,?* r;

il]'f¿h6wr9e: .1 ri l! ,,i
i}wxwrc*¡
fu.&¡sl -...
...te;lr¡r* i ¡.t¡:
(h,
{r!s§&É ffiÉ
l*Iül;l-l
, ttl
,
+Fkr
,]t
¡ ) ) ;fGC
:{l §pwapr* B.}*&* § §r-r*rd"-
I . I ü**n¡¡a fw &p¡qg ñdei@
Id Li¡e rrtds ftaiftm§

üsrd*er$h: *uai*u
i.,is
{orde¡meud*y: -.. - ......--..j-}
r.J i.:
iJl §sm*lissi*añd§*
l,;
il i&orer ¡! §ffidsa.t*ru]
at Éelou: i¿ w6m{4*m)
By default, the active seismic v0lume is selected. you

can
change the seismic volume by making the seismic
cube
bold in the !nput pane and dropping it onto the
Autotracking tab.
5. Select values or priori4t, euality, and Signal feature.
f
6. 0n the Parameters subtab, spec¡fy the Seid confidence

percent, depending 0n how strong the
amplitude is of the
seismic event that you w¡sh to autotrack as your
horizon.
Petrei Geophystcs
Seismic lnterpretation p,epiñt on. 30e
.I
>--
-J
For example, rf your average amplitude
selecting 30% seed confidence, you are
value is 100' by
implying that any
amplitu;e value below 30 should not be considered

in the
l
{i
1 .
autotracking.
View your amplitude value range'
is acttve
_l
b-J
a. Make sure that the lnterp.retation window
b.
c.
Click Select/Pick mode i h
Drag the curs0r over the seismic event
that you wish to
_l
and time/
autotrack. lnformation such as the amplitude
depth of the event is displayed 0n the
information bar.
0biect
-l
L.,-J
v_-l
--¿
ü
¿
>-¿
b
lL
the amplitude
B. Further limit your autotracklng by specifying
value range for better autotracking c0ntrol" b
is a dipping
9. lf the seismic event that Y0u are autotracking
reflector, select Optimize for dippittg
refiectors 'lhis
optron helps to fine tune the autotracking' 3
10 Click APPIY
(Ctrl+C and Ctrl+V)'
11 .
Make á óopy of your horizon
pane and keep
h¡< -
12. Leave the copied horlzon in the lnput
to make it bold
working on the original horizon Remember
parameters
13. For betier results, further limit the autotracking
a. Select t/se waYelet ffacking'
b. Select a value for the Correlate with field from the
droP-down list.
c. Use the slrder to set the Correlation
quality'
Petrel GeoPh'!
§
rf'
I.
E ¡
14. Use different options for constraints 0n the Constraints
a-
subtab to Iimit y0ur autotracking.
'15. t§ lt is always useful to
Go to the lnterpretat¡on or 3D window and display the
-.i
keep a copy of your original
seism¡c section where you w¡sh to g¡ve y0u first seed point horizon with the initral
for autotracking. parameters because it can
f-
-.-
| 1 6.
Click lnterpret grid horizon (H) e, then select rhe
autotracking type.
help you compare the results
between d fferent options.
Then, you can keep the
f-
Ir-_/1 17. lf you are dorng Seeded 3D autotracking, pick (using closest match to your model
and discard the others.
manual, guided or 2D autotracking method) some cross_
lines and in-lines with a co,arse- glid over the cube, then
click the 3D Track button i* BD rnck
in the Settings
dialog box" This step ensures that your picks are honored
as seed points and can Iimit the time that you spend quality
checking the autotracked horizon.
18. lnsert a new horizon and name it horrzorr
autotrackinq parameters 2.
19 Use other parameters and autotrack the same event that
you tracked previously in this exercise.
20 Compare the results.
Editing Horizon lnterpretations Manually and

Automatically
When attempting t0 constrain the tracking parameters to the
extreme, the automatic interpretation often will not be performed"
Sometimes, a pragmat¡c approach is better when deciding
how
much effort t0 use 0n automatic interpretation vs. results
editing.
This exercise shows you howto do manualediting as wellas
a
more efficient automatic editing
1. Use Ctrl + C and Ctrl + V t0 copy and paste a seeded
3D
autotracked horizon from your project.
2 Rename the copy Hori zon edrt.
3 Display the horizon in a 2D window and an lnterpretation
window.
4 Tile the two windows and link them to the same visual
group. Do not forget to activate the cursor tracking
for both
windows.
5 Make Horizon_edit active.
o. Activate the 2D window
Per,e Geophysics
Seismic Interpretatlon Preparat 0n. 305
É.
¡--
7. Us-e- Bounding box select ifi or Select by polygon
iÍiü to Oraw a rectangular boundary around an area that ¡-
L
you wrsh to edrt.
B. Delete the points by clicking Delete ñ"
9. Use the interactive Eraser (Shift+X) iB" to delete a part

of your interpretation. You can change the eraser size by
pressrng the plus (+) and minus (-) keys" L-_
10. Use Undo (Gtrl+Z) *

and Redo (Gtrl+Y) ' .
11 Activate or lnsert a new 3D window. i;:ri L.

L
12. Display Horizon-edit a¡d use Bounding box select 'l-h,

Select by polygon ii.th, o, Selection paintbrush :,:E :to L.-
a
select multiple interpreted points.
13 Use Delete S rn the process actions bar to delete points

d" to reinsert the deleted points. L.
I
14 Click Undo
15. Make a copy of the autotracked horizon and rename it
Hori z on_Parent/Chi f d. L-
L,-
16 View the interpretation horizontally from east 0r west.
Check for areas of misinterpretation.
5-
17. ActivateSelectsingle point § and clickSelect ¡r-
t3 Parent/child ecliting r'*l
Patent Points 'sil
works only for autotracked
horizons 18.
.
ln the 3D window, select a point within the area where the

E
L
interpretatron is incorrect. All of the points on the tracking
path between the selected point and the seed point are
b-
L
activated (marked yel low).
19. 0uality control the highlighted path of the interpretation
li§ Cl¡ct on the Select
against the seismrc section to check exactly where the ¡¡-
¡-
single point icon from the autotracking process failedto follow the right reflector.
function bar before selecting
parent points.. 20. Click Select child points {rl and click the failure point.
IL
All interpreted points inherited from the failed point are -t
activated.
21. Delete the selected points. Again y0u can undo the /"-
-b
22. Saue your project.

:-
l"-
5-
306. Seismic lnlerpretatl0n Preparati0¡ Fetre Geira'

iL-
L
f'r_*
I
<
-
Horizon 0perations: Bulk Shifting a Horizon
lnterpretation
I'
E.
There are more than 75 different operations that you can do on
lonzon interpretations in Petrel. This exercise gives some
a-
r,-_ :xa m ples.
1. ln the lnput pane, copy and paste 3D autotracked horizon
to create a copy of it.
I.
-,-
2.
3.
Hename the copy Horizon
Expand Horizon_A_shifted and open the Settings dialog
box for the 3D seismic object.
A shifted.
a-
--
r-_-
4.
5
0n the Operations tab, expand fhe Arithmetic
0perations folder and selecfZ=Z+ Constant.
Enter 5 0 in the Constant field and click Run. The horizon
r_- interpretation is shifted 50 ms upward.
f
-
<
L'
E.
I. *
1_
f
L=-
f
--*
E
rL__<
f
. ion:tar¡t Frr all i¡¡lueB ¡r the ahjal , appi,l ¡ " Z r üsnstE¡t
:
f
--r
r-,__.4
Experiment with some of the other operat¡ons.
Seismlc nterpretat 0n Prepafai 0n.307

F
¡¡.i
Horizon 0perations: Smoothing a Horizon lnterpretation
1 Make a copy 0f Horizon_A_shifted and rename it !<

Hori zon_A_smoothed.
2 Expand Horizon_A_sm00thed and open the Settings _¿
L-J
dialog box for the 3D seismic object.
0n the Operations tab, under the Seismic operatilns
foldel select Gaussian smooth.
F
-J I
)
ts
I
frJ
-)-/
¡¡d
.l
a--a
-l
L.-
-J
\.-
-J
L--
4. Use the default parameters and click Run.

5. Display Horizon_A_smoothed in a 3D window. -J
\-
6. Try Median smooth with the default parameters.
7. lf you are not satisfied with the result, click Undo, change
the parameters, and run it agarn (there is one undo step
J
r-d
ava ila b le).
_l
308. Seismic lnterpretati0n preparation
-J
L-
--l
¡-
Petrel Geophys cs
f=
E- ¡
a.- Displaying and Annotating Horizons: Modifying the

Seismic Horizon Display
a^
---l
r--¡
You can change the display style of the horizon interpretation easily
to surt your preferences.
1 Open an lnterpretation window.
a_
Ir-_rl
2. From the lnterpretation foldet display a seismlc
For example, display the 3D seeded autotracking horizon
that you interpreted in the previous exercise.
horizon.
I_- * .$f ,q: §inrpl*fl*rir+rl

, §&,y, §sf*r**d.esi!,"#iss
..r,S1:{ffi
Wprkffoy¡frHer
--_-{ t& l -.: e* *uisrystrd hsriton

' li;: t.-.; ü¡¡ideda¡:to*q**dirsr*§,1
,' f,i}i i- t lo1sñ'""ré§v x:lerpr*tcd *r*rir*n
0pen the Settings dialog box"
Seismic nterpretation Preparation o 309

J
V
L-
-l
tr
0n the Style tab in the 2D and 3D interpretation area,
selecf Points and experimentwith Pointtype and Slze.
Click Apply for each new select¡on and observe the effects
in your lnterpretation wlndow.
l
f"-J
-" 6.
l.
Select li¡zes and experiment with Line type and Width.
Click Apply and observe the effects.
_l
h--¿
B. ln fhe Neighbor sections area, select fhe Previous and
y'y'exl check boxes. This functionality is another aid when
-l
}--¿
interpreting a horizon in an lnterpretation window. lt
displays the tnterpretation from the incremental
-_l
neighborrng seismic lines (controlled from the General \.J
lfl - +l
intersection toolbar r )
9. Select color and slze for the display and review ¡t in the
lnterpretation wi ndow. l--)
10. ln the Crossing points area, make sure the 2D and 3D l
y
J
check boxes are selected.

11. ln the Annotation area, select the l'{ame check box to
display the horizon name in the Interpretation window.
12. Click Apply and see the difference.
-¿
L-¿
4
t
-¿
4 -.d
ts¿
I
,-,k
<
L.-
D
-<
f.d
-k
-<
310. Seismic lnterpretat 0n Preparat 0n Petre Geophys cs
^=
f
¡
-* Q =*-"9:a -:C *;ea cfidE*sg É

-:l= !'.' § Íi ,..
b
- =:-- --§-
----¿
aÉ¡ :té.ifis
Lr+ t;Ée Sól,e
-
S;*Éxl:
§:r:
tiádéd *d!&3 i3ú @tl
r'EfuW re-
,l ,ro cci* ffi.
Iteryre §otiá
*.rdh: *- 3
}§sirs ps§:tÉ
:{: ¿0 S¡rbol '{ üa1aei cro*s

§¡e li
t;' 3ü Lire t g€ $t,pd«
*fdhr
Cdafr
Éo.t
'13
ln the lnterpretation window, find and select a cr0ssing
2D line.
14 0bserve how the 3D interpretatron is projected 0nto the 2D
line.
15 Use Guided autotrackrng and interpret along the line.
16 Double-click when you are satisfred with the result.
17. ln the lnput pane, find and expand y0ur active horizon.
There are n0w two interpretation survey filters, one for the
3D volume and one for 2D lines.
1B Clear the 3D seismic filter and 0bserve that the projected
3D interpretation is gone.
19. Select the 3D seismic filter again
Se smic ifterpretat on Preparat 0 r . 31 1
20 Display a 3D in-line or cross-lrne agarn. Make sure the
newly interpreted 2D line crosses it. The crossing 2D
interpretatron is marked with a symbol.
21 ln the Settings dialog box on the Style tab, activate a 3D
window. The Settings dialog box changes to reflect the
new window type.
I Re*n*mode
2D iftedáisn
tñiñr
'g; Lircs Line §!e: Sclid
vdidthr - ¿
PonLs t.n'bol -
i:¿
]D r iemetr ¡"
Sl.,le: L-.ll bli
!!lU ¿ tBlLs
Cell si?e: 1
(ellheiqr'il 5
lilded¡l Pl¡rk --L

lensFerency: ,
il ::"_. .. . ..
Resllúimi lft ltemA*e
U¡il¡ftr
-L-
¡.;
22 Display a seismic horizon from the !nput pane.
LJ. Zoom in on the interpretation.
24 0n the Style tab, under 3D, change Style to Points and
click Apply. The rnterpretation is shown as po¡nts.
25 Change Style to Triangle surface and click Apply
?6 Botate the 3D view and zoom in if needed.
21 Change Style to Cell box. Zoom in until separate cell boxes
are identified.
28. Change Cell height to 20.
312. Selsmic Interpretatl0n Preparatl0n Petre Geophysics
--L
<
L
I---r
Flattening a Horizon and Generating Flattened 3D
Volumes
L'
I--r l¡ this exercise, y0u will learn how to flatten the horizon whlle
nterpreting it. Horizon flattening is very important during structural
or stratrgraphic interpretatr0n. lt also can help you quality check
f
I--
vour picks.
ln this exercrse, y0u will create a flattened 3D seismic volume.
a-
I---
1. Activate an lnterpretation window from the Windows
pane 0r lnsert a new lnterpretation window from the
Window
f
I- menu.
-
2. Display cross-ltne 544.
3. From your acliue lnterpretatiln folder, display a horizon
a-
I--- that you want to flatten.
Right-click the horizon in the lnput pane and select Flatten
horizon.
f
- .¡ S¡rsle tbri:ffi ltnrldl+u folder
-.- B /, l¡l.nié.B srü!"ir l.?.rs

I
iiij I 3[ aut'.tr-rked I'rai:tn
f
I .: ?tr alfttnÉike,J hsd¡nfi
Er-< ::.'-:
, I .. Guided autaimcked hnri¡an
r:: :-- E'-' .l-§:. "iiili+:-a:di:;ns it,

É:€+§i.n§s+#s=+qi:4iiEsE+]¡-s5-+
f,¡; r
L'
l=¡
Ir.-_< l!¿3
G
L=j
&
ñ
,r:, i¡il:i a:iarii. !^,iri:rf liil ar,lj:
---r ai¡i:ri ir ilai¡'i!

tr lr,it]1 1'.irii:nf,'!LlE:E i:,f¡uÉ
,td§ iiIr! ¡i¡riL1!la
ffi 1*C L'Éi¡!r :ifL:llf¡l i! ili Eli,rl:

Ía Itiipr:i¡iiir, 1r,::¡q:i .
¿l lii: : r:: ,l':::1:i:,_ f:' l:.. : i' : ll ,:i:"_ '

fi¡iiÉi h§fi:rf; l'\
- 0bserve the flattened horlzon. You can hide the pick by

toggling off the horizon in the Input pane so that you can
see the event clearly and decide whether or not you want
to refine your pick. You can reftne your pick whtle your
horlzon rs still flattened.
Unflatten the horzon by right-clicking it and cleartng
Flatten horizon rn the menu.
Seismlc nterpretat 0n Preparati0n '313
J
Generating Flattened 3D Volumes
--l
L.J
I
I
I
ln this exercise, you willgenerate a flattened 3D volume. You must

¡L-J
have a surface created from a seismic horlzon. Because you will
learn howt0 create a surface later ln this training, you can use a -
surface that is already available in your project. --J,
r..J
1. ln the lnput pane, right-cllck the seismic cube mig [Crop] 1
[Realized] 1 and select lnsert flattened volume. A virtual -¿

seismic volume named Flattened 1 is created.
2. ln the lnput pane, expand fhe Surfaces folder that you -+
imported using the Reference proiecttool in Module 1
and choose CARACAS.

3. ln the Settings dralog box for the virtual volume, go t0 the
Flattening tab and insert CARACAS using the blue arrow
in the Beference surface field.
4. Click Apply. The seismic volume ls flattened on the
reference surface and a new folder named Flattening
surfaces is created and stored in the lnput pane.
, f- l: Flaitening turfaces ¿
ffi i*l üARAilAs+I&?§ 1
+
5. Display the original and the flattened seismlc cubes in a 3D
window.
=L
6. Create and activate a new lnterpretationfolder.
1. 0n the Flattening tab rn the Settings dialog box of the
Flattened 'l volume, click lnsert interpretation horizon in +
active folder Lrye n new horizon is created that you can
interpret directly in the flattened space. .+
B. Actrvate fhe Seismic interpretation process and interpret
the horizon at a level below CARACAS.
fh
L While interpreting, switch between un-flattened and +
flattened spaces by clicking Un-flatten and FIatten. This
will convertthe objects in the table and help to c0ntrolthe
i nterpretation.
10. Highlight other existing interpretations in the lnput pane
rc
and click letr] rn the dialog box to add them to the table. +
1 1. Click Flatten to visualize them in the flattened space.
314. Selsmic Interpretatlon Preparatl0n Petre Geophysics
r_
ndFr'! oanndeB
EeeHLe su-dce
.--l @ - ..-- .t
-¿crdeús.ri. § :lR¡Cl+ lr
Flnten¡¡! level r¡i Arffile Blev*ion ot surtEcB
'Efffin¿e
I _r r_l,t i
Obtedst0 co¡veÍ nfldil sFace
+- ¡.=.; -'.
-¡t !k:-'-,.i,,-.
-.
L¡}E
-
tts
r-{!-l
,;:
§,1
I
,fu
l€i i
l
l
ll
I
Creating 2D Grid Surfaces with the Make/Edit Surface

Process
Ihe Make/edit surface process is commonly used as a qu¡ck way
to create surfaces (2D grlds) that you can use to quality check the
nterpretation, perform surface operations, and extract information
from the seismic data.
1. Display one of your interpreted horizons ln a 3D
wrndow.
2. ln the Processes pane, under Utilities, open the
Make/edit surface process.
Se sm c lnterpretati0n Preparati0f .315

J
-J
,-ra
-l
l¡-J
bb¿
-J
:l
b¿
¡¡-J
-_t
L¡
-l I
y-/
y-.¿
L-l
-¿
_.¡-
¿
L-¿
--¡-
,_-a
L-a
_-¡!
I
Lr
+
a
J. Make your selected horizon bold and drop it into the
Main input field. lk
4. Toggle on fhe Name check box and enter a name f 0r
5.
your output surface. For this exercise, enter
Sur face_hori z on 1.
CIrck,Suggest settingsfrom input and select
tr
Seismic tines (high density) option. A method L-
based on the rnput type is suggested, but you can
select other methods.
6
1
0pen the Geometry tab.
Selecl Autontatic (from input data/boundary).
tr
. Petrel Geophys c:
316 Seismlc lnterpretation Preparati0n t-r
-¡.
o
o. Set a suitable grid increment (for example, 100 x 100).
I Toggle on Mqke boundary.fi'om ruain input and
extend it with I J nodes and enter 1 (one grid cell
outsrde the data limit).
10 Click 0K to create the surface.
11. Display Surface_horizonl ln the 2D or 3D window and
compare it with the interpreted data.
4a
IL Go to the Style tab in the Settings dialog box to
select annotation properties for the surface display.
d; &: bdd levek *§

. i:t ¡;.:e baric ii;::':*iJ ra¡iÉ
Fant: :5
Stad: 3§§
l*ryvai; 3S{S
The next step is t0 produce another surface based on

the same input, while lrmiting the output inside a
closed polygon.
13. Be-open Íhe Make/edit surface process.
14. Click in the Besult surface fleld and press Delete.
15. Click No ln the confirmatlon dialog box.
16. 0n the Geometry tab in the Boundary section, toggle
off Make boundaryt.from main input and extend ít
with []J nodes.
Petre GeophVsics Se smic lfterpretatlon Preparatl0n. 317
.I
tab' drop a closed polygon tn

a
-J
l-,
17. 0n the Make surface

the Boundary field. a--,
1B il;;k. . new polygon
\nfhe Make/edit polygons
20
9.
Process
'Change
surface'
(use a 2D wrndow)'
the name of the polygon t0
Click APPIY
Limited-
:l_J
..r
the 3D window' >--l

21. Display Limited-surface in
:-l
Smoothing Surfaces
1.
2.
0pen the Settíngs diafog
Óox for Surface-hot)zonl
that you created in the prevtous

0n the 0perations tab' expand
exerclse'
the Surface
1
v
oPerations folder'
3.SLlectSmoothandkeepthedefaultparameters,
¿
-L--'
L_
=i
C
Ge¡:'
)t
Pettel
=--s
. n rati n
3l s. i, * i, nt.
I tp retati 0 P re p a o
ffi !*ttir,qs f*r'5urfare_-¡'.ari¿*n1'
IrFEr:ti.-,rs
l_,
r--
L
1 l*
.;-'-
| ilr frrsti;:r:
.Ar'¡le
+ LLnAILTi lF+Eltlfs
..+ ;- -,.trttrtI3ti nI§ri

1 ;--.
r.- :Ln::i-s-n::iaF+riti:r:i
L-
,l L-. , ,
, ;-^
. t :{3:f;5t!: lLrTilla¡i
.t ;--^rrlrMEer:ltrt
t L tñnlí,f :,E{l=11:,f 3
L
- ]!n::t:,8{r=il:.rS
I
li ' I /fuÉ--.
tsF,caiesrir
ry-ffi-F=
r'i ;l
tu E,1r tF:J jte .riilir h,:.^:;r¡

Il/\ f¡ F:, lr.rrq-+
L-
--
-
H9 L.rF ¿rrf ulT
1_
I
t_
L
I
L
I":
L
--.4
L
Ú'L-4
4.
r:-1
Click L§$ to create a new object.
L
tr
F.- J. Click Run
6 Display Surface_horizonl: Smooth in a 3D or 2D
window
L
r 1 Modify the surface by changing the parameters, then
run the operation again"
L
I.
Petrel Geophys cs Se smic lnterpretat 0f Preparai 0n.319

JL-
..;. *--
¡--
F
Review 0uestions fr-

L
1. Mention four methods to digitize horizons in petrel. What

are their importance?
L--
2. can you flatten 3D seismic cubes and horizons in petrer?
rf
yes, how?
3. What are the available signal tracking feature options
in
L--
horizon autotracking mode?
Does the Seed Confidence option in horizon
autotracking
specify the minimum value for the seismic amplitude
L.-
a
as a
percentage of the seed point?
L--
Summary
L.-
. accessing and using the horizon interpretation function
toolbar
a changing horizon settings and parameters l--
a opening and using the lnterpretation manager
a rnterpretrng horizons using different techniqués
l¡.l
o using these interpretation tools ¡r-
. Seeded 2D autotracking L-r
. Guided autotrackrng
a performing manua I interpretations
a editing horizons and parent/child relationships
o filteringinterpretations "=
o correcting horizon problems using horizon operations (bulk _d
o
shifting and smoorhing) !-
flattening horizons
o annotating horizons. =.¡
§i
J
l
L.
I
I
_)
¡'.-J
:l
L.
322. Seismic l¡terpretatlon preparati0n
Petrel Geophysics _l
f_¿
^l
Module 5 Seismic
Restoration 2D -
this module, you will learn about seismic restoration in petreland
Irr
how to build restoration models.
Learning 0bjectives
. explain why seismic restoration is useful for interpreters
. use the restoration workflow
. set restoration attributes.
f
-.<
f
r----..
f
t--
Petrei Geophysics
Selsmrc Festoratton 2D .323
L--
J
Lr
_J
L--¿
--l
Seismic Restoration for 2D Horizons
l
Lesson 1
- L-r
lnPetrel,youcanuseac0mplexfaultnetwOrkt0doseismicbalanctng
(one of several) t0 a
and reconstruct 0r restore seismic horizons
(§ You can select and
use more than one horizon al ,p..¡ii.O flat level. This process uses a geomechanical
engine' enabling b-
the same time. ylu to vatrOate the structural interpretation from a geologically valid
point of view. L--
tuning' A single
The process requires very little user interacttgn,and
click allows you to creatá a restoration
modelthat pre-populated with
is
rn the lnterpretat¡on
,tt ot rt . interpretation objects that are visible =
thatyou select during the process'
window. You can flatten the horizons
!--
L--
L-
l-
l--
¡-
tr
ir-
r-
¡-
tr
I
-
I
-
2D
I
324. Seismlc Restoration ,l
---_-
rl--L=_<
¡-,
Restoration Model
fhe Restoration model process automatically builds a restorat¡on
I.
model that uses all objects in the scene to define the fault structural
L. networks and the different zones The model ls stored in a global

Restoration models folder in the Models pane.
f
I.
Restored seismic sections allow you to visualize
o well tops
L-
-
-. . surfaces
. virtual attnbutes
.
f
, polygons
-. o points
. 3D grid properties.
--- Restoration Workflow

The Restoration workflow ls an iterative process.
Analr/¿e
the
seismic
section
.;,i;'itl:! ...: i
Se smic Hestoral on 2D .325

.t
a
>.-.{
Restoring a Seismic Section
Procedure
-
1. For Restoration, opán an lnterpretation window and
display a _J
Lr
random line' or a 2D line)in
seismic sectron (inline, crossline'
_l
-l
time or dePth domarn'
ig tsrel2013,1(64'bi§b# le""t"nu1Yl
¡nn5l
.H
i$1-l ' Msk rc#rdidñ ¿§ ñddél1 t--J
l-ra
v
_-]
l.-
3
Lr
ü q! !ñÉ iriEiprE!áfui
6t Vú!!He 4$!u1eE
É
l¡
§uHeri átillrr1q!
'+
ii,i turr,¡ret: t¿u[ ¿*r¿ilo¡
l{ ME[erEor§ ñeder
* üEibúBYliie'PratÉtei
& ¡6&á aÉÉE6dai¿E'*l

}''-
f.
s{§{lnrqt ita6§Yarb
Cwar Po,.t §ñdddg
' PF¡PEd, hodalt9
r,5(kt§ réBÚr¡ modE¡rhC
We¡l 8ng¡re§!{t§ l.-
¡"
A MdEel!dlF¿lr!Én¡
4á Mdks¡edilruhre
ffi friéh". ñÉlE Í ':l
i' lr4lh EEilmdlr!¡ mr<Él
t-
h
r-i*t' Display the fault and horizon(s) interpretation

to be used by the E
D
I
restoration process'
. ..1 lt is important that
the horizons are ananged tn
in¡reasinn oeolooical aqe in F
the lnput pane.
5
Petrel GeoPhYsit:
l"-
326 . Seismic Bestoration 2D t
L
a
3. From the lnput pane, highlight the horizon(s) and select FIailen
horizon(s) using currently visible objects.
r-=-
L'
f
I.
I_.
---
a-
--
--=.
Petrel Geophysics
Seismlc Bestoration 2D. 327
*)
*--
-
Lil
h
Add or interpret new horizons in the restored space
=¿t
L--
-E
L L.¿
E
tr-r
-=
L<
r
L.-
}.
)¡r
-E
Lr
_L
L-
'L
l-<
,-L
L--
L
fr-
--¡a
L
=E
lH
__b.
1-
_L
Petrel Geophysics
328. Seismic Bestoration 2D
L
E
f--_ View the Restored Seismic
lE bl
L'
.,lse in the Seismic interpretation toolbar to turn on/off the
iestored seismic view
-.-_--
:c¡ I -,e ,9.....& .- Se,isr:ric Tir¡e 1 -l# § E E tesicr¡iicn r¡cdel
L'
BE
I.
Toggle on/off restoration mode: Moves the view from normal to

reconstructed space. lf the active restoration model is not cached, this
f-.--
r--
acti0n als0 causes the model computation to be triggered.
Refresh the restoration model: Refreshes the model. This action is
L' used afteryou update parts of the model(e.9., horizons and faults, or
model settings)"
L'
I-{ Active restoration 2d model: Allows selection of active restoration
model from the ¡nterpretation tool bar.
.- :::i::ari:.i::i:- j :::::i:ir:i,::l::l:: r: i:=¡:::1:; ::r': i:r:i-j::; : ::: i:j:;-il:.ii: r:.ri:.:_:
f et
::: ::'r'r..
'':..'.-:''
'ffitcGt**# EÉtñtr
-.
:
t_-
---
j pj
r.&
i!l
q:
I
f
LY] Resd colortable
nEsH uulu¡ rdults
! §j fut¡ve prope*l,template
--" | § Togqle opacitf ¡:n ¡ll visihle reismic planer
I i?l Totule $iqsle and bitmap
f §l
i fufive tautt,,teri¡ún inlÉrFretation
i l§ Cr*ut" ne'¡r.fault."ho¡¿nn
---- i i{-l T¡qqle on,.'off all interpretatinn obje*ts
f
j i.{i Selected,rrrrtage
II-<
I iJ fuph. setected 'rintage to dsible seismir planes
S Toggle on,,'aff restumtinn mode

lfr Rdresh restúration if needed
-I-_i
1_- i{ Amive rexoraiun Id model
f is ü.* j
U
-r
IEJ
f
rI-_-
Se smlc Eestoraiion 2D.329

fÉ-.-
J
>--J
BI
I
)
L
lnterpretation Ouality Check in the Restored Section

The restoration prOcess enables you to work in a structurally-free and
L.d
interpretation{riendly environment. ln this environment, y0u can
remove the influence of the fault network gradually by un-faulting the
selsmic section and restoring the display to what resembles a L,i
chronostratigraphic disPlaY.
You can spot an incorrect interpretation more easily in a restored space

L--
than in a traditional interpretation framework. -l
OC the lnterpretation in Restored Section

1. You cán quickly spot a mrs-picked horizon in the restored
secti on.
¡L.-
¡\,-
b-
_L.
lE
-L
lr--
L.
¡*
-L
t-
Petrel Geophysit
330 . Seismic Restoratron 2D
Correct your interpretation and refresh the restoration t0 view
the corrected restored section.
J
b--
:J
L -
Restoration Attributes
During the restorati0n process, different attributes of the model are _-l
l
!
generated to be used for quality c0ntrol. These attributes enable the l--¡
I
user t0 immediately figure out if the model that has been build is
é
I
L defined as expected.
. Triangle mesh
F
o Zones
. lmplicit Function L-r
o Dilation
. Shearing
É-
Triangle Mesh
tlr
The Triangle mesh attribute displays the triangle mesh that is used in
the restoration Process.
You can use this information to quality checkthe mesh triangles t0

ensure that they are reliable acc0rding to the input data and will not
ts
-
introduce artifacts into the restorati0n process.
Y
_L
The Mesh resolUti0n parameter allows you to control the performance
and resolution of the model.
(left) }.--
The ftgure shows Triangle Mesh displayed in an unrestored section -L
and Trrangle Mesh dlsplayed in a restored section (right).
l"-
-.¡r
-¡L.-
E.
L-
¡.-
--.L
L-
332. Seismic Restoration 2D

L
Zones
The Zone attribute displays how all fault-fault and horzon-fault
connections are build automatically and allows you to quality check the
modelrng step.
The frgure shows Zones displayed in an unrestored section (left)and

Zones displayed in a restored section (rrght)"
Seism c Bestoration 2D .333

l,--J
:J
lmplicit Function
The lmplicit functron attribute provides a stratigraphic view of the sectlon
-l
r--J
5--J
that summarizes the geological relationships in the model. Any point in this
2D space has a specrfic relationship with lts nerghbors (younget oldel or of
the same age).
The figure shows Implicit Function displayed in an unrestored section (left)

_l
L-J
and lmplicit Function displayed in a restored section (right).
-_J
L--J
i
_l
I¡-J
:t
}i-d
__l
l¡-J
-)
.}1
L-d
)
Lda
-¡. I
_.J
H
ts
f¿
j
¡.r
¡[.¡
I
334. Seismic Restoration 2D Petrel Geophvs.: _<

L---
.L
I
fl
f-
E r
Dilation
The Dilation attribute characterizes the relative change in area (in 2D)
I-*l for each triangle. This attribute helps you to determine which zones are
I_- compressed and which are stretched to complete the restoration
a-
pr0cess.
r.-_J
The figure shows Dilatation displayed in an unrestored section (left)and
Dr atation displayed in a restored section (right).
I_-
--_-¡
a-
-
¡
a-
I-J
f
-.
I
L.
lE- r
L-
-.--l
E
--J
I,_-
f
==
--J
E
--¡¿
I._- Seismic ,aesloration 7ll .335

J
Shearing
a
V
-_l
The Shearing attribute indlcates how the angles of the mesh triangles
L-¿
vary between the un-restored and restored stages. This attribute shows
the local strain generated by the reconstruction process.
The figure shows Shearing displayed in an unrestored section (left) and

Shearing displayed in a restored section (right).
:l
L..J
gi ?:¡ ,)í Ll _l
¡.-¿
_l
L,.J
-_l
L.J
:l
E-a
=)
'l
--/
Fr
--
!-
'<l
li-
-
¡.-
t-
336. Seismic Bestoratron 2D Peirel Geophysics
-3
r=
f
E I
Restoration Model Settings

forthe model in the Settings dialog box. 0n
I--¡ You change settings
a- the Model tab rn the Modeling settings area, you can set these
options for the restoration model.
f
--_¿
Mesh resolution: Controls the total number of triangles
used to drscretize the 2D space. Choose between four
levels of resolution. The finer the resolution, the larger the
am0unt of time required for the computation. At a finer
mesh resolution, the chance of having bad triangles is
reduced.
Homogeneous mesh: Uses larger triangles in areas away
from the deformation and discontinuities. Smaller triangles
are used in nearby areas. This option allows a c0nstant
number of triangles to have an optimal space discretizatlon.
lmplicit function smoothness: Changes the way the
implicit function follows the trend given by the input data.
A smoother implicit function wlll honor the input data to a
lesser degree. This depends 0n your confidence in the
horizon picking (for example, when working with noisy
seismic data or low amplitude/ low frequency seismic
events).
Seismlc Festoration 2D . 337

J
1. Update the model in the Model settings dialog box or via
f-J
H
the Seismic restoration process dialog box.

tnod€l' ,' .l.¡1'".,1,tt . ¡'-'..,.
I-¿
§ Settl*4s lor'Restorat¡on
_l
fT
l--
a:=
-J
------ ¡r
j
MúdetlirssditEs
Itrlsh.*dulim
Flom4enw*s rch r
Nsmal
i=§
-J
¡-
-,-ry: l@- -:1a9".*a] i

I'l
¡-r
L-
2. Bight-click on the Restoration model ln Models pane and
go to the Settings dialog box.
§ Set*ngs for "R*§torati§n model' :

¡.r
--J
bl
L-l
.'
Er
JL i
<
¡}-a
/
F
¿
kMitilEF*il F
338. Seismic Restoration 2D
Petrel Geophysics
t¡r
-¡.
Exercise
n ihis exercrse,
- youRestoring a Seismic Section
will learn how t0 restore your seismic sectlon
and interpret the horizon in the flattened space. Restoratlon enables
:ne interpreter to restore horizons to a specified flat level, quality
:ontrol the interpretation, and restore the chronostratigraphy to
better understand the sub-surface geology.
For the sake of simplicity and time constraints, you will build a
simple restoration model to demonstrate how fhe Seismic

Re.storation process is used in Petrel. You are encouraged to
build models with more data.
1. 0pen an lnterpretation window and activate Ihe Seismic

interpretation process rn Processes pane.
2. Display a crossline (for example, 470) from the seismic
volume mig [Bealized] 1.
3. Display 3D autotracked horizon or any other interpreted
seismic horizon and your interpreted faults.
NOTE: lt is important that the horizons you wish to restore
are in chronological order.
4. Display a few interpreted faults.
5. Right-click on 3D autotracked horizon rn the lnput pane and
select Flatten horizon(s) using currently visible
obiects. The Restoration model is created in the Models
pane.
/k
k¿J
l§l¡
ru
},il
!.ri.
ril
0bserve the structure and contents of the Restoration

model in the Models pane.
::'e Geophysics Se sm c Restoration 2D . 339
}¡-¿
b-z
l-r
¡-
1 . Expand Ihe Attributes folder and display different
attri b ute s.
B. When you have analyzed the model and its attributes, L-¿
ts
¡nsert a new horizon from the lnterpretation tool bar and
l" name it shallow marker.
9. Pick the shallow-mlker holzon (with the trough at L-¿
approximately -700 to -725 ms)"
10. Go to the Models pane, right-click on the restoration
L.<
model, and select Populate model with visible objects h
in active interpretation window.

'1
1. Modify your horizon picks lf required and click Refresh L¡
restoration k,ton the Seismic interpretation toolbar if
needed.
12. 0n the Seismic interpretation toolbar, click Toggle on L¡
E
restoration ,F
to activate or Toggle off restoration E
to deactivate the restoration in the lnterpretation l,-
window.
13. Move t0 the next selsmic section. The restoratron model is
l.¿a
-/
run for that section. Next time you display that section, it l-
will be run from cache.
1 4. Go to the Settings dralog box for the Zones attribute and
I--r
L-
change the transparency for displaying it on the seismic
section.
15. IVlanrpulate the color display for the Implicit function, f--¡
l¡
Dr lation, and Shearing attributes.
Refer to the Petrel Help for more information about the restoration
l._
pr0cess. Lt
Review 0uestions f-.-

L
o What are the benefits of seismic restoration?
o How many restoration attributes does a restoration model
\
contain?
Summary L-¿
ln thrs module, you learned about seismic restoration in Petreland
how to create a restoration model. t¡
340. Selsmic Bestoration 2D

,
Petrel Geophysics
t-
f-
--tr Module 6 Depth
-
a-
--¡l
E--
Conversion
I- I
f
,elocity modeling and depth conversion are integral steps in seismic
rterpretati0n. ln this module, you will learn about basic velocity
--{ ,¡odeling and depth conversion in Petrel.
f-
-.-
{ ln-depth toprcs are discussed in the advanced level petrel c0urse
Velocity Modeling.
l_-
--Jr Learning 0biectives
; --.***
ilq"*,'*'
i
r_-
--J .
.
create a velocity model and perform domain conversion
L-
rEJ quality check time/depth relationships for wells
. define velocity model intervals
. create an uncorrected velocity model using well data
r¡---l .
f .
o
.
create a final corrected velocity model using well data
create a velocity model with uncertainty
perform a depth conversion on a 3D grid
f=
--¡
.
perform a depth conversion usrng the active velocity model
perform a general depth conversion"
!=
f=
f
I-.---J
!=
l_- Petrel Geophysics
Depth Cofversion.34l
I--¿
I
L y
h-r
E
Lesson 1 Basic Velocity Modeling
-
lb.-
Domain Gonversion Workflow
The domarn conversion workflow in Petrelis a two-step process. Frrst, Li¡
y0u must defrne a velocity model, then you use the velocity modelto
l.-r
perform a domarn conversion on data objects.
Complete these steps to define a velocity model: L--

:-
1. Define velocity intervals (zones, usually between time
interpretation surfaces). ¡¡--
2. Define velocity functions (automatically calculated 0r user-
defined).
3. Define output (for example, velocity cubes, V0, or k for quality ¡¡-¡
control purposes).
Use one of these four methods to perform a domain conversion on data
L--
objects.
. Bight-click an object and select Domain convert by active
velocity module. This method uses the currently active E-
L
velocity model.
¡ Use ihe General depth conversion process for multiple
l-i
objects. ¡.
. Use a 3D grid conversion.
. Perform a seismic data domain conversion. ¡-
I
B
L--
ri_
¡.-
2. Neoth Convers on Petre Geophvs cs
rL..
t
-=
-
The velocrty model bridges the gap between Time and Depth domatns.
domain
The Domain Conversion process is described in the workflow
1. COnstant- "'! ',il-.i

2. Surface ; .i ' ..:, ::
1. Constant i;-:- " fl
rr I
óó
2. SurTace
3. Horizon*
4, WellTops
-t;,
'd
5. Or none
1. Calculated; Conection (Vo) based on TDR (Vo & kr

2. LIser defined; Constani or input
Daturn__ -_,-- rs -
\\\\/^+
\ \ \vy 3. Velocity SEGY (average)
Vo_----t-'-- 4. 3D velocity ProPertY (
Vo + k(z-20)
5. Horizon tied velocitY Poinis
1. Velocity surfaces 4. points

2. Well data points 5. Functions
3. Time & veloclty logs 6. t sheet
J
:
l---J
Velocity Modeling Examples
The examples described in this module are based on time/depth
relationships in the wells that are used to build linear velocity models.
:l
}--a
A minimum err0r estimation of the K value is obtained and used to
derive a V0 surface. Any correction built into the velocity model is
reflected in the V0 surface.
:t
-l
¡--J
By selecting one of the velocity models, you can perform a domaln

conversion on a wide range of objects in accordance with that model. ¡--a
For sensitivity purposes, you can use different velocity models to
convert the same object. :t
¡--¿
LinVel model
Minimum enor
estimation t vo r-fr- I :t
¡-r
F%§
:t
:l
/'R ¡--a
rt lr
I
F}
'"f
ii
7¿
ffi -_l
-l
:
l--.
I{§¡iñ asñEd b} ¡a¡i* r€lsailj rodel

L-
:J
tr
_t
-l
I,- ¡
¡--a
_l
¡-
I
L.
^-l
ra-
-
t
lnput Data Ouality Gontrol
Crossplotting the time/depth relationship data for one or allwells is an
a-
I--¡l efficient and timesaving method for finding and handling spurious data
po i nts.
ln addition to eliminating outliers and other errors in the cloud of points,

crossplotting is a good tool for identifying changes in the velocity field
-E{
-.) that would be natural interval separators in the velocity model.
Remember that any change to a time-depth pair will influence the

calculated velocity values down to the next time-depth parr. Be sure t0
quality check every edit in the check-shot data. Check-shot data
consists of hard data points and should betrusted if there is no obvious
reason why it should not be.
Procedure Creating a Crossplot of Well TDR Data i:it--"*,it
1. Open-a new Function window. irl .,:..:. :i!

ir.j i§ii.l
iirl..¡rr+::.
,r,ri"a"*ffiffiF
ffi ;F t,ir.1oir
m Hí:ingEft *iE¡+!!
f=l
E l¡lt.rpretñiisr' ¡.,i¡d¡i"l
E-n
réf lrieff ECi3. ;'.,ir.Cst
2 Find and expand the check-shot object under Global well

logs.
. ]! ¡ mctea<*ors_m '-ll
, I!':il .¿ry*.¡*
3. Crossplot lnterval velocity against TWT picked (in the

Att ri b ute s subf o lder).
Perre GeophVsics
Depth Conversion.345
-
r'=t
4. R¡ght-click the check-shot oblect and open the Spreadsheet
:-i
mL]" ii:ü,
(*f *f f,s
- ill w t*: is rF iE !É
:r :r T - - -ü
!§
T -é - - -u
t(
iúr
ü & & & i(J
t dr
m
ñ
.f
E
ú
d)
f:
B ÍÉ
d q E
.t
dr
É
d:
E
É
iñ
F ú iK
+f ..q §1 -l 4 i,-l
Ftr
!q
; [!
r-j (!
q LJ:
r-- (a¡ rR
t'; ""i
É !{f,
E'
r!
É r:
r--
* ll-, l
f¡ á;
l=r
,-i
r\¡ ru
l-l
l=}
§¡
É{ fl
F.J
Éa
ral
da
É É
úl
ú ry
':f. ci *i ui t-
ú): i1j
,+ r-- É¡ !É
UiJ rÉ
§: r.':l
'ÉF r&
fr
U
u_l
a!
'q fi
{r
r:1
r-.
qJ ñ
i$ r
ul iF {¡ É: ui r-- di
-i. ial r- c? rn
'¡l
g
ü
a
Ei L: rJ u=a
fi¡
flu1 + !a E:J
el
.= Ll
f':. rt
ÓE
& .i¡ ul
,,.i r-
ft
l':l
Éf t:l ra +j d
l:j
ú §!
ó ñ ¿"1
tfr u'! -J
ú1 fl f'!r fl
§ ú u1 f-.
E
I
[ ]] E
L
0.,)
H
e
EI d1 (! B¡ -*
¡" q r1 ,¡ r'1
u
LF
;
ua c'J
#;
ó,É
IF
(¡ ü
rfl
t:: {-j
EI
úr r-:l E: *r:,
t? r! r: -J
üs u_j f¡ r.l¡ d1 i=, ua
}
il 'f¡
U
.r* : EN
ñ
0 nl
U
q: ts
11
=i^ r"ri
€IJ ir: IL ri La
ff f,J L:l
4;1 r-- EJ ra q a-J
= ri
{ 1l
úr
ñ
üd
fJ
"J
fa
iii
j---
ú
d1
d: q]
ui in
,tr
U
+r
q
':l Lf r:r I'r -j.
ú
ü El
Lf EÚ
"J *'i
d) rt
",1
r:i ry ¡-,
ú
- ii ., -f
f.'-
LTqJ
L} L: =t
na r-,
c: t-:J
!a ¡-E { Eú
r-,
a!
n ffii
L_-ü_;
!1
ffi"i
sü iffil --ffi"=,
J0l
iF¡|l!qÉl!AFreÉfie3Éi!É
:irrll
t¡ I j] l;"=Ei
3¿16 . Depth Convers on

ra-
E.
E\
]L
t\
Click Select/prck mode r h. or Select using freehancldraw
to capture one or more data pornts.
tlE
I_-
Et
f-
----.1
Edit or remove the highlighted points in the spreadsheet

16ri¡c Ifrt.
Arerag€ r€l*{ity Interval vekcity !4nl{ trrn€ vel
:::': Geophvs cs Depth Conversion.34T

J
ModelWell Data Method
a
..J
).,a
This method uses the established time/depth relationship in the
¡-¿
differentwells to derive V0 and K p0ints forthe specific intervals (each
wellwith a TDR gives V0/K values for each interval). These points are
-J
gridded 0r averaged to create surfaces 0r constant values for the
)'1
intervals that are used to create the velocity model.
-J
t--
^l
l¿
:l
l
¡..J
H
LI
)
Y
--l I
l-r
^_l
¡-
.L
¡-r
_b-
E{ lñsert stm poirr dt SRD if nót csveÉd

F
-l
r
I-
¡-r
!
tú
¡-
348 . Depth Conversion Petrel Geophysics
ts
--/
f-
-.
-
The quality of the velocity model depends on the quality of the
source for the TDR.
The LinVel method (V=V0+K"Z)in Petrel can derlve V0 and K
I_-
--{ values using the Well TDR.
]rlllel]: Diernonil-14 TvD
f-
-r-4
Checkshot: AllCheck§hots
-rl.E
-ü6
rl.É
I
&
l,inees
Drift
TLhITC
*s
{nr=) f
inrsl
inrsJ *
[Diamonü- I 4]
1:J
'll
13
\,q.,DRD
5rlü[
Hsd.el
S=V#+lfE $*: l¡,fe,ll TüR - Surfe e K l,riell TBF. - üenste*t
Depth Converslo¡ . 349

J
:
L-J
Velocity lntervals
You can perform domain conversion from time to depth and depth to
time as wellas time to time and depth to depth (correctlon).
-l
t-<¡
You choose datum based on the reference of your project. lf you use the
Time datum option, you can select Seismic Heference Datum (SBD), -]
l--J
or a user-defined datum, if it is created in the Templates pane under -l I
I
the Dafums folder.
§-d
SBD is offset from Mean Sea Level (MSL) in depth units for onshore l
data. This offset is zero for offshore data rmplying that SRD = MSLfor
marine surveys. y
Using the Other option activates a user-deflned rnput selection for the
datum. You must enter a c0nstant or surface as the reference in the L<r
from and to domains.
Ihe Saved searches option ensures that only a selectlon of wells ¡--.d
that have been quality checked are used. Saved searches are defined -
and stored rn subfolders under the Wellsf older.
L-rd
¿
Filters can consist of user-defined well lists, allwells that contain given !
attributes, logs, and welltops, or objects thatfallwithin a boundtng
polygon. Both the estlmation and correction are affected by the filter. L-r
L
-¿t
Procedure Defining Velocity lntervals ¡.r
1 . -
ln the Processes pane, open the Make velocity model found
L
under Geophysics.
:r v S X ¡f\<
iP ,1:11,:,;,,.r,..,
¡ Geo'Ftry*ic*
ffi Se¡smi* interpretatirn E
E--
ffi l'olrme attritrutes
. Errface attribL¡tes ¡-
-1
Geneml depth conuersion ¡-d
1
ffi ü*¡ ba*f irrt eryretaiion
[r 5ei*mi*'*,ell tie i
& f,Iake rEstnratinn 2D madel -¡ ¡k

-
350 . Depth Conversion Petre Geophyslcs --<
b_
L.
L
-- 2. Choose the approprrate datum fg¡ the project.
E--r 3. Click Append item in table l.fñjto add all the input objects.
||||||tr I
!\ *latee uel+ris madel
il ,é tlre¡te nr,,r,. UElacit5 m,:del

, __
tdit Edstinü:
D¡tum
§: Time: Isnn - lZ
t..t ütt'er
Depth Conversion o 351

-
Change the Base interval to the desired type, select it from

lnput or Models pane, click its nama and drop it into the
dialog box using the drop-in arrow [.4,_J
Specify the Correction of the velocity model.
Convert frum: T1'.rT r tü: Z
ts
.-d
¡r-r
¡rr
L
\Lr
L--
LJ
¡-
fL.-
lL.-
E
¡!
E--
¡\r
L.,
¡,.J
}.J
-¡
I
l-J
¡,.J
l
I
352 . Deoth Conversion

Petre Geophysics ))
L"-r
.b"
Velocity Modeling Using Well Data
^ t¡rs method, the time-depth relationshrp (TDB)is used to derive V0
a1d K p0ints for the various wells in each of the
rntervals A llnear
'-rgression is used (the LinVel method) in the velocrtyidepth space'
,', ñere V0 is referenced to the datum of
the veloclty model'
inputs:
Ailernatively, you can derive the velocity field from these
¡ Average velocrty cube (imported SEG-Y or data that
are
converted to the average velocity cube with fhe Volume

attribute Process)
. Average velocitY ProPertY
. lnterval velocity
. Lrnear velocity ivO referenced to the top of the
velocity interval
with the AdLinvel method)
o Horizon-tred velocity point data.
already derived' you
lf the interval velocity or linear veloclty inputs are
can enter them manuallY.
Procedure-UsingWellDatatoGreateaVelocityModel
l . Choose tL. typ. of velocity model for each interval' When
usingtheLinvelfunctionformodeling,C0nstants/surfaces,
Well TDR, or corrections can be used as input'
2. Set V0 to Well TDR - Surface/Constant'
3. Set K to Well TDR - Surface/Constant'
¡ !e:.+:i-*
E
! E rer.r.*
i SFi
. ; itd&: -.j
r1:ltli" ¡e ::'"1*'1lr
==lál4r.eri,¡:." &* c§"!&$
Depth Converslon ' 353

:--
*,/
-¿
Correction and 0utput from Velocity Modeling
When you create velocity models, you can output the results in different
formats to quality check the model. 0n the Correction and output tab -¿
in the Make velocity model window, you can deflne the outputs to
generate and how they are generated. --¿
These outputs can be defined for the entire velocity model.
. -
Thickness: Allows you to specify depth and time tolerance.
. Depth tolerance: Minimum thlckness of a zone (in
project depth units). lf the mintmum thickness falls below
this numbel the zone is not used for calculating V0 or k.
This option ensures that extreme values in thin parts of
the zone do not affect the rest of the model.
. Time tolerance: Simllar to Depth tolerance, but in project Lr
trme units.
o Surfaces: Uses the specified gridding algorrthm t0 create all
l-=--.¿
surfaces during the VelociQ modeling process.
For better control over this gridding (for example, if you use
different methods for different zones), create the output as )-Á
I,
points, grid them using ff,eMake/edit surface process, and
input the resulting surfaces instead of the TDB.
. Gorrection: Determines how well ties are handled if v'
L
correction is used with well tops as input"
. Output: Allows you to quality check outputs in the form of well
pornts data, logs, and functions. Ihe Make well report
¡-r
L
optron generates a spreadsheet that summarizes the well tops
correction.
L-
L
E_
L,
L-
ts
.¡-
-L
L-
354. Depth Converslon Petre Geop .:
ll
-L-
---3
ra-
-- Procedure Creating 0utput to Ouality Gheck the
Velocity Model
-
r--
---
1.
2.
Cl¡rf {Effiffi to see the controlling parameters.
Specify tolerance, gridding algorithm, and correction.
a-
- _ 3. Choose outputs for the velocity model (full model 0C outputs).
-- :. i (ñfl#: 1;ádúrMM
fl
et('rditÉñ: 1\'Í --..
tum
+ fnÉ, i cr*
?a tpÚ¡fuY. . 9.!¿7wrl*
:t
::i
:1
ln the figure, Well points are shown on the left (from Step 2) and the
Velocity function is shown on the right (from Step 3). I
.ffi) -zry 1W ry ffi @

I
Z',lt.ne1tdual {Tún d*a sotrltsl - útafiúrtd-i 4 lTúfr.1. v--ñ+8.. "¡l=5M7 4027 F¡26F". v:-0 7 44424'r,
Petrel Geophysics Depth Conversion.3S5

t-4
L---,
Well TDR Estimation Parameters

These settings specify how the TDB estimation for the well ls derived
You enter these settrngs on the Well TDR estimation tab ln the Make
velocity modelwindow.
Based on the method that you choose for defining the velocity function
in any given interval, the lnterval velocity and Linear velocity
subtabs are activated.
lnterval and Linear velocity parameters are the same except for two
¡-
I rnear velocity-spectfic parameters.
. Methods: Minimizes the error on elther depth or velocity
residuals. The option Min number of TDR samples sefs a
lower limit for each well and each zone to be included ln the
estlmation. ¡L-.
The options Minimum'% of zone sampled by TDR
(percentage of zone filled with input data) and Optimize for Lr
estimation o/K (honors the rate of lncrease of velocity) are
both Linear velocity-speclfic selections. -1
l¡ra
o Robust estimation: Attempts to generate good fits by t-
down-weighting large residuals. Down-weighting can be
performed on wells (where a minimum number of wells with l!-
TDH must exist for it to apply) or data wrth large reslduals.
¡-
s . Base well intersection: Allows you specify how to treat the
'l
il rntersection between the well trajectory and the base of the L-
i,-,.---"1 For additional L
inf ormation about these zone. Select EstimaÍe and adiust to base when the base
settings, refer to the Petrel
estimation is used to derive the two unknown coefficients
Hel p..
(V0 and K)
r--
,L-
o 0utput: Allows you to quality check outputs in the form of
logs, functions, and data pornts for each modeled veloctty
li-
interval. lt rs important not to confuse these outputs wlth the -¡,-
output for the entire velocity model specrfied on the
Correction and outPut tab.
l
-L-
356. Depth Converslon
-lL
L'
E r
Procedure Estimating Well TDB
1. Open-the Well TDR est¡mat¡on subtab. r' .iñi ¡r::
a-
I
2. Depending on the TDH estimation meth0d y0u ch0ose, click

either the lnterval veloc¡ty or Linear velocity subtab.
-\ 3. Choose methods and estimation parameters for the
E. IL
El J selected rntervals.
4. Specify outputs for the modeled velocity intervals.
$ 1r rmetoss i;'le.drloss
l¡- jt ¡hen#h iil !é1..q 3l E*,
Thls is an example of an error function
-1
t
I
:l
L-Eú t I
f¡
t I
IJJ
I
I I
t
I
t
legend
* Allwells {TDRJ e=e{k}
Depth Conversion.35T
I
Velocity Modeling with Uncertainty
I lncorporating uncertainty into the velocity model enables you t0
I
stochastically handle the variance in velocities. The workflow for
t including structural uncertainty in Petrel has three parts:

1. ldentify the possible error representing one standard
deviation.
2. Multiply that error with a stochastic surface with values
around zero.
3. Add the error to the base case surface.
ln other words:
Sr=Sbc+U1s"Usgs
where
. Sr is the surface realization
. Sbc is the base case surface
. U1s is the surface or constant representing one standard
deviation error
. Usgs is the stochastic error surface (using Sequential
Gaussian Simulation).
L.
The standard deviation built into the velocity model can be
expressed either as a constant number or a surface.
lk
L.
ií{f+ Procedure Insertinga Standard Deviation Surface L'-

lire$ 1. - Velocity modeling
ln the dialog box, toggle 0N the check L.
t::_fif=:i¡¡
box to the left in the StdDev. column.
2. Select the surface from the lnput pane and drop it in using L.-
L
the blue arrow.
&_
¡s
l-
--
¡,-
L,
L
t-
358 . Depth Conversion Petrel Geophysics
5-
L'
l-
-. Procedure Using Uncertainty to Greate a Velocity
Model
-
a-
E\
E- -J
1.
3
Create a new velocity model w¡th Well tops correcti0n
Activate uncerta¡nty page [e'?]to insert a ^S/d

Click
Dev column and t0 act¡vate the Uncertainty tab.
Fill in appropriate standard deviation numbers.
--_L
${ Mate velocity model
rl r§l Create ne*: \'elocib/ i+1':del Llncertaini§
[nnved fmm:
üatum '*"---*--'----.-
§ Tim*:
{, -: üther:
roi.:::-
+ñll',Ell#ilHll[:r!,*
l.Ell#l lt Applyfilter: §§
Ease C,Effe{tbr* sti Dev.
ffil s$risss ¡i;+lt6trq.sü r"¿¡Htiom l{¡+lm'tsE,$ .':l 1*i

1Éi
w §xrlffi q) 3 HÜUST \tJell iops & HflUET
§urfase ffi r*se l"tjell tess W KilEE {
& Sur{are d: llffi FAHIS §Hl tess &PAEI5

J3
-)s-
--J I
.-á
4. Fill in appropriate Variogram parameters'
5. Toggle 0N the lconize uncertainty error surface _J
,-¿
checkbox.
I
t-rA
-)
I
,-¿
l--¿
-á
L-i
}.
Lr
L
6 Click Apply. A velocity model rs

generated contalnlng )--
t
velocity iurfaces with uncertainty built into them'
l';1 i*l \Hacil, itudel thmt.*nitl ¡-

" l,& l.l .¡¡rlr¡cns l.
r IV iñ L/ebeses
, Iv" lti .1,1Á¡ñ4s¡-?rFJ
¡
lvo
Iv"
.-: ,rt
r_.
i:
.n
Hlf"gryF¿redi
tr
Ea5 I -- -;r, .-i
-lr.*m tr
¿! r@
Ik ili ccñ'scqs¡a?s.i
t I"" il tt?051¡liirT¿'q-i
Ik i,-: .¿$¿¡sn:.'b' ¡'Tgs.l ¡=
L,
:' Iv- i- i Átr§¡íTt§i
TL . frEÁTlTtFl
.',
lv-';I PiFisrftF,i
Ik 1-,, ¡¡¡-¡s,a¡r¡
;. l¿l:,1 ec,:aa
tr
360 . Depth Conversion
Petrel Gec:-
.J
L.
I'
f---\
f--tt
1 . Check uncertainty statistics and display the corresponding
deterministic and stochastic V0-surfaces'
f- \i'r Settinqs f*r' Llr*eertainrY*
I-
-\
1*3§8$.ffi 1'S1*7ffi.ffi
-'r&§*§*.ffi ''l?sl&*.ffi
1:1§*.ffi
14ffi*.*§
-re?":§s€ E4A,*57* 533.3435
A Determrnistic Vo-surface is shown on the left and a stochastic

V0-surface is shown on the right
:: -: Seophystcs
J
I
)'lr-./
Lesson 2 Domain Conversion
You use Ihe
-
Domain convert by active velociQ model
I
process to perform a domain conversion for a single object. For g-)

example, you can use this process t0 convert your interpretation i
(horizon, surface) from time to depth.

4-¿
Procedure Performing a Domain Conversion by
- |-/
Active Velocity Model
1 . Make sure the correct Velocity model is actlve.
!+
-¿
t-
H
2 From the lnput pane, right-click the object to be depth H -¿
I
converted and select Domain convert by active velocity
model. )
L-J
i-¡w¡ v +x L
$S rietrs
,, É,t l.-1 fope j
v
l
Ftelt
f, ffi i--"1 Se¡smic
,/:r.. 1-:: CultuEl dEla
' , rmpoted tmÉrDHilroh
,&l-.tffi,.
€ HDUStor'I ¡¡a
ffi i. xosE ;
Shf;. !E+tr¡'e! t--
.*d lb4l 5€&C li §tL-,1i1
€ I rnñrJ É
ffi I SALT l\cl/ tr'!ñ Str,lii
FÉtrí?,ia
:lá Er:prd.. alrl-E §.-

;*
i:; arr3l€ EÉ{ lqr¡l iilür lri!€nj
$¡t E{lit 3l¡h¡l arlerl¡blr
l¡<
i;;
t&
BElEtr...
a3¡lrlstrr ..
E-
lrgi Erü¡a r" rriltrte
l'i3
ii.
i:"pi'
j--.ll¡,1ra'/Er,
3s aurtu.E
N--'
nitfibLtt
:
|"."
:,: Ei:tliad : rEt!:r! i!. a.
t-
:lrd
ts
a
f--t.
3 Click the
' in front 0f the depth-converted object to show
the available tlme and depth domains for the object.
1--
f--
---\
rE¡
I_* ,§üffi
tJ {-} rt'¡r
ZI il nsat I {Ydodtv lrodd Wdl T
ffi i-l HoBÉ

ffi i: PÁHts
ffi ü s¿rr
The Time-depth settings can be changed in the top toolbar

Alternate between TWT and TVD while observing the
effect in a 3D window.
P3trel Geophysics Depth Conversion . 363

¡-' I
)
.rl'*1
General Depth Gonversion
Ihe Domain convert by active velocity model process and )
¿
lhe General depth conversion process produce the same ^l I
domain convertecl result. However,fhe General depth

conversion process can perform a domain conversion on several jt'
-¿
data objects simultaneouslY.

-
Several 0biects SimultaneouslY
1. To domain c0nvert several objects simultaneously, open the
General depth conversion process dialog box.
*.3,Tffi.---,,, ^
, ks{"n
§rdigrWt¡f
{ig*g**§is§
ffi Se¡sr¡'n* x¡terp;etat*ñ
ffi V-1
Vei.,rne Stñbr**§
.'."$ Surfa*e attr§xae
¡-
'.:i *,rt*na-'" tu* ssdredi**
iV1 l'Á*ev*i*#ym*de§ Lr
["
&xffi
ffi C***awé$rdáü¡s*
§ §e;u:ucv+ell ti* L-r
L
& $i&ks r*sc,iaü*n ?B §l*d*l
tr-
2 Choose the correct velocity model from the drop-down t!
menu.
E-
L
\!
f¡-
¡-
j
E
f¡.
364 . Depth Co¡version i:\

,.
r--
-- 3. Drop in the objects by clicking their names in the lnput
pane and clicking Append selected ¡tem EJ in the
r--
L- r,
Process dialog box.
ffi §er:*r*l **pttr <uu***o
L"
--
- ¡-eÉ,$ cór,. efi
; l¡ tr¡*lc*lly ri-:**ei:,'l*li -iüÉ
I=
-r\
3J
Bemái§
§si*raic ffiírg
Ohiadt B,ir€ctroff
F***ard
a=
[F.*ehzed] 1
i_I linte É {i**:¿pr l* §*¡-*ard

--_f !,1 Time a HosE Fa¡.tard
:IrT Tin¡e
Tim* j¡i
3§ *ei*nie
F¿uli rrterprei¡ilc,¡. l
Forxa;d
F*r*"ar.d
4. The Time-depth settings can be changed in the top toolbar

Alternate between TWT and TVD while observing the
effect in a 3D window and the lnput pane.
Deoth Conversio¡ .365

*./
_-/
-+
Seismic Data Domain Conversion
Performing a domain conversion on seismic data can be time-
consuming. The 3D volumes consist of large amounts of data and
the entire volume must be read, handled, and included when
calculating the new domain version of the cube. The process also
Includes value scanning and realizing the seismic data.
Using the Volume attributes process allows you t0 create a

virtual (or realized) domain converted seismic cube and gives you
the option t0 use a lower interpolation quality of the result.
..¡.*-
irl * Procedure Performing a Domain Gonversion on
i§r: i.;i
-
Seismic Data
l=.ri
1. 0pen the Volume attributes process under Geophysics
in the Processes Pane.
z
5
lr-
,L
L-
L
Under Category, choose Depth conversion. Under

Attribute, choose General depth conversion.
l¡-
t
F
l!-
¡-
. Petrel Geophys cs
366 Depth Conversion
ll-
\
L
Ir
Toggle 0N Realize to create a Virtual volume (or toggle it
OFF if this is not what you wish to do).
L
I----__J
L
II
I---J
l_
II
g D*ptlr csflr,ersior¡ ; Generai ciepth c§É€rsl*n
r*
Ir
ilil
,t
i¡
¡--___..--
I lnpuuo':gut lilry§1-l_ *-*---l
1_
II
r,
lnput: g l-¡is lnealÉedl l
t
i
f_
F-_i
fluíp{t:
E]
L
E¡
rt
f_
r,--I
f
rt l.'{@-l ll,!T,i i¡.!'-41
f
r-J 4. For rnput, choose the seismic cube to be depth converted.
0ptionally, specify the 0utput name.
l__
rf
0n the Parameters tab, specify the velocity model to use
f
for domain conversion as well as the interpolation quality.
f,
-----I
rr-J
1_ O.pth Conr.oiot . mZ
-J
Í
Depth Gonversion for 3D Grids

To perform a depth conversion on a 3D grid, you must activate it in
the Models pane.
You select the velocity model in the Depth convert 3D grid dialog =
F¡ box. You can choose how the faulted and non-faulted pillar
geometries are treated when stretching the grid between the two
domai ns.
Procedure Performing a Depth Gonversion on a 3D =

Grid
-
1 . Verify that the correct 3D model is active.
F
Lir
l:. 5T'#on
;ts .tr*¡f+ --¿
l¡.-¿
i. ffi ¡?er¿ññs
L
ffi §t'str
l1
@$ ,#ss,rd,ix"r* .--/
l'-/
ffi
tiic ña¡"sÉiÉ r-I
l: 4t* .ftt*ü#er I
ir
ffiu .Ior'¡e.#e. L-r
L-I
l; lffi tn §egltresdr$er I
2 From the Processes __t

select Depth
¡!-r
L.
I
I
EJ
L
I
H/
]--/
:l
L-¡
3. Choose the appropriate Velocity model.

k-i
368 . Depth Conversion Petrel Gecp.,,. :
-J
l*<
t_.1
ffi
vdtrdy n€de{ +
,'r ,¿lti}, aE"l
rerre Geophysics .369

Depth Conversion
Y
4. Alternatively, change the pillar geometry types for faulted

and nonfaulted pillars.
A new 3D grid displays in the Models pane wlth the name !-
of the input and velocity model extension.
t
L-r
y
-.rJ
¿
>.-d
rffiffi
: ffi;-l ,srr**n"
t_l
ffi' Fa¡És
r ffi ¡&siffi |L<t
&;: ec** ¡-r
:'i{*
ffi
il
r, g§ ¡gl
¿***,sl*
ñserr,tu-
,r**me
J
)-r
I
I ft $ *nei*Ér
fHtr
F
-]
_l
§-a
5l
J
LJ
I
_)
)r-a
_r
LJ
'_l
.
370 Depth Co¡version Petre GeophVsics
¡--
TI
L.
r--{
Exercises
ln
1
- VelocitY Modeling
these exercises, you wlll perform basic velocity modeling in
L-
r,- t
Petrel.
L"
r--
Exercise Workflow
1. Ouality controltime-depth relationships for wells'
L' I ?. Define velocity model intervals.

3. Create an uncorrected velocity model using well data'
4. Create a corrected velocity model using well data'
I
I-
-.
5. Create a velocity model with uncertainty'
0uality Checking Time-Depth Relationships for Wells
l_-
---l
ts_r lnput pane, right-click the Wel/sfolder and select
a-
ln the
lmport (on selection).
7 fin'd tne NlCheckShots.cs file under Data import > Well
input data > Check Shots.
r)
J Select CheckShots format (ASCll) as Files of type'
4 0pen the file and click 0K in the lmport dialog boxes' The
data in this file was exported from Petrel, so all
parameters are set correctlY.
5 Navigate fo Wells> Globalwell logs>
Al I C h e c kS h ofs. cs > Attr i b ute s.
6 R i ght-c ick Al t C h e c kS h ofs. cs and se ect Spreadsheet'
I
I
1 From the Window menu, select the option to insert a new

Function window.
Depth Conversion.3Tl
,-,/
?J,
I
>-.¿
picked
B. ln the Function window, create a crosspl0t of the I
IWT against the lnterval vel0clty attributes of .)
AllCheckShots.cs. ::J
--_:-.1:-.,-,.-"-':.-----..--
:.i
: :
,:rr
tl
;:
i
i.;
.¡j
.F
H
j. L--
, -
i ¡--
¿
'lt
l¡--
F
I Click Select/pick mode

h , identify any outlying point'
L-
and cllck it. The corresponding row in the check-shots !.
spreadsheet is now highlighted. You can edit the row or

delete it. L.
D
10. Click Select using freehand draw'@' unO draw a
polygon ln the Function window that captures some

outlying points. All points that fall lnside the polygon are
L.
now highlighted rn the spreadsheet You can move the
,..,-...,: Editing or deleting polygon or edit any of the polygon nodes.
any check shot ¡loint will L.
influence the calculated 11 Click Gancel in the spreadsheet so that you do not change
velocitLes down to the next the orrginal check-shot data.
check-shot pair. Make sure
that the resulting interval
12 Open tñe Settings dralog box for the Wellsfolder
and go
-3
[-
,J
velocity is still within the to the Time tab.
normal range of values. The
*
changes you make in the
spreadsheet do not take
L.
effect until you click APPIY
or 0K.
tr Petrel Ge:c L-
i' .
372 Depth Conversio¡
¡
13 Toggle 0N fhe AllCheckShoÍs.cs check box and move it
to the top 0f the ltst. Make sure that it ls the only entry in
the list that rs selected. This setting determines whlch
time-depth relationship is used when calculating V0 and K
in fhe Make velociQ model process.

Clrck Run, then click 0K.
*$ Settieg:for'Yfell:'
.-., Fmm shaed ci¡eekshat
lt, From vElocft/ fú¡itiB¡ t:

,--,.
iüt¿l *¡tt*t-siG*
lr: l At BT
,Ll
j Al Scfl._ I UH
I 'J
l
l
ll *,,,:l tr$-:i i¡Jr§l
IMP0RTANTT All remaining steps in this exercise are optional
Depth Convers on . 373

15. ln the Well Tops I > Attributes folder, make TWT Auto
the active attribute.
16. ln the Stratigraphy folder of Well Tops l, right-cllck
CARACAS and select Convert the active afiribute to
points.
17. Click No in the dialog box that displays. The new point
data appears at the bottom of the lnput pane and is named
CARACAS (TWT Auto).
18. 0pen the Settings dialog box for the point data.
19. 0n the Operations tab, expand lhe Arithmetic
operations tolder.
20 UseZ=Z-Surface(x,y)
21 ln the !nput pane, find fhe Surtacesfolder and click the
blue arrow to drop CARACAS into it.
22 Click Create new obiects in the same folder ro ffi

that you do not to overwrite the original point data.
23 Click Run t0 create time difference points between the
well tops and the time-interpreted surface. (lf there was a
Lr
perfect match between the surface and well tops, all point ¡-
values would be 0, but this is not the case.)
24 Click 0K
_\-
25. Under Utilities, open the Make/edit surface process.
26. Delete the object from Besult surface, if there is one, and
click YES in the dialog box that opens"
s
27 . Drop rn the newest pornt data set (f rom the bottom of the
lnput pane) as Main rnput.
28. 0n the Algorithm tab, selectMoving averagefor ,}
Method.
29. 0n the Geometry tab, select,4 utomatic (from input ¡-_
data/boundary).
30 CIick 0K.
a1
J1. Open a new 3D window.
JL, Toggle on the surface in the lnput pane and observe the
surface against the point data.
aa
.).1 ln the same 3D window, display the surface CARACAS and 5
Well Tops 1 filtered on CAHACAS. Make sure the display
setting for the 3D window is TWT. Try to determine which
t-
well does not fit the time-interpreted surface.
n a new Well window
374. Depth Conversion Petrel Geophysics
¡.-
E
f-
E\
JJ.
3l
3B
39
Select wells Fluorite-A7, Jade-A4, and Mica-A3.
Jb. Display Well Tops 1.
Under Globalwell logs, click DT.
Expand Al I Ch e c kS h ots. cs > Attri b ute s.
Display the lnterval velocity check-shot attribute in the well
-J section. There is no obvious deviating velocity trend in
Fluorite-A7 compared to the other two wells. At this point,
-._f
- there is n0 reas0n to not trust the time-depth relationship
for this well.
&! ,i1
Depth Convers on . 375

I
I
)
5.-.¿
, Defining Velocity Model lntervals
between time
ln most cases, veloclty model intervals are defined
a prerequisite in Petrel because -/
interpretation surfaces. This is not
to define
fo, ,un use horizons (from the 3D grid) and c0nstants
interval boundaries as well.
ln this exercise, intervals are based on hortzons

from 3D grids You
will define several velocity models from these intervals'
open the -L-
1. ln the Processes pane under Geophysics'
M a ke vel oc i tY mode I Process'
2. Click Append item in the table:'dj' .L
3. Change ih. But. interval type t0 Horizon and leave

Correction set to None'
4. Set the Model tYPe to V=V0+K"Z'
L
5. Make these selections from the drop-down

lists:
V0: Well TDB - Surface

' >
' K: Well TDB - Constant'
{sre€tii}¡l Hdel
-*'rli*l vo.e*r¿ [ w x'r*" I r r'erl rnR - l*"t**'
u'*tt rnR--
1 L.
Click Append item in the table ffi to insert
four more
6.
entr¡es. ihis action dupllcates the previous setup for the
it manually' .L,
remaining intervals, so you do not have to do
new
0n the Make velocity model tab, select Greate
and name the new model vell'tod well data L
uncorrected.
t0 Z'
ó. lnÍhe Convert from drop-down llst, select TWT É
then select SBD from the L
v lnÍhe Datumaróa, select Time,
drop-down list.
(found under
10. ln the Models pane, expand 3D Grid model L
¡>
New modell and its horlzons.
¡-
-L-
t-
Petrel GeoPhYsics
376 . Depth Converston
f=
L'
--
-
3 :< Multiple drop in the table iiÉi an¡ c ic< 're c r¿
,',r',', T
tc slru laneolsly drop ali horizons ln the first
.:=
L-
---_\
TC\\'.
.q \li!i !.I.d¡iv Fr+dei
L-
Ei. '':-: i :::. _::a ltf:s
: e ae¡t¿ ne'i'r Vell-1.rd ',"iell Elala l-"ln'qreüt¿d
t¡tr_ Frl§¡ ñü
U
t¡ r" r v lo' I
l:. ,:n ft,- '
--
§ TimÉ: i- SFlt
E_-\ C{}-rar:
L_
r-^
4jÉére
Vjlt*§; I V0, \,,/*tl T8ñ - §it"qe K 'v.§!lTDÉ
1-
H¡fl?et: Nc¡e
i¡=V3+lfi !.iell TOR - Sufale
tJü: r'1¡léll TDR'tror
Harz* ¡ illJll,ill¡ .J-iñ-rl J0 r.'..re]i fSF. - Sudx: K: l',.;ál TÜF' - Llsmt¿¡i
] KCBE N+re
K: !'Jell TDH - l¡n:t¡r,1
;?:l F;Fl§ ¡l*.e f=Vü*lt"!
Hsri:¡r \{el1 TDF - Cei:tarl
\"=\,t+lf! r,rü: lellTEñ' §r¡fáre lr.:
f
5nL l.lcne
1 H§a?of,
-. you will use these intervals for the remalning vel0city modeling
U
exercises, changing 0nly the different velocity
function definitions'
--{
a- Creating an Uncorrected Velocity Model using

Well
---t Data
a-
Thetime-depthrelationshipsalreadyestablishedareusedt0Create
---t a velocity model with n0 correct¡0n'

1. ln the Make velocity model dialog box' click
E
r=
2
iY§@
0n the Gorrection and output
(if the settings are
set of subtabs displays in the lower part of the dialog
tab, make sure
box
Correction
is set to None. Use the default settings for the remaining

parameters.
'0n
n.t already shown) A
f the Well TDR estimation tab, observe that only the

Linear velocity subtab is available because a linear
velocityfunction is selected for all intervals' Leave these
r_
-{
settlngs as they are and click 0K t0 generate the velocity
model.
Depth Conversion o 377

,*Al
L--4
-l
)
L-¿
4. Perform a quality check of the velocrty model. lf a
spreadsheet rs opened, it will have no entries because no
-_l
correction has been done at this stage.
it- -
5. Close or iconlze the spreadsheet.

I
I
6.
I
Go to the Models pane and expand Velocity models>

L--J
VelMod well data uncorrected> Horizon. -/
1 . ln a 3D window, display CARACAS against Well Tgps 1
.
I
J
B. Change the time-depth settings to TVD l¡dD .l,ln the lE-J

toolbar drop-down list. 0bserve the mismatch between the
well tops and holzons in depth. This is what you willtry to
eliminate in a corrected velocrty model.
L--¡
The welltop for Fluorlte-A7 is high above the horlzon in
depth. The time and depth pick of this marker is too high for L--a
both models, which you can test by displaying the data in !.
TWT and TVD. However, the trme-depth relatronshtp is

good, as demonstrated by ihe check shots in a Well L--¡
section window. lt is the initial depth pick that needs -
correction"
¡--d
-/
ln the next exercise, you will clear thls well top before +
correctrng the velocity model to the well tops.
L--r
f
¡--r
!
t"-
+
L-
3
¡,-
l-
+
f
E
378 . Depth Conversion Petre Geophvslcs

I
ln the lnput pane, right-click WellTops I and open the
spreadsheet.
i0 Find the CARACAS well top for Fluorite-A7 and clear it in
fhe Used by dep.cony column. (you can use the Well
filter in the dialog box to find it.)
11 Click 0K
f=
ta-
Creating a Gorrected Velocity Model Using Well Data
-.^ 1. Open the Make velocity model process.
2. Set well tops in lhe Correction columnfor all five
entries
3. ln the lnput pane, expand Welt Tops / and drop the
correct well tops into the Stratigraphysubfolder.
-E{f
4. Select Create new, name the new modelvelMod
well data corrected, and leave the intervals as
defined.
5. 0n the Correction and output tab, take these actions:
a.
f-
ln Íhe Correcfion section, select Adiust and Use
influence radius and enter an influence radius of
a-
1000 feet.
= b. lnthe Aueuf section, select the Time logs and

-É¡ Velocie /ogs check boxes and make sure the Make
h-¡ well report and Reset sheetfirst check boxes are
f-
F--I
selected.
L-
a-
!r-{
f
l---¡
a-
-L-f¡
--¡
Depth Conversion . 379
,
-)
E-{
-)
¡l il.!. ldaei* $de|
E-,
' aár *s&:

:J
,--¿
*)
L-J
á t6','c.:ilii;lesr,i¿. §*iT-¡§t:!!-'1..il
-J
L-.J
Oi *¡* t¿so,c, ¡ tl -rre:&:#': ¡

* r::-#bs fr;'r*§iq5 ñtr:
fi.&of f@s
_l
liu§*H*ñd: Ct.\.refr tr : if*.¡s* :": lm.r,
+l
*i: ,*'a**:*m
*. ': , a¿rr"§ & e ¿es ú qd *
j-: Le*fr¡#¡*r :&i J-¿
ri
6k: ll *sl&::: at. i!, sáE d 'ei >
.ia r€3#i
i,, ,!, aels*t ust
' ,*,:{,,1:
/
¡-a
L
¡-
>
b. 0n the Well TDR estimation tab, Linear veloc¡ty
*U,un, click 0ptimize for estimation of K
(This select¡on ]L
the
gives a best esiimate of V0 and K, while still honoring
rate of increase of velocitY).
wlll down- l*-
Select Use data weights. This command !.
weight data points with large residuals'
1. Select these outputs:
. Time-depth
E
L.
. Velocity
.
o
Error E
L
Data Po¡nts.
É
L
E
L-
Petr el GeophYsic: F-
380 . Depth Converslon L
B Clrck 0K t0 generate the veloctty model.
luEU tuuS
e l,,linimum depth fi'lin numberu{ TDE samples:

iJi üpt¡m¡¡* fnr eetimatiün ül K
h4inimum relacñ¡ lclin i oi ¡one sampled I TDR Eü
Robust rs'tim¡tinn --''-'

;,,1 Use well ','*eiglrt* lvlin numher cf ivells ft,lat number,l iterations: I'ffi
r]l Use data,¡leil¡lts Trleran*e: :,,ífi
Ease rwell ir¡terseütir,n: l+rrecti¡.n r-r TÜF int+rs+¡ti*1,' --i EstimetÉ and adjust tn ba*e
'lutE,ut
§$ Tin e l':gs '"'elacitl loqs hlú in,::
ll .r Time.Jepth i \,Eli'chl ] Enrr l.iumber uf s¡mFle¡: lat
,pto ,.d Data noints
9. After the modelrng process is finished, check the well

report and focus on CARACAS. Fluorite-A7 has not been
c0rrected as spectfied ln the Well tops spreadsheet and
descnbed rn the previous exerclse.
10. Close 0r icontze the well report.
1'1. Perform quality c0ntrol on the horizons and focus on
CARACAS
12 Under Velocity mldels in the Models pane, expand
VelMod well data corrected> Horizons.
13 Display CARACAS in a 3D wrndow and expand it in the
Models pane.
Change time-depth setttngs for the wlndow to TVD ustng.
Compare the horizon in depth wlth the corresponding well
tops.
0pen a new Function window.
ln the Models pane, expand VelMod well data
corrected> ac data.
IB 0bserve the content infhe Zone: Datum - CARACAS
folder.
19 Plot any of the functions in the Depth/velocity functions
folder.
Depth Conversion.3Sl
=
20 Open the Settings dialog box for the velocity model "5.
VelMod well data corrected and click the 0perations tab

21 Expand the Velocity conversion folder and observe the
available operations. =-
22 SelecI Averctge velocie cube (inc)and leave the
default parameters
23. Ensure fhaf Use input domain type is selected. Thrs
option creates the volume in the time domain.
!
?4 Click Run. The realized velocity volume VelMod well data
corrected [Realized] appears in a new survey folder at the
bottom of the Sersm ic main folder in the Input pane.
25 Display the default in-line and cross-line from the velocity
cube in a 3D window.
26 Change the time-depth settings for the window to TWT.
21. lf necessary, update the colors for the seismic velocity
=
cube.
Greating a Velocity ModelWith Uncertainty

lrl
So far, you have defined interval velocities in a deterministic way L
within the Velocie modeling process. The next step is to do
stochastic velocity modeling; that is, to incorporate uncertainty into L--¡
1-
the process.
1. 0pen the Make velocity model process. ¡-
l
2. Use the same setup for this velocity model as you did for L]
the last velocity model that you created. I
3" Click Create new and name the new modelvelMod LI

uncertaint.y. tsl
4. Click Activate uncertainty page H ff,,
coiumn and the Uncertainty tab are activated.
Std Dev.
Enter the standard deviation as constant values for each of

-l
\-J
the velocity model intervals. ---l

L.
6 0n the Uncertainty tab:
a. Change Variogram type to Spherical and assume
isotropy. (Keep the default ranges and azimuth).
_l
L--{
b. Toggle 0N the lconize uncertainty error surface
check box. _-l
I Click 0K ¡L,
-J
382 Depth Conversion
Petre Geophys cs
-Lr
rL-
L-
r-\
l4§;*&iiy'i*¿§'
+¿<!,rlrtrt-r$ !*!a
L'
I-I
L'
|.
-.-
':_..---:l:::. '
E J * ..:::*rt¡q{t*¡n- .1;¿..fú_lf ¡r¡l+,¡., r:,? f...':rif'
': :
-t
1,*:,'tt $1,"r!, "l
gr :.¡
t1§§&: &*
q¡r#r i6fr §3
f,F*
'{.t*!{lea*¡e¿kl
l: n-$§.ee*$arss',v-.
f: ¡rÉ:,'r,t { taE{
When the process is flnished, close the spreadsheet and

qualrty check the velocity model by displaying some of the
res u lts:
a. ln a 3D window, view the V0 surface for CAHACAS in
the Models pane (Velocities folder > VelMod
uncertainty modelt.
b. Compare rt with the V0 (Corrected) surface for
CARACAS. Right-click the V0 (Corrected) attribute
under CARACAS velocity surface and select Use as
visual vertical position for this velocity model.
Display the uncertainty surface:
a. Fight click the Uncertarnty attribute under CARACAS
velocity surface and select Use as visual vertical
position for this velocity model.
b. 0pen the Settings dialog box.
c 0n the Statistics tab, find the mlnimum and maximum
uncertainty values.
Exercises 2- Performing a Domain
Gonversion
I
ln these exercises, you will learn the fundamentals of domain
convers ion.
Depth Gonverting a 3D Grid

After establishing a preferred velocity model, or several models for
sensitivity purpOses, you can c0nvert 3D grids and other standalone
objects between domains.
1. lnthe Models pane underthe New modelfoldet activate
3D Grid.
2 ln the Processes pane under Corner
point gridding,
open the Depth convert 3D grid process.
From the Velocity model drop-down list, select the
VelMod well data correctedvelocrty model.
0ptionally, reduce pillar geometry complexity by clicking off
geometries for both faulted and non faulted pillars.
This step is not recommended but, in this exercise, the 3D
grid has simple geometries, so this step will have limited or
no effect.
5. Click 0K. A new model named 3D Grid (VelMod well data
corrected) is displayed in the Models pane.
6. View and check the model in a 3D window. This 3D grid is
in the depth domain, as indicated by a blue icon in front of
its name;3D grids in the time domain have an orange icon,
General Depth Conversion L*
You use lhe General depth conversion process to perform a

domain conversion 0n many objects that have been imported into or L
created in Petrel. 0bjects n0t penetrated by wells will still have

well control if welltop c0rrection is incorporated into the Make
velociQ model process.
lf more than one velocity model exists in the project, y0u can use
the sensitivity of the depth conversion method for the same object.
There are two ways to perform a depth conversion on the cropped

and realized seismic volume used throughout this course. L
b*

Petrel Geophysics
!.
T
E=
E
r-'
E-. I
Using the Domain Convert by Active
Command
1
Velocity Model
Bight-click on a seismic cube (for example,

mig [Crop]
[Realized] 1) in the lnput pane and select Volume
1
I'-
attributes. The Volume attribute dialog box opens.
2. Under Category, selectDepth conversion.
-,_lr 3. Under Attribute, selectGeneral depth conversion.
L'
E r
L-
EI ,.o1,:"i.:.
ftt§gory
§r¡lkr l
f-
D*p¿i (ünl,eI§1§t
ti
l
ti§ i
---r i
f=
-.
I I
r.-
tnlut¡'trS{r l¡ü;;ltiJi
-.r ffi g ni§ $rop) r l{§rli:*d: r
I'
-.
I
a-
-.-l
L.'
a-
-I
-r-{
E
r_-
---|l
Depth Conversron r 385

J
:-J
.L
model to use
4. 0n the Parameters tab, specify the velocity
(for example, VelMod well data corrected) and click 0K'
mig
The new seismic volume in depth appears under
l
lCropl tllRealizedl and is named
mig lGrop] 1
iRealizedl I (VelMod well data corrected)'
L-
>
lk
L
=
E.
C
L.
created
tr
Display an inlrne and crossline from the newly l-
seismlc volume.
6. Enqq!'g that the time-depth settings for
the window are set
to --jt : . l-
t-
L.
t-
¡.-
Petrel GeoPhYstcs
§-
E
f
Er-
Using the General Depth Conversion Process
1. ln the lnput pane under Geophysics, open the General
f
E----¡ d epth co nv er sion Process.
2. Seiect the preferred velocity model from the drop-down
ist.
f
It" I
J. Highlight mig lCrop] 1 [Realized] 1 and drop it into the list

ial
by clicking Append selected item to the list l**ll
f
-rr
Click 0K and observe the new volume in a 3D window'
f
-r
Converting More than 0ne Obiect
You can use another approach to perform domain conversion on
other objects, such as horizon interpretations, fault interpretations,
f
Fq surfaces, and point data.
1. General depth conversion process (if it ts
E
0pen the
not alreadY oPen).
ln the Input pane, select one of your horizon
interpretations, one interpreted fault, a surface, and if
f available, a point data set.

Append them one-by-one into lhe General depth
a-
F-I
F-{
conversion process list and click 0K.
f !,,e]¡¡ct !"€11 í¿i3 csr§lld
E
a
I_
--{
Open a new 3D window and display all oblects that you

selected rn the previous steP.
Depth Conversion . 387
,)
ln theWindow menu, select Change time/depth
settings to change between TWT and TVD Observe the
differences.
Notice that these objects now have an Attributes
subfolder available.
see the
Expand one of the depth-converted objects to
I nf ormati on d i spl ayed in rhe Attri b ufes subf o lder'
Review 0uestions
¡ Can seismic data in a time domarn and
well data in a depth
domain be viewed together rn Petrel? yes' how?
lf
. What inputs are required in Petrel to define a velocity
model?
. When you have made a velocity model' what objects
can
l7ou use to convert the domain?

. in yow data set, all seismic data is in a
time domain A
to the
new setsmic cube in a depth domain pertaining
you you use the
adloining area becomes available t0 Can
Domain conversion process to convert this seismic t--

cube into a time domain?
L.
SummarY
a velocity model and
ln this module, you learned about creating
performing domain conversion'
¡.-
L-

PetreL GeoPhYs cs
-
Appendix A Shortcut
for Seismic lnterpretationKeys .- -'-
Selectanyv¡s¡bleF
I e tnttne' crossline, qeneral
verticai ,ri""rr,l, i'l d lrne (Base map
,A/rnrlnrn¡cl or .^):- ",r*#;Xoluná so
^r redispiay
,yll*y:)
rnterpretation
r,ár¡rrJ
{
window).
Shift + K
Selecllniinelrlffiuw/
map
setect oithos;;;', and 3D winoows)
,;;;,:'(Base
u,"'oL' ciick
torlontarvtn
*fl,;:;1,,v
rn+-+^ -^
to rorate ilñ;; ,üffiand
,,J,:i:fl
drag
,,
CreateArbitrar}/Ñ
lntersection
wrndows). (Base ,up rno gO
Shift + C CreateseismicAF
l'0lyiine Intersection
uno so *irlá*i.''""' rg*. ,rp
E
Shift + X Actiuate erase,
mode (Áil w,ndoñ
H/t)
E
I_-
-¡I
Movethe¿r1¡uuffiacllve
lAil
section
windows).
t'tf'?t.trrritrrtlorr,z
!1,tt inturprutrt,*
iTFrrftr,i.k/ffi
(R
'
by a given incremil
E-,.r rr,.,p,.
I_- Shift + A 1.,',::r

Sut 3p r.uouo
rriil.kñioñ
sno,tcut t<eys torGsm,c.
tnterpffin -ras
J/
-l
L-r¡
A Set 2D seeded autotracking mode.
b Set 2D guided autotracking mode.
:]
U Set manual drawing mode
-}.1
I
0 Set paintbrush autotracking mode (2D window only).
L--/
Shift + 0 Set active box autotracking mode (2D window only). -l
Ctrl + 0 Set active box autotracking mode (2D and 3D window) )
L--/
L]
Del Delete selection.
Activate the Select/Pick Mode.

y
P
fl Z- Zoom (lnterpretation window).
ShiÍt + Z Unmagnify (only if magnifier has been used in the

lnterpretation window). L--¡
(+)/ (-) Zoom inlout (lnterpretation window). -
Ctrl +Z Undo the last editing action. l--¿
Ctrl + Y Redo the last editing act¡on.
Select parent points (Base map and 3D window). _-¿

>-ia
Select child points (Base map and 3D window)
L
Shift + Y
(+)i {-) Zoom inlout (lnterpretation window).

)--/
¡-
0 Select Composite selection (Base map and 3D windows)
0r c0mpose wrth intersecting line lnterpretation
window). L.-r
,L
Draw arbitrary composite intersections (Base map and
3D windows).
¡..
Shift + W Draw alrgned composite sections (Base map and 3D .E
windows).
Compose w th inline (lnterpretatron window) L-
Shift + I Compose w th crossline (lnterpretatron window).
0 Clip and extend composite (lnterpretation window). ¡-

H Restrict active horizon / fault (3D window).
Shift + B Restrict visible horizons / faults (3D window). a-
-L.
Shift + Up I Previous vintage
Nrrrrx t
E
E Q-i;
D l',','n
Nen,",iniage
L'=
Árrow
----
Ciri + Up Previous interpretation.
L-
E. Arrow
Ctrl + Next interpretation
I-
ts-r Down
Arrow
hr
E --.t
Sh0rtcut Keys f0r Seisri. lrt.,[.tutio* fSt

rL-
L-_
Appendix B
- Surface
L- Attributes
li
--
L,-tt
L--
L'
E-¡ surface attributes provide you with additional information and
understanding of the seismic data. The followinq surface attributes
are
available in Petrel:
l-
--I
Ea
Arc length Measures reflection heterogeneity and may
be used to quantify Iateral changes in
I.-' fl\ Average duration

reflection patterns. lt is a stratigraphic
sequence indicator.
Gives the average duration of all negative
a-'
-.
of negative loops loops rn a given interval. lt is undefined if
there is no loop that requires two zero
I-
L-¡ cross i ngs.
Average duration
E
Gives the average duration of positive loops
of positive loops in a given interval. lt is undefined if there is
no loop that requires twO zero crossings with
positive amplitudes.
a: Average energy The squared RMS Amplitude. This attrrbute

a measure of reflectivity within a time or
¡s
E
a-
--E4
Average loop
duration
depth window and may be used to map direct
hydrocarbon indicators in a zone.
Defined as the average duration of all loops.
It is undefined if there is no loop (requires
two zero crossings). lts reciprocal (for
E
example, 500/Dav if the sample rate is 4 ms)
gives an approximate average frequency of
the seismic data within the extraction
a-
window.
ts-rl
I--- Appendlx B
- Surface Attributes. 393
=
_l|
Average magn¡tude Measures the reflectivity within a time 0r
depth window, but is less sensitive to large
numbers than RMS Amplitude.
This attribute may be used as a hydrocarbon
indicatot or to isolate geologrc features that
__Lb
express themselves as anomalous amplitudes
relative to backqround values.
Average negative Gives the average of all negatrve amplrtude
amplitude values within the analysis window. The
amplitude range t0 include rn the calculation
can be controlled with the parameter _b
selector. The data range to include can be

within the defined interval or outside the
defined interval. The default is to use all data
va Iues.
Average negative Measures the negative reflectivity within a

trough value time or depth window. 0nly trough values
which are negative are included in the L-
average. This allows discnmination of Iocal
minima in the posrtive lobes of the seismic
waveform.
Average peak The average of all peak values in a window. -L
value These peak values can be local maximums, in
which case negative peaks are also averaged L.
in. This attribute can be a measure of the
positrve reflectivity withrn a time-depth
window.
Large or small values may be used as a direct
hydrocarbon indicator.
_-=!
Average peak Similar to the Average peak value attribute,

value between zero but instead of takrng all peak values, only the
crossings largest peak between each pair of zero
-L
crossings is taken.
The output may provide a better measure of
L
reflectivity when tracking a single event.
}
394 o Appendix B Surface Attributes Petre Geoflhysics
-
\-
Average positive Glves the average of all positive amplitude
amplitude values within the analysis window
The amplitude range to include in the
calculation can be controlled with the
parameter selector. The data range t0 include
can be within the defined interval or outside
the defined interval. The default is to use all
data values.
Average positive Similar to the Average peak value attrlbute,

peak value but instead of taking all peak values, only the
peaks in the positive lobe of the seismic
waveform are taken.
Average trough Measures the average of negative reflectivtty

value wlthin a time or depth window. lts uses are
similar to those of the Average peak value
attribute.
1 Average trough Similar t0 the Average peak value attribute,

I value between zero but instead of taking all peak values,
only the
j crosslngs largest negative peak between each pair of

zero crossings is taken.
This attribute may give a better measure of
reflectivity when trackrng a single evenl
Cipher attribute Horizon local attributes measuring the

characteristic of one of the three peaks or
three troughs above and below the reference
horizon. The measured characteristics include
time of the peaks/troughs below or above the
reference horizon, amplitude of the peaks/
troughs, the isochron between the peaks/
troughs and the reference horlzon, and the
number of peaks or troughs below or above
the reference horizon withln the specified
window. There are forty attribute variants.
For further details, see the Petrel Help.
Appeno r B Slrid.e AtL rnLte) ' 395

-!r
_5
Extract value Extracts the input seismrc value relative to a
single horizon or an existing interpretation.
This allows you to produce Surface attrbute -L
maps in two ways

1. from seismic volumes created as
Volume attributes with methods not
avarlable directly as Surface
attr b utes -L
2. from volumes created with Seismic

calculator options.
Geometric mean Gives ihe geometric mean of a data set as
given by the n-root of the multiplication of
the data points, where n is the number of E
data points.
Half energy Computes the time or depth requrred for the
energy within a window to reach one half of
the total energy wrthin the enttre wlndow.
Half energy may indicate asymmetrtc changes !
in lithology or porosrty within a specified

z0 ne.
_L-
Harmonic mean H of the positive real numbers al, a2, .., and
rs defined as
ff t
üX
where n is the number of data points used in

the mean. The harmonic mean is typically
used with the averaging of rates (rates of
change).
lnterval average Provides users with the same interval

averagrng options available prior to Petrel
2001 .1. The Average methods available are
lsochron thickness Defined as the time difference between two
horzons. Measured rn the unrts of the input
horizons (millrseconds in Time domain, feet or
meters in Depth domain).
396. Appendix B Suface Attrlbutes

Loop asymmetry Measures the asymmetry of the loop that
straddles the horizon. lt is undefined if there
rs no loopthat requires two zer0 crossings.
The upper and lower parts 0f the loop are
separated by either the peak or trough ot in
the case of a doublet, the saddle (indentation)
between the local peaks or troughs.
Loop kurtosis Measures the peaked-ness of a statistical

distribution (here the loop is considered as a
distribution). Thrs representation treats time
as the variant of rnterest and amplitude as
probability. The trapezord approximation is
the series of lines that connect sample
points.
Lower loop area Sum of the areas of the trapezoids defined by

the amplitudes in the lower Ioop. The tail
triangles are also in the sum when the zero
crossings are defined by interpolation. The
amplitude and time values are not scaled.
The resulting area has units of amplttude
multiplied by milliseconds. Negatrve loops
have negative areas. lt is undefined if there ls
no lower loop (requires 0ne zer0 crossing
below the upper loop) or if there is no upper
loop.
Lower loop Time separation between upper and lower

duration zero crossings for the loop below the loop
that straddles the horizon. The upper zero
crossing for lower loop duration is the same
point as the lower zero crosstng for upper
loop duration. Loop duration is undefined if
there is no Iower loop (requires 0ne zer0
crossrng below the upper loop) or if there ls
no upper Ioop.
Make offset Creates a surface at each of the search

horizon windows specifred in the Surface attributes
dialog. The offset horizons are created as
new objects in the Petrel lnput pane.
Appendlx B Surface Attrlbutes. 397
-
Maximum Measures reflectivrty within a time or depth
amplitude window. Returns the maxrmum positive
number in the defined window. This attribute
is used to detect positive direct hydrocarbon
indicators such as bright spots.
Maximum loop The maximum duration (longest half-cycle) of
duration all loops, both positive and negative, in the
extraction window. lt is undefined if there is
no loop (requires two zer0 crossrngs).
Maximum Measures reflectivity within a time or depth

magnitude window. Returns the maximum positlve
number in the defined window. This attribute
is used to detect positive direct hydrocarbon
indicators such as bright spots.
Mean amplitude The arithmetic mean of the amplitude and a
measure of trace bias. lf the seismic trace
has general bias (perhaps from the data
processing), this can be removed from the
seismic volume using the Graphic equalizer
attribute and removing the zero hertz
c0mp0nent. .l-
Positive or negatrve bias may indicate the
presence of bright spots.
Median The Median of the analysis window can be [.

found by arrangrng all the values from lowest
to highest value and picking the middle one
-La
(that is, 50% of the values in the window are
below the median value). The Median is less
sensitive t0 extreme values (outlrers) than the
computation of the Mean.
Minimum Measures the reflectivity within a time or
amplitude depth window. This is the maximum negative
number in the defined window.
It is used to detect negative direct
.L,
hydrocarbon indicators such as bright spots.
398. Appeno
' B Surl¿r e Ali ibrle' Petre Geop¡vsics
L.
Minimum looP The mintmum duration (shortest half-cycle) of
duration all loops, both positive and negative in the
extraction window. lt ls undefined if there is
no loop (requires two zero crossings).
Most of Captures the most commonly occurring data

value within the analysrs window. A
histogram is computed from the input
window, and the value from the bin with the
highest count is output for each trace
location.
Number of negative Besults in a value representing a counter for

zero crossings the number of zero crossings encountered
within the analysis window that match the
criteria of the sample values going from
negative values to Positive.
Changes In the number of zero crossings can
be related to the comPlexitY of the
stratigraphy. A high number of zero crossings
generally indicates a greater degree of
vertical lithologic comPlexity.
Number of positive Results in a value representing a counter for

zero crossings the number of zero crossings encountered
criteria of the sample values going from
positive values to negatlve.
Changes in the number of zero crossings can
be related to the comPlexitY of the
stratrgraphy. A high number of zero crossings
generally indicates a greater degree of
vertical lithologic comPlexitY.
Results in a value representing a counter for
I Number of zero
cr0sslngs the number of zero crossings encountered
criteria of the sample values going both from
positive values t0 negative ranges and from
negative to Positrve range¡-
Appendix B Surlace Attrlbuies' 39{l

-
Sum of negative Arithmetic mean of the negative amplitudes,
amplitudes multiplied by the number of samples rn the
window. Thrs operation provides a measure
of brightness multiplied by the formation
thickness (time or depth) and may be
regarded as a measure of brightness volume.
A large value may indicate a high net sand
ratro.
Sum of positive Arithmetic mean of the positive amplitudes,

amplitudes multiplied by the number of samples in the
window. This operation provides a measure
of brightness multiplied by the formatton
thickness (trme or depth) and may be
regarded as a measure of brightness volume.
A large value may indicate a high net sand
ratio.
Threshold value Computes the percentage of samples inside a
vertical window, that are greater than, less

than, or equal to a user-deflned amplitude
threshold value. Amplitudes in the selsmic
data can be analyzed using user-defined
threshold values. This might infer porosity or
fluid changes when amplitude driven.
Time at maximum Results in a z-value (time or depth) as the
amplitude output attribute, where the z-value
corresponds to the vertrcal position of the
maximum amplitude withrn the analysis
window.
Time at minimum Hesults rn a z-value (time or depth) as the
amplitude output attribute, where the z-value
corresponds to the vertical positron of the
minimum amplitude within the analysis
window
Appendix B Suface Attrrbutes . 401

-
L
t
Upper !oop area Sum of the areas 0f Ihe trapezoids defined by
the amplitudes in the upper 100p. The tail
triangles are als0 in the sum when the zero !
crossings are defined by interpolati0n. The
ampl¡tude and trme values are n0t scaled.
The resulting area has units 0f amplitude b
multiplied by milliseconds. Negative loops
have negative areas. lt is undefined if there is
L
n0 upper loop that requires two zero
crossings within the extracti0n window: 0ne
zer0 crossrng at or below the local horizon
rnterpretation and one zero crossing above
the local horizon.
¡E
Upper loop Trme separation between upper and lower
duration zero crosstngs for the loop that straddles the
horizon. lt is undefined if there is no upper lÉ
E.
loop which requires two zero crossings within
the extractron window: one zero crossing at
or below the local horizon interpretation and L.
0ne zero crossing above the local horizon.
Upper Ioop Measures the symmetry of a statistical

L
skewness distrrbution (here the loop is considered as a
distribution). Skewness is zero for
symmetrical Ioops; it is positive for loops that L
are top loaded and negative for those that
are bottom loaded.
t-
Window length The output from this operation indicates bed !
travel time thickness above tuning when
using peak above and trough below (or the
E
reverse). Tapering does not affect this
operatron, because the tapers are centered at
the start and end points of the window. t
Window Length is computed in milliseconds
in the time domain, and in feet or meters in
the depth domain.
-L-
-
402. Appendix B Suface Attributes Petrel Geophysics

-
¡.

Manual Petrel

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Manual Petrel

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

(1)

C\ CD CT) cr) II'' L.l) LO Lr) (O r'- CO O)O-C!<- lJ)Lr)co(o(o F- O)OC) C\ c\

= O 0) C cn -o _o) 0) (5(§ O -.c

Composite lines........."... .................. .......122

Procedure Linking Windows to Coordinate Groups..134

lmmersion M0de........"... .....161

Visualrzing Seismic Data . ...... .... 170 =

Displaying Base Maps and Annotations in 2D

Using the Survey Manager....".. ..............19?

- Fault lnterpretation in Petrel

10 . Table of Contents Petre Geophvsics

Module Horizon lnterpretation ...................................233

Petre Geophysics Tal¡le of Contents. ll

Creatrng 2D Grd Surfaces wrth the Make/Edit

Module 6Depth Conversion.

r_- - Bestoring a Seismic Section

Domain Conversion Workflow...... ............342

Velocity IVodeling Examples ............... ....344

Seismic Data Domain Converslon ...........366

Appendix B Surface Attributes L-

14 . Table of Contents Petrel Geophysics

0uad-core processor (best with a fast clock

Ouality of the viewing experience increases

Primary Storage Fast rotati0nal speed HDD (10K, 15K) or SSD

Dual quad-core or six-core processor (best {¡-

G raph rcs NVIDIA 0uadro K5000 \

Tips Notes Best Practices

Procedures Exercise Review Questions

provides many courses for Petrel and

For more information, vistt our web stte:

faurt intrrpruturion. in aod¡tion, L

. Set up a New project

. Display Toois for ZD and3D

l_ Gloudspin Data Set

The Help Center contains the latest Petrel documentation artifacts, as

Petre Geophvs cs Project Setup and Data Preparati0f .25

reference system and unit

2. Save this proiect t0 your desired locatton'

Proiect Set UP and SYstem

ñl§ Ytll! f-l rl

L- Errors can read to incorrect

Procedure Accessing the Coordinate Reference System

Project Setup and Data preparation . 27

You can change the Proiect Unrt

!EGfrricrÉioc\ mls I¡.J

28. Prolect Setup and Data PrE3:'' -I

Elevation at Time Zero (EII\ rs, in theory, elevation of the seismic

Procedure Setting Up Reference Datums

a. Select Seismic Beference Datum (SRD).

b. Right-click Datums and select lnsert new datum

i- 5er¡lrrq¡c f*r "r*{'§ dx9'!n'.'

il.& rrl'i* 1* i,i§!,!ff.e'i1,rigx

:¡a'rÉ ,,1"- r,tr r,., fr,¿ls

i.¡ T;n* *¡rr¡:

Specify the Datum domain settings

' strfi ¡a: is' Ü¿t.n i'

l,il ¡lpe +s¡atss

§étus d*m$s lerlig§

Prolect Setup anC !ale F'e:¿'aI : r . 31

ffi Impor.e ch«Jchotsl Diant+nd 14,cs

the loaded data' ln this lesson'

and check-shot data into

1_ Seismic Data 0rganization

i- 5er¡lrrq¡c fr "r{'§ dx9'!n'.'

§ Lnad genrated SEtrryñles t PÉlrÉl